JP7414271B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-202930A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon from a group of icons consisting of the change icon representing the change or the hold icon representing hold is displayed in a first form,
The second display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the first form changes and is displayed in a second form,
The third display effect is such that the predetermined icon displayed in the second form moves to a first display position that is not the display position of the variable icon or the display position of the pending icon, and is enlarged and displayed. It is a production that
The fourth display performance is a performance in which a success/failure performance is performed to determine success or failure using the predetermined icon enlarged and displayed in the third display performance,
The fifth display performance is a performance in which the shape of the predetermined icon used in the success/failure performance is changed and displayed in a third form,
The sixth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the third form moves to a display position of the variable icon or a display position of the pending icon,
A case where a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, and the sixth display effect is performed. There is,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, then the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed. , then the fifth display effect is performed, and then the sixth display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. It is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is an explanatory diagram of fluctuation pattern judgment table T6 in a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory diagram of the big prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a preliminary determination information storage area. It is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is an explanatory diagram of a basic performance pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance up performance pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of processing during a fluctuation performance. It is a flowchart of display control processing. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the third movable accessory 13. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. FIG. 3 is a first diagram for explaining a hold icon switching effect A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a second diagram for explaining a hold icon switching effect A. FIG. It is a figure for explaining pending icon switching effect B. It is a diagram for explaining change icon acquisition performance A. It is a figure for explaining change icon acquisition performance B. It is a figure for explaining change icon acquisition performance C. It is a diagram for explaining pending icon movement change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating pending icon movement change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining pending icon movement change effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock performance A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock performance B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock performance C. It is a diagram for explaining operation stock performance A (first half). It is a diagram for explaining operation stock performance A (second half). It is a diagram for explaining operation stock performance B (second half). It is a figure for explaining icon number design production A. It is a figure for explaining icon number design production B. It is a figure for explaining icon number design production C. It is a figure for explaining pending icon performance A at the time of reach. It is a diagram for explaining hold icon production B at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining pending icon performance C at the time of reach. It is a diagram for explaining special hold effect A. It is a diagram for explaining special hold performance B. It is a diagram for explaining special hold performance C. It is a figure for explaining icon success/failure production A. It is a figure for explaining icon success/failure production B. It is a diagram for explaining icon success/failure rendering C. It is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect A. It is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect B. It is a diagram for explaining icon selection performance C. It is a diagram showing a jackpot expectation level table by icon. It is a figure for explaining icon special change effect A. It is a figure for explaining icon special change production B. It is a diagram for explaining the fluctuating icon jump effect A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuating icon jump performance B; It is a diagram for explaining the fluctuating icon jump effect C. It is a diagram for explaining operation means appearance effect A. It is a diagram for explaining operation means appearance effect B. It is a diagram for explaining an operation means appearance effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining part assembly performance A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining part assembly performance B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining part assembly effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern production A at the time of reach. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern production B at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern production C at the time of reach. It is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect A. It is a diagram for explaining group promotion performance B. It is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect C. It is a diagram for explaining stop decorative pattern appearance effect A. It is a diagram for explaining stop decorative pattern appearance effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a stop decorative pattern appearance effect C. It is a figure for explaining pattern color change effect A. It is a figure for explaining pattern color change effect B. It is a figure for explaining pattern color change production C. It is a diagram for explaining color change reach effect A. It is a figure for explaining color change reach effect B. It is a diagram for explaining color change reach effect C. It is a diagram for explaining character attack performance A. It is a diagram for explaining character attack performance B. It is a diagram for explaining character attack performance C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern color change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern color change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern color change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol production A. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol production A. It is a diagram for explaining special symbol production A. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative pattern visibility change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative pattern visibility change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern visibility change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining an expectation level numeric display performance A. It is a diagram for explaining expectation level numeric display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining an expectation level numeric display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining specific performance execution suggestion performance A. It is a diagram for explaining specific performance execution suggestion performance B. It is a diagram for explaining specific performance execution suggestion performance C. It is a diagram for explaining special direction suggestion performance A. It is a diagram for explaining special direction suggestion performance B. It is a diagram for explaining special direction suggestion performance C. It is a diagram for explaining a production sound effect production A. It is a figure for explaining production sound effect production B. It is a diagram for explaining a production sound effect production C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining lyrics image performance A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining lyrics image performance B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining lyrics image production C. It is a diagram for explaining specific area variable effect A. It is a diagram for explaining specific area variable effect B. It is a diagram for explaining specific area variable effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reliability in character appearance. It is a diagram for explaining reliability change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining reliability change performance B. It is a diagram for explaining item superimposition effect A. It is a diagram for explaining item superimposition effect B. It is a diagram for explaining item superimposition effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a game board made of a transparent acrylic board. 146 is a continuation of the diagram for explaining the game board of FIG. 146. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory decoration light emitting performance. It is a figure for explaining W mode display effect A. It is a figure for explaining W mode display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining W mode display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the locking method of the sword member to the upper plate. It is a figure for demonstrating movable part operation warning effect A. It is a figure for explaining movable part operation warning effect B.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, the production button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, It is equipped with An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged at paired positions on the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (belly button) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22. , the gate (through chucker) 28, the first big winning device (first attacker) 31, the second big winning device (second attacker) 36, the big winning opening opening starting port 17, and the general winning opening 27 ( It has a normal winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and display devices 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the shape and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed. area, and a pending digested image display area (the pending display area) in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The pending digested image 9C is an image representing the variation, and is also referred to as the variation icon 9C (the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, or the variation icon 9C). The hold icon 9C may also be simply called a hold icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left presentation pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium performance pattern (medium decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result not only on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b but also on the image display device 7. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Furthermore, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance displaying the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as "variable performance of performance symbols", "fluctuation performance of decorative symbols", or simply "fluctuation performance" and "fluctuation display". It should be noted that the variation performance of this decorative pattern is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance) during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops (also referred to as a special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing until it stops, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B, which displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a (described later) and the number of second special figure holding displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digesting image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the pending digesting image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the first special symbol is displayed. 2. It is possible to clearly display to the player that the reserved special drawings are extinguished ("extinguishment of reserved special drawings" to be described later).

On the right and left sides of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two half-ring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 normally remains stationary at retracted positions on the left and right sides of the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( (Advance) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative part when the left and right members are combined at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration part) written with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the right and left sides of the image display device 7, a third board movable body 13 (also referred to as a third movable accessory 13), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The third movable accessory 13 is configured such that two members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. A ring-shaped decorative part is formed on each of the two members, and a circular transparent part having transparency is provided inside the ring shape. The third movable accessory 13 normally remains stationary at retracted positions on the left and right sides of the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( (Advance) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. In the third movable accessory 13, when the left and right members are combined at the advanced position, the two ring-shaped decorative parts come close to each other to form a glasses shape, and cover a part of the image display device 7.

A stage part 11 is formed at the lower part of the center decoration body 10. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 includes an entrance section through which game balls flow in and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and allows the game balls that flowed in from the entrance section to flow out to the stage section 11 from the exit section.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and is located in a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entering hole) where the ease of entering the game ball always remains constant. (fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (a small winning lottery and a jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible for the ball to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for obtaining a normal symbol random number (a winning random number) and determining a winning number.

Here, the "special symbol jackpot lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a jackpot random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained jackpot random number is It is a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing it with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but a variable display of special symbols is performed on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this pattern matching game.

In addition, "special symbol small winning lottery" means that when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a small winning random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and this obtained small winning random number is used as a predetermined small winning random number. This is a process of determining whether or not it is a small win by comparing it with a value corresponding to a "small win." The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but a variable display of special symbols is performed on the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the lottery result is announced. A special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols, and the player is notified of the small winning lottery results more effectively through this symbol matching game. .

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win". It is a process of determining whether or not it is a hit by doing so. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the regular symbol display 42, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lit or extinguished) and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, and is connected to the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , a V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening/closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening 30 can pass inside the first grand prize winning device 31. . The first big winning hole sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects winning of a game ball into the first big winning hole 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to move the game ball. It is in the first state (rotating state) in which it distributes to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in the second state (stopping state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to the non-V area 70. . Note that the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left and right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state). In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. In other words, the V region 39 serves as a variable probability operation opening. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a variable probability operation opening. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small hit attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged at the upper right of the first big winning opening 30 in the gaming area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) It is equipped with 35 winning openings. The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. This second big winning device is a small winning attacker that is activated when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 and wins a small winning lottery.

The grand prize opening starting hole 17 is arranged above the first grand prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3, and the first grand prize opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes.

The general winning hole 27 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning hole 29 is located at the lower right of the gaming area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first big winning hole 30.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the gate 28 and win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (fluctuating display) and then stops displaying it, thereby drawing a lottery (jackpot lottery) based on winning in the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21. Announce the results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that was won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 notifies the result of the lottery (small winning lottery) based on the prize entered into the second starting hole 21 by displaying the special symbol (identification information) variably (fluctuatingly) and then stop displaying it. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. When the stopping symbol is a special symbol (small winning symbol) in a predetermined small winning stopping mode, a special game (small winning game) is performed in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. In addition, the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. When a small winning is won, a small winning symbol is displayed in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit, such as "○○●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If it is a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for that winning are , is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are 4 pieces. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game, the right to draw a jackpot for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b each include, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from among a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. will be held. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. As for the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) acquired for the passage is stored as a normal symbol in the normal symbol retention storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once it is memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of general figure reservations that can be stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings will be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of a predetermined number of symbols as an upper limit. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The common picture reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting up the LEDs for the number of common pictures pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, and the first starting opening sensor 21a. Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a is provided inside the big winning opening starting opening 17, and detects the game ball that has entered the big winning opening starting opening 17. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The normal winning hole sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed into the normal winning hole 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize winning device 31.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols. etc. (including performance patterns), background images, and other image data are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and a third movable accessory 13 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and the lamp control board 107 controls these. do. The production control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The production control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13, and uses the motion pattern data Accordingly, the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 are controlled. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A production button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Additionally, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a fluctuation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a big prize opening pattern determination table T8, a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9, and a small hit determination table T10 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes advance determination commands, pending pitch count commands, A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, A small hit flag, a V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variable counter, a time saving counter, and the like. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area where a status in special operation processing, which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal symbol reservation storage area 86 stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth symbols of the ordinary symbol reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for. In addition, in the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a winning type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a basic performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including advance judgment commands, pending pitch count commands, fluctuation start commands, and fluctuation commands. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub-control main processing (described later). It is an output buffer) in which a variable performance start command, a fluctuation before end command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , a variable performance counter, a time saving performance counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7(A) shows the random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7(B) shows the random number obtained by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 inputs "jackpot random numbers," "jackpot type random numbers," "reach random numbers," "fluctuating pattern random numbers," "normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers)," and "small winning random numbers." is configured to be acquired at a timing described later. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning jackpot type (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a loss, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicates a jackpot (for example, a state of "7↓7"). Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 255. The "small hit random number" is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a small win (small win determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “jackpot random number,” “jackpot type random number,” “reach random number,” and “fluctuation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The “small hit random number” is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21. The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (winning random number)” is obtained based on passing through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-read performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at timings to be described later. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during the variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a fluctuation start command being output from the main control section to the sub control section. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8(E) , a diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10 is shown.

In the jackpot determination table T1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the obtained jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to for determination. In FIG. 8(A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (probability approximately 1/397), and the jackpot random number is "0 to 164". If the value is other than 165 to 65535, it is determined that the result is a loss. In addition, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (probability approximately 1/101), and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 65535)", it is determined that it is a "loss". Details of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In addition, this reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the acquired jackpot random number value corresponds to "jackpot". In FIG. 8(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach in the event of a loss in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby speeding up the processing speed of special symbol reservations.

The normal symbol winning determination table T3 indicates whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 255)", it is determined that the result is a "loss". In addition, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it will be determined as a "win". , it is shown that it is determined to be a "lose".

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table that is referenced to do this. In FIG. 8(D), when in the "non-time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and when in the "time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". It has been shown that

The small hit determination table T10 indicates whether the small win random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "small win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In addition, this small hit determination table T10 is not referred to when the above-obtained jackpot random number value corresponds to "jackpot". In FIG. 8(E), in all states (regardless of the gaming state), if the small hit random number value is "0 to 63", it is determined as a "small hit" (probability 1/2), and the small hit random number is It is shown that if the numerical value is "a number other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127)", it will be determined as a "lose". The small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (not referenced when a game ball enters the first starting port 20). Moreover, the small hit determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when it is determined that it is a "big win."

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is composed of "jackpot type" and "special symbol This is a table that is referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when you win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number is “41 to 82”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing expected jackpot” and the stop symbol of special pattern 2 (special pattern stop pattern) is determined to be “jackpot pattern 2”. . When the jackpot type random number is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special pattern stop pattern data" corresponding to the special pattern stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game can be determined. "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not planning jackpot" This will be explained later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). .
In FIG. 10, for example, a prize is won in the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, it is determined as a "lose" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined as "reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is between "0 and 60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In addition, in the non-time-saving state, the hold on the second starting port 21 is exhausted (because it is difficult to enter the second starting port 21 in the non-time-saving state, the time-saving state (high probability, high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state) is completed. When the time saving state, low probability low base state) is reached, the hold in the second starting port 21 is extinguished), the jackpot judgment table T1 judges it as a "jackpot", and the jackpot type judgment table T5 says "jackpot expected to pass through 16RV". , it is shown that when it is determined to be "Jackpot symbol 2 (21H)" and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P22". In addition, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted in the non-time saving state, it is determined as a "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P34" is determined.

In FIG. 11, for example, in the time-saving state, a prize is entered in the first starting slot 20, the jackpot determination table T1 determines that it is a "lose", the reach determination table T2 determines that there is no reach, and the number of reserved balls is "3~ 4" and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P56". In addition, in the time saving state, a prize is won at the second starting port 21, and it is determined as a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and as "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot" and "jackpot symbol 2 (21H)" in the jackpot determination table T5. , it is shown that when the variation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the variation pattern is determined to be "P62". In addition, if a prize is won in the second starting slot 21 in the time saving state, it is determined as a "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is "P74". It is shown that it will be judged.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted and a small hit is determined, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 15000 msec. In addition, when a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in the time saving state and it is determined to be a small hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high probability high base state), there is also a small win rush (RUSH) period which will be described later until the next jackpot.In other words, during the small win rush period, when a prize is won in the second starting slot Since the fluctuation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small wins occur frequently in a short period of time. During the small win rush period, players can aim for a jackpot while increasing the number of game balls they have on hand. In addition, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different variation times are set. SP1-3 are progressively executed after normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-association. In particular, in SP5, during the small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in the time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state), which will be described later, a special reach fluctuation pattern ( "P62"). Incidentally, SP5 also occurs during the pending digestion of the second starting port 21 when the time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state) ends and the normal state (non-time-saving state, low-accuracy, low-base state) is entered. In this case as well, a pseudo jackpot suggestion performance may be performed (variation pattern "P22").

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12" in the "time saving state". It has been shown that FIG. 12(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T8. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9), in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H" as the big winning hole opening pattern in the jackpot game, the first big winning hole 30 and The opening pattern of the second grand prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", or "22H", the opening pattern of the second grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening are determined to be "open pattern 21". The opening pattern of the opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 23". It is shown that it will be judged. In addition, in FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H" as the big winning hole opening pattern in the small winning game, the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 25". It is shown that when the special figure stop symbol data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".
FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of an opening pattern 21, an opening pattern 22, and an opening pattern 23 as the jackpot opening pattern in the jackpot game. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening), and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is performed once, The second big prize opening 35 is opened for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 opening time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th R, the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and in the 16th R, open the second grand prize opening 35 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.
FIG. 13(C) shows the contents of the opening pattern 25 and the opening pattern 26 as the big winning opening opening pattern in the small winning game. In the opening pattern 25, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 1.0 seconds. In the opening pattern 26, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened five times and for an opening time of 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small winning game, the first big winning hole 30 is not opened, and only the second big winning hole 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern 25 is when the "16 RV passing planned jackpot" is achieved by the jackpot symbol 1 (20H) of the special drawing 2, during the small winning rush period after the end of the jackpot game, and during the second small winning rush period after the end of the small winning rush. This is done while the starting port 21 is being held. The opening pattern 26 is when the jackpot pattern 2 (21H) of the special drawing 2 results in a "16 RV passing planned jackpot", during the small win rush period after the end of the jackpot game, and during the second start opening after the end of the small win rush. This will be carried out while the 21st suspension is being completed. In other words, the opening pattern 26 is a small winning game that is performed after the jackpot game when a jackpot is achieved via the variation pattern ("P62") of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which a pseudo jackpot suggestion effect described later is performed. It has an open pattern. In other words, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small winning game is different between when the jackpot is achieved through the pseudo jackpot suggestion performance and when the jackpot is achieved without going through the pseudo jackpot suggestion performance.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "opening pattern 31", When the special pattern stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol is It is shown that when the stop symbol data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and the second prize is won. At this time, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. .

4. Explanation of Jackpot etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins", "small wins" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When you win a jackpot, the jackpot game opens the jackpot (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. A jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed in which a large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot that triggered the small winning rush described below. Ru.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-not-passing planned jackpot."
"V passing scheduled jackpot (probable variable jackpot)" is an opening pattern (opening pattern scheduled to pass V) that allows the game ball to pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and the V opening/closing member It is a jackpot that activates 71. In addition, in the case of "V passing expected jackpot (probable variable jackpot)", the gaming state will be in a high probability high base state from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot game starts, and during that period, the second starting port 21 It will be a small win rush period where you will frequently win and small wins will occur. Here, the jackpot where the special symbol stop symbol data is 11H to 14H, 20H, and 21H corresponds to the "V passing expected jackpot (probable variable jackpot)". The combinations of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33) ) or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
"V non-passing expected jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (opening pattern not expected to pass V) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, This is a jackpot that activates the V opening/closing member 71. In addition, in the case of a "Jackpot that is not expected to pass V (normal jackpot)", after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state will be in a low-probability, low-base state, and during that period, it will be difficult to enter the second starting opening 21. There is no small win rush period after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the jackpot with the special symbol stop symbol data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing expected jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area is 39 becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV passing planned jackpot”, “16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. The actual total number of rounds in the "16 RV jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). At 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass V", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: Opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for the jackpot expected to pass V (jackpot with small win rush), The non-passing planned jackpot is 60/128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V (jackpot with small win rush), and 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V; The jackpot was 45/128 (about 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more popular than the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol lottery). The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" on the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variable state)", and the probability fluctuation An uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, as probability fluctuation control for special symbols. A high probability state is achieved by making a jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, The probability that the display result (stopping symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is increased.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time-saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not controlled to shorten is simply referred to as a "non-time-saving state". That's what it means. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. Determine the variation pattern used. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 81 may perform probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control simultaneously, or only one of them, for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment is shown in which probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control are simultaneously executed.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-saving state, but does not perform them in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability fluctuation control by creating a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (where the number of normal symbol random numbers (random winning numbers) that are determined to be hits is greater in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8(C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol (stopped symbol) becomes a winning symbol is increased. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but it is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes control to increase the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, and control for extending the opening time and increasing number of openings for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the control for increasing the number of openings for the electric chew 22. It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning the V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the player passes to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state" or a "high-accuracy, time-saving state." The high-accuracy, high-base state ends when the special symbol is variablely displayed 10,000 times. In other words, the high probability/high base state essentially ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning a jackpot scheduled to not pass V will be a normal probability state (non-high probability (that is, a low probability state), a non-time-saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as a non-time-saving state)." When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is this low probability low base state. Although not implemented in this example, there is also a gaming state that is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, that is, a low probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state (electric support control state), and this gaming state is particularly defined as a "low probability state". ``probability high base state'' and ``low probability time saving state'' (a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a ``specific gaming state''). Further, the state in which a special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)".

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. Due to the electric support control, the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting winnings (winning into the second starting opening 21) than by hitting left-handed, and it is also possible to generate small wins more frequently. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. This is because in the electric low base state, the electric support control is not executed, so the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, making it difficult to enter the second starting port 21. This is because it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting winnings (winning into the first starting opening 20) than when hitting right-handed.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be explained based on FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the validity determining means (FIG. 23) and the preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal symbol random number, small hit random number) are updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting opening sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and hold ball detection processing. The numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If no game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-H), and stores the obtained random value in the first to Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbols reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: Value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-AS value), -TRND-RC value), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value), and the small winning random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-K value) are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for special figure 2 advance determination processing (FIG. 18), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 advance determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained according to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for special figure 1 advance determination processing (FIG. 19), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: Step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. Refer to this to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "649", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, a preliminary determination table T1 different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the preliminary jackpot determination is "lose" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number is any one of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance that it is a "16RV passing planned jackpot". In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later; however, in other embodiments, a preliminary determination different from the jackpot type determination table T5 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a fluctuating pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the preliminary judgment buffer by the special drawing 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And obtain the reach random value. Next, since the time-saving state is here (the time-saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state, and determines the jackpot preliminary determination result in step S304. A fluctuation pattern is identified from the preliminary judgment result of reach/absence obtained from the reach random value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches are selected. For example, if a loss with a reach is determined in advance from the jackpot preliminary determination result and the preliminary determination result of the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1 to 2". ”, the variation pattern “P64” is selected, and the number of reserved pitches is “3 to 4”, the variation pattern “P68” is selected. Note that in this embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later; however, as another embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 may be used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: Step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 advance determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401: NO). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. ”) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot in advance. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "164", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". Note that the preliminary jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special drawing 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", in step S203 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol is "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is extinguished and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes “0” immediately. This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of pending special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first inputs the normal symbol random number value ( Read out the winning random value). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random value is between "0" and "2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined to be a "lose". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the variation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)) . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start variable display of the normal symbols (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). If the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "loss", (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and determines the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 using the gaming state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. Select. Here, in the non-time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and in the time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 6 pieces), or the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 is reached. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (occlusions) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (the first grand prize device 31 and the second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of the "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, small hit determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of an opening command, etc. is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

In addition, in the special operation process, the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display 41b are made independent, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. may be configured to allow simultaneous fluctuations. In this case, the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the grand prize device (the first grand prize device 31 and the second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "special symbol 1 operation status". They are called "1", "2", "3", and "4". In addition, the processing related to the second special symbol display 41b and the grand prize device is divided into four stages, and each stage is designated as "1", "2", "3", and "4" of "special symbol 2 operation status". call. The initial setting of "Special figure 1 operation status" and "Special figure 2 operation status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether either the "special figure 1 operation status" or the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "special figure 1 operation status" or "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", special electric accessory processing is performed. In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed. Specifically, when the special figure 1 operation status is "4", a jackpot game based on the jackpot of the special figure 1 is executed. When the special figure 2 operation status is "4", a jackpot game or a small win game based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is executed. If neither the “Special figure 1 operation status” nor the “Special figure 2 operation status” is “4”, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the “Special figure 1 operation status” is “1”, “2”, or “3”. ”. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", special figure 1 standby processing is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, hit determination of the special figure 1, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", special figure 1 fluctuation processing is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", special figure 1 confirmation processing is performed. In the special figure 1 confirmation process, an opening command is outputted at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. After determining whether the “special figure 1 operation status” is “1”, “2” or “3”, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the “special figure 2 operation status” is “1” or “2”. A determination is made as to whether it is "3" or not. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1", special figure 2 standby processing is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, hit determination of the special figure 2, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation process is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 2 confirmation process, an opening command is outputted at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of this embodiment, the standby process, fluctuating process, and confirmation process of special figure 1 and the standby process, variation process, and confirmation process of special figure 2 are executed in parallel. Ru. On the other hand, the jackpot game and the small win game are executed with priority over the standby processing, fluctuation processing, and confirmation processing of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1400). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a small hit determination process (step S1401). In the small hit determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a small hit determination with reference to the small hit determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first stores the small hit random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. It is determined whether or not it is a small win using the read out small win random number value and the small win determination table T10. Next, if the result of the small hit determination is "small hit", the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and sets the special figure stop symbol data corresponding to the small winning symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , this process ends. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are respectively on the left side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the small hit determination process (step S1401) and the jackpot determination process. Information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in (step S1402) and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information regarding fluctuation time) are included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" ( Step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the first starting slot 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side where they are read out. At the same time, the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) are respectively on the right side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and a variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demonstration screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reservation is a jackpot that provides a greater profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol reservation (V-passing expected jackpot) It has become easier to win.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is made with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for high probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") of the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") of the jackpot judgment table T1. Determine whether or not.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special figure 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special figure 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and the process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the jackpot determination is "lose" (the result of the small hit determination is also "lose"), special pattern stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). Determination as to whether or not the time saving state is present is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1610). If the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process moves to step S1607. If the small hit flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variable pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving small wins in the variable pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). (Step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first calculates the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as the table for the small win in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to the small win (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P34") of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 is referred to. (Address is set). "P34" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass through V in a non-time-saving state among the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ” to “P3”, and in special drawing 2, the address where the fluctuation pattern is “P21” and “P22” is referred to is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and "P21" or "P22" for special drawing 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, a variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The address to which the part "P4" to "P6" (in the special drawing 2, the part whose variation pattern is "P23") is referenced is set. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and "P23" for special drawing 2.

In step S1610, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random value to determine whether or not there is a reach. Here, since it is a non-time saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1607: YES), that is, when there is a reach and there is a loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time saving state, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The "P14" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P24" to "P31" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Since the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, a shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold. In other words, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More and more short fluctuation patterns are being selected. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

If the reach random value is not a reach established random value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no-reach loss (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state no reach loss, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The "P16" part (in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P32" to "P33" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so the shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing in steps S1604 to S1611 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing in steps S1604 to S1611 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 that is referred to is the previously described step S1605, S1606, This is different from S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for non-time saving states is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, , the time-saving state variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. is referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P61" or "P62"). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and "P61" or "P62" for special drawing 2. For example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to not pass V, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 1, the part where the variation pattern is "P44" to "P46" is referred to, and in special figure 2, the part where the variation pattern is "P63") is referred to. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and "P63" for special drawing 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small win, a portion corresponding to the small win (portion "P74") of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is referred to. "P74" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern. (Step S1630) This process ends. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: Step S108). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of special symbols at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game state management processing (step S1801). The details of the gaming state management process will be described later. After the gaming state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small win flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game and the small win game are not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination, small win determination, etc. for the next hold are executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern for the jackpot and the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning hole. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. Together with the setting of the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V opening/closing member, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the won jackpot. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, the round counter is set to "16" (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag (returning them to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening according to the type of the won jackpot with small win rush (step S1811). . Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop pattern data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning hole. After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this process.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "10000" is set in the probability variation counter when transitioning to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). Note that when the probability variation counter is set to "10000", the value of the actual probability variation counter will never become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, "10000" is set in the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). Note that when the time saving counter is set to "10000", the value of the actual time saving counter will never become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the current gaming state just set (whether or not it is a probability variable state, a probability variable counter value, whether it is a time saving state or not, a time saving counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: Step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the player is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in a low base state when in a non-time saving state, it is in a low base state while a jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: Step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 31 and second jackpot device 36) based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening/closing member operation process for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big prize opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, it is operated according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. When a game ball of a predetermined number wins, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time. Details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the big winning hole is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the conditions for opening the big winning hole are satisfied (step S2203). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a ball has entered the grand prize opening starting opening 17 as a condition for opening the grand prize opening. When there is no ball entering the big prize opening starting opening 17, it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied. When a ball enters the big winning opening starting opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether it is the time (timing) to open the big winning opening. The time to open the big winning hole may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big winning hole that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. This includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If the above conditions are not met (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If the above conditions are met (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) depending on the type of jackpot. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the grand prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the opening of the big winning opening during one round. It is also possible to determine whether it is the first opening or not, and to set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the grand prize opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the grand prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in that round game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or the time has come to close the grand prize opening. (i.e., that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined period of time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since closing the big prize opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" is "16R (actually 13R) V-not-passing planned jackpot". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass into the V area 39 in "Jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 with a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass through V" will occur to the player. ”, it can be recognized that no game ball has passed into the V area 39. In addition, the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V area 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed and the present process ends.

In addition, in the special electric accessory processing, in addition to the opening process of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) in the jackpot game as described above, the big winning hole (first big winning hole) in the small winning game is opened. Opening processing for the two major winning openings 35) is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small win flag is turned ON, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the large winning opening ( The second grand prize opening 35) is opened, and then it is determined whether the closing condition for the grand prize opening (FIG. 13) is satisfied, and if the closing condition for the grand prize opening is satisfied, Close (occlude) the big prize opening (end of small winning game). Thereafter, the small hit flag is turned OFF and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the round counter values are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in this round.

If it is an opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball won in the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process moves to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first big prize opening 30 in this round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V opening/closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed when the first ball wins, regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to allow the short circuit to be opened (in this case, for 0.1 seconds) at the same time. In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, for 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and while the V opening/closing member 71 is open. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when a jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (described later in the V area sensor detection processing (see Figure 33)). Further, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball that enters the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when V passing (passing of a game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned ON when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is assumed that it will not be turned on. Note that when the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). This prevents the V flag from being turned on and set to a high probability state based on V passing due to fraudulent activity. After the short-circuit opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first grand prize opening 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process moves to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process moves to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process moves to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long when the second ball wins (in this case, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (29.5 seconds maximum opening time of the grand prize opening + 2 seconds interval closing time), generally speaking, the second ball will win the prize. The time from the end of the round to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, in the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period when the V opening/closing member 71 is closed at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S2550). As mentioned above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended depending on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after closing the big prize opening. Make a judgment.

If the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after several seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period starts. Make the settings and finish this process.

If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short-circuit opening, the condition for closing the V opening/closing member 71 may include that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after opening the V opening/closing member 71. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and the present processing ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 advances the process to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "10000" (step S2305), The V flag is turned OFF (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets the time saving counter to "10000" (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy, high-base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.
Note that in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and realistically, the jackpot will almost be achieved before 10,000 jackpot drawings are performed in the high probability/high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a jackpot with the special symbol 2 (via the second starting port) in the time saving state and a jackpot scheduled to pass V (special symbol stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is a jackpot in the jackpot game. If V passes during the game, the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a high probability, high base state until the next jackpot, and it is almost guaranteed that there will be a small win rush.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. be done. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Held pitch count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending pitch count process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the special symbol 2 reserved number of balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variable performance (step S4305). The process during variable performance is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display performance, and the details will be described later. After the process during the variable performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 sends various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 by the received command analysis process to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading effect. The details of the pre-read effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the reservation display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on the information regarding the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Fluctuation performance end processing" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance executed during special symbol fluctuation. In the fluctuating performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter etc. based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and also sets a fluctuating performance end command for ending the fluctuating performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or 2 which is changing is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. Note that if the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub-RAM 94 information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data set at the time of jackpot winning determination, which is included in the opening command. Then, select the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send the opening performance start command to start the selected opening performance to the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening performance image in the ROM 103. The image data is read out from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, a round performance start command to start the selected round performance is sent to the sub-RAM 94 by selecting a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data. Set it in the command set area 94b. When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, an ending performance pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an ending performance start command for starting the selected ending performance is set in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether or not it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to hold information about passing the V when receiving the V passing command. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this processing.

[Ahead production decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the pre-read effect determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs advance determination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the jackpot preliminary judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type preliminary judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, the advance judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-read performance pattern information. The pre-read effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the pre-read effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604, which will be described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that the jackpot judgment information “Lose” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third pieces as the preliminary judgment results corresponding to the first to third pieces of special drawing 2 pending. A state is shown in which the data is stored in a storage area, and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that from the state of FIG. 39(A), special drawing 2 has won, and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is added to the fourth special drawing 2 pending. A state in which the data is stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, jackpot judgment information "jackpot", jackpot type information "21H", and fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as advance judgment information. In addition, "Pattern A" is added as pre-reading performance pattern information to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawings 2 pending and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. " is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to this area, the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. 4. Pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: Step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the advance determination information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, if the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-read effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with reach" (step S4603). Whether it is a "big hit" or "a hit with reach" can be determined based on, for example, the preliminary determination result of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach loss" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "Jackpot" or "Lose with reach" (step S4603: YES), a pre-read performance execution determination that determines whether or not to execute the pre-read performance; Then, prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the pre-read performance random number random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93. It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern when performing the pre-reading effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-judgment result is "Jackpot" and the pre-read effect random number is "0 to 55", the pre-read effect is "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "56 to 67", the pre-read effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. In addition, if the pre-judgment result is "Less with reach" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", the pre-reading effect will be When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-reading effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-reading effect. Note that the type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-read effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when storing the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-judgment command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area are stored. A prefetch effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Set "Pattern A" to "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effects that are executed before the variable effects corresponding to the fourth storage area (variable effects corresponding to this area and the first to third storage areas). . Note that whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing to execute the pre-read effect has already passed, the pre-read effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-read effect, it will be executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. In step S4604, if it is determined that the prefetch effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs basic performance pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic performance pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display of predetermined characters and their movements, and the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up production and look-ahead production on top of this basic production. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the basic performance pattern by referring to the basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP4 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP5 performance (dedicated reach performance patterns that perform pseudo jackpot suggestion performance described later), and multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform no-reach performance. A pattern and multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform small winning performances are set. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic performance pattern for performing the SP1 performance is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs a no-reach performance is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P74", the basic performance pattern for performing the small winning performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up performance pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance up random number counter, and determines the chance up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are "P1" to "P16". The chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 includes a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P34", "P41" to "P56", "P61" to "P74". You may or may not be prepared.

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " 4-NO,” “4-SP1,” “4-SP2,” “4-SP3,” and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up production pattern, the production control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and determines the combination of production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the variable effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a variable production timer (step S5030) and ends this process. A variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", the variation effect timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation performance (FIG. 36: Step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer has reached zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of variation in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from which the production control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 etc. that it is a specific timing during the variation production, and when the image control board 100 receives the variation before end command. In accordance with the information included in the pre-variation end command, the content of the presentation is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc.

If it is not the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-read effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command that does not include pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variable effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect that displays a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect to fade the preview image.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. 45. Buffers and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying a variable effect (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying a prefetch effect (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-read effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-read effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device. 7 on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, even if the pre-variation end command does not include look-ahead effect pattern information, if a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a preview fade effect that fades the preview image is performed. Let's do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM 103 the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed, and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to display the variable effect stop display. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads a predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round performance start command is received, a predetermined round performance image instructed in the round performance start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image specified in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a, and this process is ended.

9. Operation of the movable board body and display effect of the sub-display screen 64 Using FIGS. 46 to 49, the movable board body (first movable accessory 14, second movable accessory 15, and third movable accessory 13) The operation and display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be explained. The production control microcomputer 91 is a drive unit that operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 during the game performance (display performance) or during the initial operation when the power is turned on. Perform control. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during a game performance (display performance) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the third movable accessory 13. The third movable accessory 13 includes a left side movable accessory 13L and a right side movable accessory 13R. The left side movable accessory 13L and the right side movable accessory 13R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and ring-shaped decorative parts (the left side decorative part and the right side decorative part) are attached to the tip sides. That is, the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part each have an annular shape. Each of the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part is provided with a circular transparent part having transparency inside the annular shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the third movable accessory 13 is in a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 13L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 13R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can stand still (first aspect). At this time, a portion of the left side movable accessory 13L and the right side movable accessory 13R becomes partially visible. In the third movable accessory 13, from the state shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. By moving, the left side decorative part and the right side decorative part come close to each other at the advanced position (deployed position), and one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed (second mode). Here, the combined accessory forms glasses. That is, the left side decorative part and the transparent part correspond to the left frame and lens, and the right side decorative part and the transparent part correspond to the right frame and lens. In this second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left decorative part and the right decorative part are combined covers a part of the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a is visible from the transparent part. Stay still when possible. The third movable accessory 13 can move from the advanced position shown in FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can remain stationary there.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left side movable accessory 14L and a right side movable accessory 14R. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and halves of ring-shaped decorative parts (left side decorative part and right side decorative part) are attached to the tip sides. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half an annular shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is in a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can stand still (first aspect). At this time, parts of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are each partially visible. As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other) as shown in FIG. 47. By moving, the left decorative part and the right decorative part are combined at the advanced position (deployed position) to form one decorative member (combined accessory) (second mode). Here, the combined accessory forms the outline of the face. In this second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left side decorative part and the right side decorative part are combined covers a part of the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front of the image display device 7, and is displayed from an opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the combined accessory forms only the outline of the face and does not have the central part of the face, and instead is configured so that the display screen 7a can be visually recognized. Then, the image of the face is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined accessory, thereby completing the human face as a whole. That is, by displaying the missing part (for example, the central part of the face) in the combined accessory as an image on the display screen 7a, a combination of the accessory and the image is created to complete one object (for example, a human face). can be executed. The first movable accessory 14 can move from the advanced position shown in FIG. 47 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can come to rest there.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 includes a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode) . In this second mode, the decoration part stops at the front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can be moved upward (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stop there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display images. Further, it is possible to perform effects linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Production Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, preliminary determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the display performance example, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted.

The hold icon switching effects A and B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. This pending icon switching performance can be executed during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to perform a pending icon switching effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a.

[Hold icon switching effect A]
50 and 51 are diagrams for explaining the hold icon switching effect A. The hold icon switching effect is a effect in which the modes of a plurality of hold icons are switched. The aspects of the hold icon include the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the hold icon. In the hold icon switching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. )9C is displayed. The three pending icons 9A and the variable icons 9C all have a round shape (spherical shape). In this state, when a game ball enters a prize in the fixed winning device (belly button) 19, a fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side, as shown in FIG. 50(B). At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a star shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), among the three round-shaped hold icons 9A that have been displayed before the fourth hold icon 9A is added, the leftmost hold icon (three from the right) The shape of the second hold icon) 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the shape of the second hold icon 9A from the right changes from a round shape to a star shape, and as shown in FIG. The shape of the hold icon 9A on the far right side changes from a round shape to a star shape. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to 50(E), when the fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all the hold icons 9A that were displayed before it are The shape changes from a circle to a star starting from the side closest to the second hold icon. Here, the shapes of the three previously displayed pending icons change sequentially due to the pre-reading at the time of winning corresponding to the fourth pending icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the circular variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(G), the four star-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A is in the variable icon display area (the pending display area, the pending digested image display area). ) and becomes the fluctuation icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation begins. Here, along with the fluctuating display of decorative patterns, a mini-game video is performed in which a humanoid character catches star-shaped icons falling from above. The shape (star shape) of the icon falling from above corresponds to the shape (star shape) of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. That is, at the time of variation corresponding to the star-shaped variation icon (when the star-shaped variation icon is suspended), a mini-game effect in which the star-shaped icon falls is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C disappears. When the humanoid character catches four star-shaped icons in the mini-game, the same number of points as the caught icons are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of points is represented by the number of black stars. Here, during this fluctuation, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belly button) 19 occurs, and a fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). In other words, the new icon is displayed after the star-shaped pending icon (star-shaped pending icon 9A in FIG. 50 (B), third pending icon 9A from the right in FIG. The pending icon is represented by a circle.

As shown in FIG. 50(I), one round and three star-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star-shaped) is placed in the variable icon display area (the corresponding hold icon). area) and becomes the fluctuation icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation begins. When the fluctuation is started, a mini-game image similar to that shown in FIG. 50(G) is performed. That is, this time as well, since it is the time of variation corresponding to the star-shaped variation icon 9C, a mini-game effect is executed in which a star-shaped icon whose shape corresponds to the variation icon falls.

As shown in FIG. 50(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C disappears. In the mini-game, if the doll character fails to catch a star-shaped icon (catch zero), no change occurs in the point displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of black stars does not change. Here, during this fluctuation, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belly button) 19 occurs, and a fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). In other words, a new hold icon that is displayed after the star-shaped hold icon that is the target of pre-reading (the second hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50(J)) is represented by a round shape. This will become the second round-shaped hold icon.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the two round and two star-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star-shaped) is moved to the variable icon display area ( the corresponding hold display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation begins. When the fluctuation is started, a mini-game image similar to that shown in FIG. 50(G) is performed. That is, this time as well, since it is the time of variation corresponding to the star-shaped variation icon 9C, a mini-game effect is executed in which a star-shaped icon whose shape corresponds to the variation icon falls.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C disappears. When the doll character catches two icons in the mini-game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a increase by two to six. In other words, the number of black stars you have accumulated will be 6. Here, during this fluctuation, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belly button) 19 occurs, and a fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). In other words, a new hold icon that is displayed after the star-shaped hold icon that is the target of prefetching (the first hold icon 9A in FIG. It becomes an eyeball-shaped hold icon.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the three round and one star-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star-shaped) is moved to the variable icon display area ( the corresponding hold display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. That is, the pending icon that is the target of pre-reading becomes a fluctuation icon, and the corresponding fluctuation is started. When the fluctuation is started, an icon image ICG that is larger than the round holding icon 9C and is larger than the holding icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, six black star-shaped images representing points move toward this icon image ICG and are absorbed into the icon image ICG. The icon image ICG changes color in order according to the number of black star-shaped images absorbed. The order in which the colors change is from a color with a low expectation of a jackpot to a color with a high expectation of a jackpot. For example, the order is blue → green → red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a higher expectation of a jackpot as the number of absorbed black star-shaped images increases.

As shown in FIG. 51(D), when the point (black star-shaped image) is absorbed, the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed. Here, a game ball wins during this fluctuation, and a fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). In other words, a new hold icon that is displayed after the star-shaped hold icon that is the target of prefetching (fluctuation icon 9C in FIG. 51(D)) is represented by a circle, so the fourth round becomes a hold icon.

The icon image ICG moves while being reduced, contacts the variable icon 9C, and becomes the variable icon 9C as shown in FIG. 51(E). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the variation corresponding to this variation icon 9C ends.

In FIG. 51(G), the four round hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (round) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and changes. The icon becomes 9C. At the same time, the next variation is started, but the mini-game image is not produced. That is, since this time is the time of variation corresponding to the round variation icon 9C, a mini-game effect in which star-shaped icons whose shapes do not correspond to the variation icon are falling is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 51(H), the shapes of the three hold icons 9A change simultaneously from a round shape to a star shape at a specific timing during the fluctuation. Thereafter, when a game ball wins during this fluctuation, a fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side, as shown in FIG. 51(I). At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a round shape. That is, after the shape of the pending icons 9A changes all at once from a round shape to a star shape, the newly displayed pending icons are represented in a round shape. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the circular variable icon 9C disappears.

[Hold icon switching effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining hold icon switching effect B. The hold icon switching effect is a effect in which the modes of a plurality of hold icons are switched. The aspects of the hold icon include the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the hold icon. In the hold icon switching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. )9C is displayed. The three pending icons 9A and the variable icons 9C all have a round shape (spherical shape).

In this state, when a game ball enters a prize in the fixed winning device (belly button) 19, a fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side as shown in FIG. 52(B). At this time, the newly additionally displayed hold icon has a shape representing the Roman letter "G". Simultaneously with the new display of this fourth hold icon 9A, the shapes of all other hold icons 9A change from a round shape to a G-shape. Here, the shapes of the three previously displayed pending icons change simultaneously due to the pre-reading at the time of winning corresponding to the fourth pending icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the circular variable icon 9C disappears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the four G-shaped pending icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A is in the variable icon display area (the pending display area, the pending digested image display area). ) and becomes the fluctuation icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation begins. Here, along with the variable display of decorative symbols, a battle video between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is produced. The name of the ally character CRA (here, "GORO") corresponds to the shape (G-shape) of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. In other words, at the time of the change corresponding to the G-shaped change icon, an image related to this "G" (here, the name of the ally character CRA includes G) is displayed (including the ally character CRA). Battle performance) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the ally character CRA defeats (wins) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins (points) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of wins (points) is represented by the number of black stars. Here, during this fluctuation, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belly button) 19 occurs, and a fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, a new hold icon that is displayed after the G-shaped hold icon (the third hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52E) that is the target of pre-reading is represented by a round shape.

As shown in FIG. 52(F), one round and three G-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shaped) is in the variable icon display area (the corresponding hold display area) and becomes the fluctuation icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation begins. When the fluctuation starts, a battle video effect similar to that shown in FIG. 52(D) is executed. That is, this time as well, since it is the time of variation corresponding to the G-shaped variation icon 9C, an effect in which an image corresponding to the variation icon appears is executed. That is, a battle performance is executed in which an ally character CRA whose name includes the Roman letter "G" represented by the variable icon "GORO" appears.

As shown in FIG. 52(G), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the ally character CRA loses (defeats) to the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a does not change. In other words, the number of black stars does not change. Here, during this fluctuation, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belly button) 19 occurs, and a fourth pending icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). In other words, a new hold icon that is displayed after the G-shaped hold icon that is the target of pre-reading (the second hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52(G)) is represented by a round shape. This will become the second round-shaped hold icon.

Subsequently, the two round and two G-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and changes. The icon becomes 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation begins. When the fluctuation starts, a battle video effect similar to that shown in FIG. 52(D) is executed. That is, this time as well, since it is the time of variation corresponding to the G-shaped variation icon 9C, an effect in which an image corresponding to the variation icon appears is executed. That is, a battle performance is executed in which an ally character CRA whose name includes the Roman letter "G" represented by the variable icon "GORO" appears.

As shown in FIG. 52(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the friendly character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB (wins), the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a increases by one to two. In other words, the number of black stars you have accumulated will be 6.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 52(I), the two round and one G-shaped hold icons 9A are shifted to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shaped) is moved to the variable icon display area ( the corresponding hold display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. That is, the pending icon that is the target of pre-reading becomes a fluctuation icon, and the corresponding fluctuation is started. When the fluctuation is started, an icon image ICG that is larger than the round holding icon 9C and is larger than the holding icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, two black star-shaped images representing the number of wins move toward this icon image ICG and are absorbed into the icon image ICG. The icon image ICG changes color in order according to the number of black star-shaped images absorbed. The order in which the colors change is from colors with low expectations of jackpot to colors with high expectations. For example, the order is blue → green → red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a higher expectation of a jackpot as the number of absorbed black star-shaped images increases.

As shown in FIG. 52(J), when the point (black star-shaped image) is absorbed, the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed. The icon image ICG moves while being reduced, contacts the variable icon 9C, and becomes the variable icon 9C.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon switching effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(C) to 50(E), the first effect is that the three round-shaped hold icons 9A are switched from round to star-shaped, and the first After the presentation, as shown in FIG. 50(H), a second presentation in which a new round-shaped hold icon is additionally displayed, and after the second presentation, as shown in FIG. 50(I), an additional A third effect in which the displayed round-shaped hold icon and three star-shaped hold icons are shifted can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(B), in the first effect, the three round-shaped hold icons change from the round shape to Switch to shape. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 51, in the first effect, the three round-shaped pending icons change from round to star-shaped by pre-reading corresponding to a new pending icon. The new hold icon will also be displayed in a star shape. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(G) to 51(J) and FIGS. 51(A) to 51(B), after the third performance, the star-shaped pending icon is compatible with the pending extinguishment. During the fluctuation, a fourth effect using an image corresponding to the image represented by the star-shaped pending icon is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(C) to 51(E), in the fourth performance, points are accumulated during a plurality of fluctuations, and the last one of the star-shaped pending icons is During the change corresponding to the pending icon, the last pending icon is changed to an aspect corresponding to the accumulated points. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(H), (J), 51(B), and (D), if a new prize is won during the fourth performance, a new prize is According to this configuration in which the hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the hold icon switching effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In hold icon switching effect A, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to 50(E), when a fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all the holds displayed before it are While the icon 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape, the variable icon 9C does not change. However, in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), a fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, and all the hold icons 9A that were displayed before it change from a round shape to a star shape. At this time, the variable icon 9C may also change into a star shape. The same applies to the hold icon switching effect B (FIG. 52).

[Modification 2]
In hold icon switching effect A, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to 50(E), when a fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all the holds displayed before it are The icon 9A is assumed to change from a round shape to a star shape. However, in FIGS. 50(A) to 50(E), the fourth pending icon 9A is first newly added and displayed in a round shape, then changes to a star shape, and then all the previously displayed The hold icon 9A may change from a round shape to a star shape. The same applies to the hold icon switching effect B (FIG. 52). In FIG. 52, the fourth hold icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a round shape, and then all the hold icons 9A including the newly added hold icon change simultaneously from a round shape to a star shape. You may.

[Modification 3]
It is assumed that the hold icon switching effects A and B are executed in the normal state. However, the hold icon switching effects A and B may be executed during the time saving state. In this case, the effect performed on the hold icon 9A of the hold icon switching effects A and B may be performed by the hold icon 9B.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
a first effect in which the plurality of hold icons are switched from a first mode to a second mode;
a second performance in which a new hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed after the first performance;
After the second performance, a third performance in which the additionally displayed hold icon of the first aspect and a plurality of hold icons of the second aspect are shifted;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first effect, the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when a new hold icon is additionally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the first effect, the plurality of pending icons are switched from the first mode to the second mode by pre-reading corresponding to the new pending icon, and the new pending icon is also switched to the second mode. displayed in
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the third effect, during the plurality of fluctuations corresponding to the pending extinguishing of the plurality of pending icons in the second aspect, a second effect using an image corresponding to the image represented by the pending icon in the second aspect is performed. 4 performances are performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4,
In the fourth performance, points are accumulated during the plurality of fluctuations, and points are accumulated during the fluctuation corresponding to the last one of the plurality of suspension icons of the second aspect. change the mode corresponding to the point
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-4 or aspect A1-5,
If a new prize is won during the fourth performance, a new pending icon of the first aspect is further displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The changing icon acquisition effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 53 to 55. 53 to 55, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. It has since been omitted.

This changing icon acquisition performance can be executed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) using decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command, a preliminary determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a change icon acquisition effect is included, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read out from the image display device 7, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the changing icon acquisition performance (referred to as "specific background image") is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image. For example, a specific image such as a moon surface image, a space image, an image inside a spaceship, etc. It becomes. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an ocean floor image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be still images or moving images.

Here, first, the changing icon acquisition performance A will be explained, followed by the changing icon acquisition performance B, and then the changing icon acquisition performance C.

[Change icon acquisition performance A]
The changing icon acquisition performance A will be explained with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining changing icon acquisition effect A. The changing icon acquisition performance A is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the pending display position 9Ad. (distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same distance dimension). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 53(A), the variation effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, and when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the change icon acquisition effect A is started by the look-ahead effect, FIG. 53(B) ), the area where the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed, and the surrounding area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). In addition, since the game ball enters the first starting port 20, two pending icons 9A are present.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A become visible, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad and the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image placed below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 53(B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of a square surrounding the variable icon 9C are expressed with white lines, as shown in FIG. 53(C). It becomes. Furthermore, the shapes of the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 53(B). The shape of the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is as shown in FIG. 53(C). Of the four corners of the square surrounding the hold icon 9A, only the lower two corners are represented by white lines.

The shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is the shape of the specific display position used as the effect in the changing icon acquisition effect A, and The shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed is different from the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed. It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. Note that the start of the changing icon acquisition performance A can also be notified to the player by changing the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.

Furthermore, before the flash FH is displayed, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are white spherical icons, as shown in FIG. 53(B), but after the flash FH is displayed, As shown in FIG. 53(C), the fluctuation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are effect button images imitating the effect button 63 (in an extinguished state). This performance button image is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, and does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning, but is a specific icon used as a performance in the changing icon acquisition performance A. In other words, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have been switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition performance A.

In FIG. 53(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A, When the change icon 9A changes, a message MG1 "Press the button to obtain the change icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the change icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. At this point, the effect button images of the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are all turned off, and even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, it is not reflected in the effect at all.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3". By being stopped and displayed, if the message MG1 is off, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display). In FIGS. 53(A) to 53(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. 53(E), the image is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A that has been in use moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the effect button image that is the variable icon 9C becomes a blinking display mode, prompting the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. is in effect, and prompts the user to operate (press) the production button 63. At this time, the message MG1 "Press the button to obtain the change icon!" is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a in large letters (approximately four times the size of the small letters) in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly fluctuated ( (variable display). The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during the movement are difficult to see.

After that, the message MG1 "Press the button to get the change icon!" in large letters (approximately four times the size of the small letters) that was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is now displayed. It moves to the upper right corner of the screen 7a while being reduced, and is displayed in two lines, smaller than large letters and larger than small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters Oki). As described above, the message MG1 can be displayed in one line in small characters as shown in FIG. 53(C), or in large characters (approximately double the size) and displayed in two lines, and the following in Figure 53 (E) is displayed in two lines with a size larger than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters Oki) There are three display modes in total, and the same content is displayed in three display modes when changing icon acquisition performance A is performed.The content of message MG1 can be expressed in an unprecedented way in the game. Able to emphasize and convey information in an easy-to-understand manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53(F), when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or the player does not operate (presses) the production button 63 for a predetermined period (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (3 seconds) have passed since the start of the variable presentation (variable display), a message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, informing whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Ru. Here, the message MG2 saying "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the display screen 7a because the change icon cannot be obtained. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", so that it is not a miss. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the display mode becomes such that the performance button image that is the variable icon 9C blinks, The player is informed that the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63 is effective and prompting the player to operate (pressing the production button 63). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuated (variably displayed) at high speed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or the player does not operate (presses) the production button 63 for a predetermined period (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (3 seconds) after the start of the variable presentation (variable display), a message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been obtained is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. be done. Here, a change icon can be acquired and a message MG2 saying "Acquired!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are still fluctuated (variably displayed) at high speed, and the fluctuating icon 9C also does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is displayed in stock at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 53(H). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(I), the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light. Then, by activating the stocked change icon HI, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward this white spherical icon that appears, and the size of this white spherical icon that appears increases until it is displayed as an icon. It is about four times the size of the white spherical icon that was previously displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the white spherical icon changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon and appears, and this star-shaped icon blinks. The variable icon 9C moves toward the variable display position 9Cd where the production button image is displayed while being reduced.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(K), the effect button image, which is the variable icon 9C, is switched to a star-shaped icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd where the four corners of the square shape are expressed with white lines, and the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding position where the lower two corners of the square shape are expressed with white lines. The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. After this, message MG1 also disappears from display screen 7a. Although the star-shaped icon is reduced during movement, it is larger than the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 53(a), and is approximately 1.5 times larger. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(L), the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 is used as the normal background image). The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, return to the original variable area. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the changing icon acquisition performance A ends. After change icon acquisition performance A, various performances may be further continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as the same symbol, it becomes a jackpot and then While a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it is a loss.

[Change icon acquisition performance B]
Next, the changing icon acquisition performance B will be explained with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining changing icon acquisition effect B. The changing icon acquisition performance B is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 54(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves in small increments in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the pending display position 9Ad. (distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same distance dimension). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 54(A), the variation effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, and when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the change icon acquisition effect B is started by the look-ahead effect, FIG. 54(B) ), the area where the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed, and the surrounding area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). In addition, since the game ball enters the first starting port 20, two pending icons 9A are present.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A become visible, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad and the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image placed below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 54(B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of a square surrounding the variable icon 9C are expressed with white lines, as shown in FIG. 54(C). It becomes. Moreover, the shapes of the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 54(B). The shape of the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is as shown in FIG. 54(C). Of the four corners of the square surrounding the hold icon 9A, only the lower two corners are represented by white lines.

The shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is the shape of the specific display position used as the effect in the changing icon acquisition effect B, and The shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed is different from the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed. It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. Note that the start of the changing icon acquisition performance B can also be notified to the player by changing the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.

Furthermore, before the flash FH is displayed, the fluctuation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are white spherical icons, as shown in FIG. 54(B), but after the flash FH is displayed, As shown in FIG. 54(C), the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are sword images imitating the sword member 65, and are specific icons used as effects in the variable icon acquisition effect B. In other words, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition performance B. Note that although the sword image imitates the sword member 65, even if the player performs an operation to push the sword member 65, it is not reflected in the performance in the change icon acquisition performance B at all.

In FIG. 54(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A, When the change occurs, a message MG1 "Defeat and obtain the change icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the change icon 9C and the pending icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3". By being stopped and displayed, if the message MG1 is off, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display). In FIGS. 54(A) to 54(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1 as the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. 54(E), the image is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a large letter (approximately 4 times the size of the small letter) appears in the center of the display screen 7a saying ``Repel!'' Obtain the change icon!'' message MG1 is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a, and the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. A decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed) at high speed. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during the movement are difficult to see.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight, and then the large letters (about 4 times the size of the small letters) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a appear. The message MG1 "Fight off and get the change icon!" is now reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a and moved to a size smaller than the large letters and larger than the small letters (compared to the small letters Oki). (approximately twice the size) and is displayed in two lines. As described above, the message MG1 can be displayed in one line in small characters as shown in FIG. 54(C), or in large characters as shown in FIG. double the size) and displayed in two lines, and the following in Figure 54 (E) is displayed in two lines with a larger size than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters Oki) There are three display modes in total, and the same content is displayed in three display modes when changing icon acquisition performance B is performed, which is an unprecedented method of expression to express the content of message MG1 in the game. Able to emphasize and convey information in an easy-to-understand manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(F), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R), A message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, informing whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, since the friendly character CRA was defeated and the enemy character CRB won, the change icon could not be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Unfortunate!" is placed to the left of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", so that it is not a miss. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move at high speed. A variable effect (variable display) is displayed. As a result, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(G), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) has elapsed, A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA won and the enemy character CRB was defeated, the changing icon can be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Acquired!" is placed to the left of the ally character CRA and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are still fluctuated (variably displayed) at high speed, and the fluctuating icon 9C also does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is displayed in stock at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 54(H). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light. Then, by activating the stocked change icon HI, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward this white spherical icon that appears, and the size of this white spherical icon that appears increases until it is displayed as an icon. It is about four times the size of the white spherical icon that was previously displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the white spherical icon does not switch to another icon, that is, the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 54(a) The white spherical icon moves while shrinking toward the variable display position 9Cd where the sword image that is the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(K), the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is switched to a white spherical icon reduced to the original size. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd where the four corners of the square shape are expressed with white lines, and the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding position where the lower two corners of the square shape are expressed with white lines. The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. After this, message MG1 also disappears from display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(L), the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 is used as the normal background image). The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, return to the original variable area. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the changing icon acquisition performance B ends. After change icon acquisition performance B, various performances may be further continued, and when the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as the same symbol, it becomes a jackpot and then While a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, the game becomes a loss.

[Change icon acquisition performance C]
Next, the changing icon acquisition effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining changing icon acquisition effect B. The changing icon acquisition performance C is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the pending display position 9Ad. (distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same distance dimension). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Cd displays the white spherical hold icon 9A. No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three pending icons that have not been consumed and have been stocked.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 55(A), the variation effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, and when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the change icon acquisition effect C is started by the look-ahead effect, FIG. 55(B) ), the area where the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed, and the surrounding area are difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. ). In addition, since the game ball enters the first starting port 20, there are four pending icons 9A.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A become visible, and at this time, the flash FH is displayed. Before and after, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad and the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image placed below the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 55(B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of a square surrounding the variable icon 9C are expressed with white lines, as shown in FIG. 55(C). It becomes. In addition, the shapes of the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 55(B). The shape of the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is as shown in FIG. 55(C). Of the four corners of the square surrounding the hold icon 9A, only the lower two corners are represented by white lines.

The shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed is the shape of the specific display position used as the effect in the changing icon acquisition effect C, and The shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed is different from the shape of the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed, thereby It is possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. Note that the start of the changing icon acquisition effect C can also be communicated to the player by changing the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.

Furthermore, before the flash FH is displayed, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are white spherical icons, as shown in FIG. 55(B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed, As shown in FIG. 55(C), the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are sword images imitating the sword member 65, and are specific icons used as effects in the variable icon acquisition effect C. In other words, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the variable icon acquisition performance C. Note that although the sword image is an ax imitating the sword member 65, even if the player performs an operation to push the sword member 65, it is not reflected in the performance in the change icon acquisition performance C at all.

In FIG. 55(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A, When the change occurs, a message MG1 "Defeat and obtain the change icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the change icon 9C and the pending icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3". By being stopped and displayed, if the message MG1 is off, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display). In FIGS. 55(A) to 55(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. 55(E), the image is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a large letter (approximately 4 times the size of the small letter) appears in the center of the display screen 7a saying ``Repel!'' Obtain the change icon!'' message MG1 is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a, and the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. A decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed) at high speed. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during the movement are difficult to see.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight, and then the large letters (about 4 times the size of the small letters) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a appear. The message MG1 "Fight off and get the change icon!" is now reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a and moved to a size smaller than the large letters and larger than the small letters (compared to the small letters Oki). (approximately twice the size) and is displayed in two lines. As described above, the message MG1 can be displayed in one line in small characters as shown in FIG. 55(C), or in large characters (approximately double the size) and displayed in two lines, and the following in Figure 55(E) is displayed in two lines in a larger size than the small letters (approximately twice the size of the small letters Oki). There are three display modes in total, and the same content is displayed in three display modes when changing icon acquisition effect C is performed.The content of message MG1 is expressed in an unprecedented way. Able to emphasize and convey information in an easy-to-understand manner.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(F), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the start of variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) has elapsed, A message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, informing whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, since the friendly character CRA was defeated and the enemy character CRB won, the change icon could not be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Unfortunate!" is placed to the left of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", so that it is not a miss. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move at high speed. A variable effect (variable display) is displayed. As a result, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(G), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) has elapsed, A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA won and the enemy character CRB was defeated, the changing icon can be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Acquired!" is placed to the left of the ally character CRA and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2", so that it is not missed. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. When the pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) at high speed. As a result, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(I), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R), A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the friendly character CRA was defeated and the enemy character CRB won, the change icon could not be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Unfortunate!" is placed to the left of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", so that it is not missed. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move at high speed. A variable effect (variable display) is displayed. As a result, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(J), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R), A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA won and the enemy character CRB was defeated, the changing icon can be obtained, and a message MG2 saying "Acquired!" is placed to the left of the ally character CRA and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are still fluctuated (variably displayed) at high speed, and the fluctuating icon 9C also does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. The change icons HI and HI are displayed, and the change icons HI and HI are arranged side by side, and then the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and with a flash of light. It appears at the center of the display screen 7a. Then, by activating the two change icons HI, HI arranged vertically and stocked, lightning bolts from the two change icons HI, HI arranged vertically towards this white spherical icon that appeared. runs, and the size of this white spherical icon that appears becomes larger, up to about four times the size of the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(L), the two change icons HI and HI arranged vertically disappear from the display screen 7a, and the white spherical icon changes to a red smiling spherical icon and appears. Then, this smiling sphere icon moves while shrinking toward the fluctuating display position 9Cd where the sword image that is the flashing fluctuating icon 9C is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(M), the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is switched to a smiling sphere icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd where the four corners of the square shape are expressed with white lines, and the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding position where the lower two corners of the square shape are expressed with white lines. The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. After this, message MG1 also disappears from display screen 7a. Although the smiling sphere icon is reduced in size during movement, it is now larger than the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 55(a), approximately 1.5 times larger. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(N), the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 is used as the normal background image). The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, return to the original variable area. The variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the changing icon acquisition performance C ends. After the change icon acquisition performance C, various performances may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it becomes a jackpot and then While a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it is a loss.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the changing icon acquisition performance is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition performance A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C in FIG. 20 (ball entry port), and an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and in connection with the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 (ball entry port). By using the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A as the same specific icon, it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect in which the change icon acquisition effect A switches to a effect button image imitating the effect button 63 and displays it, and the change icon acquisition effects B and C It is possible to perform a look-ahead effect that switches and displays a sword image imitating the sword member 65, and when it switches to a specific icon, a change icon HI that can change (increase) the expectation of winning is displayed and a change icon is displayed. The first performance in which HI can be obtained (Figures 53 (F) and (G) for changing icon acquisition performance A, Figures 54 (F) and (G) for changing icon acquisition performance B, and Figure 55 for changing icon acquisition performance C) (F), (G), and (J)). According to this configuration, by switching the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A to the same specific icon, it is possible to contribute to eliminating monotony in the consumption mode of the pending icon 9A, and to increase the expectation of winning. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to acquire a changing icon HI that can be changed (updated). Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition performance A shown in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B shown in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C shown in FIG. It looks like this. According to this configuration, the first effect can be executed even if there is a single hold icon 9A or a plurality of hold icons 9A. If there is one or more pending icons 9A, the first effect can be executed, so even if there is only one pending icon 9A, the player's expectation level of winning will increase. It is possible to continue to provide a sense of expectation of an opportunity to acquire change icons HI that can be upgraded, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's desire to play due to the number of pending icons 9A.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the change icon acquisition performance A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C in FIG. 55, the change is made by the number of specific icons. It is now possible to obtain an opportunity to obtain icon HI. According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain as many opportunities as the number of specific icons to acquire change icons HI, so the expectation level of winning due to the occurrence of change icon acquisition performance A, change icon acquisition performance B, and change icon acquisition performance C It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of an increase. Note that the number of pending icons 9A (that is, the number of specific icons) and the number of changeable icons that can be obtained do not need to match, and even if there is only one pending icon 9A, When change icon acquisition performance A, change icon acquisition performance B, and change icon acquisition performance C are performed, there are times when a change icon cannot be acquired, and times when a single change icon can be acquired. Sometimes you can get two changing icons, and sometimes you can get three changing icons.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the changing icon acquisition performance A shown in FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition performance B shown in FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition performance C shown in FIG. When the relevant fluctuating icon 9C that has been switched to a specific icon is digested and disappears due to the end of the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display), the pending icon 9A that has been switched to a specific icon is displayed in a certain direction (the fluctuating display that displays the fluctuating icon 9C) It is now possible to shift toward position 9Cd). According to this configuration, the degree of decrease in the number of specific icons can be visually communicated to the player, and the remaining number of opportunities to acquire the changed icon can be conveyed to the player.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the changing icon acquisition performance A shown in FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition performance B shown in FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition performance C shown in FIG. The change icon HI cannot be obtained during the change effect (during the change display) at the time when the pre-read effect switches the change icon 9C and the pending icon 9A to the specific icon. Although the variable icon 9C may be used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) during a variable presentation (variable display), the variable icon 9C in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is It is not a notice for a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display), but is also used as a notice to notify the start of the first performance that is about to begin (in other words, in the next fluctuating performance (next fluctuating display)), and in this respect, during a fluctuating performance. This is different from the case in which the fluctuation icon 9C is used as a notice for (during fluctuation display).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the changing icon acquisition performance A in FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition performance B in FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition performance C in FIG. When the pending icon 9A becomes the relevant fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) is started, it becomes possible to acquire the change icon HI during the fluctuation performance (during the fluctuation display), and the acquired change icon HI can be stocked. It has become. According to this configuration, the acquired change icon HI is not consumed immediately upon acquisition, but is stored, so the player can grasp the number of acquired change icons HI, and the change icon HI that has been stocked is stored. Expectations for the effect of activating the icon HI, that is, expectations for an increase in the expectation of winning, increase.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first performance in the changing icon acquisition performance A of FIG. 53, the changing icon acquisition performance B of FIG. 54, and the changing icon acquisition performance C of FIG. A lightning bolt is emitted from the stocked change icon HI and the change icon 9C, which is switched to a specific icon, is switched to an icon that indicates the expectation of winning (in the change icon acquisition performance A, FIG. 53 (I), In the changing icon acquisition performance B, the process shown in FIG. 54 (I), and in the changing icon acquisition performance C, the process shown in FIG. 55 (K) can be executed. According to this configuration, when the second performance is performed, the effect of activating the change icon HI that has already been stocked is exhibited, so the player can increase the number of change icons HI that he has stocked and the expectation level of winning. You can discover relationships (rules) by yourself.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the changing icon acquisition performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
Change icon acquisition performance A in FIG. 53, change icon acquisition performance B in FIG. 54, and change icon acquisition performance C in FIG. 55 were performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. . In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the change icon acquisition performance A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of FIG. 55, a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the game is started by a look-ahead performance. However, it is also possible to determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect by a unique lottery performed by the sub-control board 90 without using the pre-read effect. In this case, in order to execute any one of the changing icon obtaining effect A, the changing icon obtaining effect B, and the changing icon obtaining effect C over a plurality of variable effects (fluctuating displays) using decorative patterns, the sub control board 90 needs to be performed while adjusting the progress of the changing icon acquisition performance in real time, taking into account the performance time indicated by the variable performance start command from the main control board 80.

[Modification 3]
In the change icon acquisition performance A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of FIG. 55, the change icon HI is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, it may be displayed on the display screen of another image display device provided separately from the image display device 7. Other image display devices may be provided on the game board 2 together with the image display device 7, or may be provided on the front frame 53. In this way, since there are a plurality of image display devices, it is possible to increase variations in display modes by the plurality of image display devices.

[Modification 4]
In the change icon acquisition performance A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of FIG. 55, the change icon HI is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, it is possible to provide a plurality of structures with three-dimensional shapes imitating changing icons on the game board 2 or the front frame 53, and to inform the player of the number of acquired changing icons based on the number of lights emitted by these structures. You may also do so.

[Modification 5]
In change icon acquisition performance A in FIG. 53, change icon acquisition performance B in FIG. 54, and change icon acquisition performance C in FIG. was. At this time, the stocked change icon HI may disappear from the display screen 7a due to the display mode in which it explodes due to the lightning it has emitted, or the stocked change icon HI may run out of energy due to the lightning it has emitted and its own structure may be It may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display mode in which it peels off into pieces.

[Modification 6]
In the change icon acquisition performance A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of FIG. It was supposed to be done when it was an icon. However, for example, it may be performed when the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are different icons. For example, when the variable icon 9C is a smiling spherical icon and the pending icon 9A is a white spherical icon, one of the changing icon acquisition performance A, the changing icon acquisition performance B, and the changing icon acquisition performance C is performed. You can. This is because the fluctuation icon 9C may be used as a notice during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) (a "change performance" that changes the display mode), but it is used as a notice during a fluctuating performance (while a fluctuating display is in progress). Instead, it is used as a notice to notify the start of change icon acquisition performance A, change icon acquisition performance B, and change icon acquisition performance C that will be started in the next variation display (next variation display).

[Modification 7]
Change icon acquisition performance A in FIG. 53, change icon acquisition performance B in FIG. 54, and change icon acquisition performance C in FIG. You can.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect in which the variable icon and the hold icon are switched to the same specific icon in connection with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry hole,
When switching to the specific icon, it is possible to display a changing icon that can change the expectation of winning and execute a first performance that can acquire the changing icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
There is a single or multiple pending icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the first performance, it is possible to obtain as many chances as the number of the change icons as the number of the specific icons.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the first effect, when the variable icon that has been switched to the specific icon is digested and disappears due to the end of the variable effect, the pending icon that has been switched to the specific icon is shifted in a fixed direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
In the first performance, the change icon cannot be acquired during the change performance at the time when the look-ahead performance switches the relevant change icon and the pending icon to the specific icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the first effect, when the pending icon that has been switched to the specific icon becomes the variable icon and the variable effect is started, the change icon can be acquired during the variable effect, and the acquired change icon is stocked. do,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-6,
After the first effect, a second effect is performed in which a lightning bolt is emitted from the variable icon stocked by the first effect and the variable icon that has been switched to the specific icon is switched to an icon that indicates the expectation of winning. It is possible to perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon movement change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 56 to 58. This pending icon movement change effect may be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and, if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon movement change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Pending icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change effect A. The hold icon movement change effect is a effect in which the image representing the hold icon moves and changes its appearance. The aspects here include the shape, color, motion, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement change production A, first, as shown in FIG. Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are also collectively referred to simply as "hold icons 9A, 9C." The hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (fluctuating icon display area, hold digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), at a certain timing during the fluctuation, a character image "Start of suspended change pseudo series!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three pending icons 9A disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the hold icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The first position is located to the left of the pending display area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 56(D), the hold icon 9C moves from the first position toward the hold display area in the right direction. In the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach state, a character image of "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The color of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image "Hold Change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous presentation, when the character image "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the mode of the hold icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the hold icon 9C changes. The order in which the colors of the pending icon 9C change is from a color with a low expectation of a jackpot to a color with a high expectation. For example, the order is blue → green → red.

As shown in FIG. 56(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at "567". This time, since the medium decorative pattern 8C is not temporarily stopped at the character image of "Pending Change", the color of the pending icon 9C does not change. The hold icon 9C continues to move in the right direction.

As shown in FIG. 56(G), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the reach state of "3↓3", the character image "Hold change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon 9C change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image "Hold Change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous presentation, when the character image "Hold change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the color and shape of the hold icon 9C change to a more highly anticipated mode.

As shown in FIG. 56(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right, reaches the hold display area, and stops. That is, the pending icon 9C returns to its original position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the jackpot mode of "333".

[Pending icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change effect B. The hold icon moving change effect is a effect in which the image representing the hold icon moves and changes its appearance. The aspects here include the shape, color, motion, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the pending icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are also collectively referred to simply as "hold icons 9A, 9C." The hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (fluctuating icon display area, hold digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), at a certain timing during the fluctuation, a character image "Start of suspended change pseudo series!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three pending icons 9A disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the hold icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a new specific image BG is displayed below the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, the left end of which corresponds to the first position, and the right end of which corresponds to the hold display area. A new numeric image SG is displayed at the upper left of the hold icon 9C. The numerical image SG represents the remaining number of pseudo-runs. Here, "4" is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 57(D), the hold icon 9C moves from the left end toward the right end on the specific image BG. In other words, it moves from the first position toward the corresponding hold display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the pending icon 9C with respect to the specific image BG represents (notifies) the remaining period in which the pseudo-linked effect will be executed. The numeric image SG moves in accordance with the movement of the pending icon 9C. That is, the numeric image SG moves while maintaining the same distance from the moving pending icon 9C. In the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach state, a character image of "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The color of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image "Hold Change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous presentation, when the character image "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the mode of the hold icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the hold icon 9C changes. The order in which the colors of the pending icon 9C change is from a color with a low expectation of a jackpot to a color with a high expectation. For example, the order is blue → green → red. By temporarily stopping the medium decorative pattern 8C, one part of the pseudo series is completed, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3".

As shown in FIG. 57(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move rightward on the specific image BG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop at "5" and "7", they temporarily stop at the character image "G!" instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C. In conjunction with this temporary stop of the character image "Get Points!", a black star-shaped point is displayed on the specific image BG. These black star-shaped points will increase (accumulate) by one each time the character image "Get Points!" is temporarily stopped during the pseudo-ren period, instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C. Then, at the time of the final change of the pseudo group, a performance using these points is executed. By temporarily stopping the medium decorative pattern 8C, one portion of the pseudo series is completed, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2".

As shown in FIG. 57(G), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move rightward on the specific image BG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state of "3↓3", the character image "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon 9C change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image "Hold Change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous presentation, when the character image "Hold change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the color and shape of the hold icon 9C change to a more highly anticipated mode. By temporarily stopping the medium decorative pattern 8C, one part of the pseudo series is completed, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 57(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right, and when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG, it stops there. Almost at the same time, the specific image BG disappears. As a result, the hold icon 9C stops in the hold display area. That is, the pending icon 9C returns to its original position. For the final change of the pseudo-people, a performance using the accumulated black star-shaped points will be executed. Here, a black star-shaped point moves while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed at the center of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the jackpot mode of "333".

[Pending icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change effect C. The hold icon moving change effect is a effect in which the image representing the hold icon moves and changes its appearance. The aspects here include the shape, color, motion, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are also collectively referred to simply as "hold icons 9A, 9C." The hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (fluctuating icon display area, hold digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), at a certain timing during the fluctuation, a character image "Start of suspended change pseudo series!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C and the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (are not displayed). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(C), a pending icon image 9D representing the pending icons 9A and 9C is newly displayed at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image 9D may be the hold icons 9A, 9C, or may be an image imitating the hold icons 9A, 9C. A new specific image BG is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, the left end of which corresponds to the first position, and the right end of which corresponds to the hold display area. A new numeric image SG is displayed at the upper left of the pending icon image 9D. The number image SG is displayed partially overlapping the pending icon image 9D. The numerical image SG represents the remaining number of pseudo-runs. Here, "4" is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 58(D), the pending icon image 9D moves from the left end toward the right end on the specific image BG. In other words, it moves from the first position toward the corresponding hold display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the pending icon image 9D with respect to the specific image BG represents (is notified of) the remaining period in which the pseudo-coupled effect is executed. The numeric image SG moves in accordance with the movement of the pending icon image 9D. That is, the numeric image SG moves while overlapping the upper left of the moving pending icon image 9D. In the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach state, a character image of "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The color of the hold icon image 9D changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image "Hold Change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous presentation, when the character image "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the mode of the hold icon image 9D changes. Here, the color of the pending icon image 9D changes. The order in which the colors of the pending icon image 9D change is from a color with a low expectation of a jackpot to a color with a high expectation. For example, the order is blue → green → red. By temporarily stopping the medium decorative pattern 8C, one part of the pseudo series is completed, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3".

As shown in FIG. 58(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The pending icon image 9D continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop at "5" and "7", they temporarily stop at the character image "Get Points!" instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C. In conjunction with this temporary stop of the character image "Get Points!", a black star-shaped point is displayed on the specific image BG. These black star-shaped points will increase (accumulate) by one each time the character image "Get Points!" is temporarily stopped during the pseudo-ren period, instead of the medium decorative pattern 8C. Then, at the time of the final change of the pseudo group, a performance using these points is executed. By temporarily stopping the medium decorative pattern 8C, one portion of the pseudo series is completed, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2".

As shown in FIG. 58(G), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The pending icon image 9D continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state of "3↓3", the character image "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon image 9D change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image "Hold Change". That is, during the pseudo-continuous presentation, when the character image "Hold Change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the color and shape of the hold icon image 9D change to a more highly anticipated manner. By temporarily stopping the medium decorative pattern 8C, one part of the pseudo series is completed, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 58(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo-continuous effect. The pending icon image 9D continues to move to the right, and when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG, it stops there. Almost at the same time, the specific image BG disappears. Then, the hold icon 9C in the same manner as the hold icon image 9D is displayed in the hold display area. That is, an effect is performed in which the pending icon 9C appears to have returned to its original position. If the hold icon image 9D is the hold icon 9C itself, it means that the hold icon image 9D has returned to its original position. For the final change of the pseudo-people, a performance using the accumulated black star-shaped points will be executed. Here, a black star-shaped point moves while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed at the center of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the jackpot mode of "333".

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the pending icon movement change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. , a second effect can be executed in which the pending icon 9C of the changed color is displayed in the pending display area. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, a first effect in which the pending icon image 9D (image representing the pending icon) changes color while moving, and after the first presentation, A second effect can be performed in which the pending icon image 9D of the changed color is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digested image display area). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56(A), 57(A), and 58(A), the pending icon 9C (image representing the pending icon) is displayed before the first performance. can execute a third effect displayed in the pending display area (fluctuating icon display area, pending digested image display area), and after the third effect, the first effect is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. display area, held digested image display area). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. area, pending digestion image display area). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the first performance, a pseudo-continuous performance of decorative symbols is executed, and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol 8C is replaced with "hold change". ” is displayed, the color of the hold icon 9C (image representing the hold icon) changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first performance, a pseudo-sequence performance of decorative symbols is executed, and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, a "hold change" is displayed instead of the decorative symbol 8C. ” is displayed, the color of the hold icon 9D (image representing the hold icon) changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first effect, the numerical image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo-coins moves together with the pending icon 9C (image representing the pending icon). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the numerical image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo-combinations moves together with the hold icon 9D (image representing the hold icon). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first effect, the pending icon 9C (image representing the pending icon) moves over the specific image BG, and Depending on the display position of the icon 9C (an image representing a pending icon), the remaining period during which the pseudo-coupling performance will be performed is notified. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the hold icon 9D (image representing the hold icon) moves over the specific image BG, Depending on the display position of the hold icon 9D (an image representing the hold icon), the remaining period during which the pseudo-connection performance will be performed is notified. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the pending icon movement change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon 9C changes color while moving as an image representing the hold icon. However, in the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon whose color changes while moving may be an image (icon image) imitating the hold icon 9C instead of the hold icon 9C.

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon 9C changes color while moving as an image representing the hold icon. However, in the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon whose color changes while moving may be the hold icons 9A and 9B instead of the hold icon 9C. In this case, the pending icons 9A and 9B may be configured to move from the first position not toward the pending display area (fluctuating icon display area, pending digested image display area) but toward the pending image display area. .

[Modification 3]
In the pending icon movement change effects A and B, the pending icon 9C whose color changes while moving and the pending icon 9C displayed in the pending display area (fluctuation icon display area, pending digest image display area) are the same. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the hold icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a once when moving from the hold display area or arrive at the hold display area, or may be displayed in the hold display area while it is moving. The size, shape, and color may change depending on the arrival time, and the position may shift slightly before and after arrival.

[Modification 4]
It is assumed that the pending icon movement change effects A to C are executed in the normal state. However, the pending icon movement change effects A to C may be executed in the time saving state. In this case, the pending icon C of the pending icon movement change effects A to C may move to the right and then to the left.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an image representing a hold icon,
a first effect in which an image representing the hold icon changes color while moving;
After the first effect, a second effect can be performed in which an image representing the pending icon in a changed color is displayed in a pending icon display area.
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
Before the first performance, it is possible to perform a third performance in which an image representing the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first performance is executed after the third performance.
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
In the first effect, the image representing the hold icon moves toward the hold icon display area from a first position different from the hold icon display area.
◇[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first performance, when a pseudo-continuous performance of decorative patterns is executed and a predetermined image is displayed in place of the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the color of the image representing the hold icon changes. A gaming machine with special features.
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first performance, an image representing the remaining number of pseudo-runs moves together with an image representing the pending icon.
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4 or aspect A3-5,
In the first effect, the image representing the hold icon moves over a specific image, and the remaining period in which the pseudo-continuation effect is to be executed is notified based on the display position of the image representing the hold icon with respect to the specific image. A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific icon stock effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 59 to 61. In FIGS. 59 to 61, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. It has since been omitted.

This specific icon stock performance is one of multiple pseudo-continuous performances, and during the relevant fluctuation performance (during the relevant fluctuation display), the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative patterns is performed continuously multiple times. It is something that can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific icon stock effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the corresponding image from the ROM 103. The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Note that the background image used in the specific icon stock production (referred to as "specific background image") is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image, and includes specific images such as a moon surface image, a space image, an image inside a spacecraft, etc. It becomes. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an ocean floor image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be still images or moving images.

Here, first, specific icon stock performance A will be explained, followed by specific icon stock performance B, and then specific icon stock performance C.

[Specific icon stock production A]
Specific icon stock effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock effect A. Specific icon stock performance A is one of multiple pseudo-continuous performances, in which a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern is continuously performed multiple times during the fluctuating performance (during the fluctuating display). It is something that can be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 59(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the three-dimensional image is displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern (symbol: number "1" to number "9") fluctuates (varies display). will be started. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 59(A), when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2". , the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A that had been displayed moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C, a number image (in this case, number 4) 9Cz is placed in front of the variable icon 9C. The display mode is changed, and the message MG1 "Stock icons!" is displayed in one line approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a.

Note that the size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the numerical image 9Cz may be the same size, or one of them may be larger. Furthermore, when arranging the numeric image 9Cz on the back side of the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the numeric image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C from the viewpoint of visibility of the numeric image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to pseudo-association. In other words, the player is informed that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) at this point in time will be continuously performed for the remaining four times using decorative symbols.

Message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the first (initial) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) with the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association starts, and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) by the first (initial) decorative pattern by the pseudo-association starts. ) is started, as shown in FIG. 59(C), after that, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the first (initial) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) by the pseudo-association is completed, and the numeric image 9Cz of the fluctuating icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. becomes. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed continuously for the remaining three times in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the second fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is started, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to be consumed without stocking the change icon HI.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the white spherical change icon 9C does not change to another shaped icon due to this collision, resulting in a failure in changing the change icon 9C.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), the change of the fluctuation icon 9C fails, and the fluctuation performance (fluctuation display) by the second decorative pattern by the pseudo-association ends, and the number image 9Cz of the fluctuation icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number It becomes 2. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed continuously for the remaining two times in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the third fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is started, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", the change icon HI appears again as a specific icon from the fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the change icon HI is activated in order to consume the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the white spherical change icon 9C does not change to another shape of icon due to this collision, and the change of the change icon 9C fails again.

As shown in FIG. 59(I), the change of the relevant fluctuation icon 9C fails and the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) by the third decorative pattern by the pseudo-association ends, and the number image 9Cz of the relevant fluctuation icon 9C changes from number 2 to number It becomes 1. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed only once in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the fourth (last) fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is started, the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", as shown in FIG. 59(J). , the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) by the fourth (last) decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is As shown in FIG. 59(K), the lunar image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 as the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 as the normal background image is switched again). The image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image)), the variable display position 9Cd, and the suspended display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock performance A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(L), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "7". As a result, the white spherical variable icon 9C, which could not change from the white spherical icon to another icon in the specific icon stock presentation A, disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific icon stock production B]
Next, specific icon stock rendering B will be explained with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock performance B. Specific icon stock performance B is one of multiple pseudo-continuous performances, in which a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern is continuously performed multiple times during the fluctuating performance (during the fluctuating display). It is something that can be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a normal background image, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the three-dimensional image is displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern (symbol: number "1" to number "9") fluctuates (varies display). will be started. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 60(A), when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2". , the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the lunar surface image THG2, which is the specific background image, and is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A that had been displayed moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C, a number image (in this case, number 4) 9Cz is placed in front of the variable icon 9C. The display mode is changed, and the message MG1 "Stock icons!" is displayed in one line approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the numerical image 9Cz may be the same size, or one of them may be larger. Furthermore, when arranging the numeric image 9Cz on the back side of the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the numeric image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C from the viewpoint of visibility of the numeric image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to pseudo-association. In other words, the player is informed that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) at this point in time will be continuously performed for the remaining four times using decorative symbols.

Message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the first (initial) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) with the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association starts, and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) by the first (initial) decorative pattern by the pseudo-association starts. ) is started, as shown in FIG. 60(C), after that, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the first (initial) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) by the pseudo-association is completed, and the numeric image 9Cz of the fluctuating icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. becomes. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed continuously for the remaining three times in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the second fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by pseudo-association is started, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to be consumed without stocking the change icon HI.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the white spherical change icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change in the change icon 9C changes. It will be a success.

The change of the fluctuating icon 9C is successful, and the second fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the fluctuating icon 9C changes from numeral 3 to numeral 2. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed continuously for the remaining two times in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the third fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by pseudo-association is started, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C. ), the battle performance icon AI draws a curve toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative pattern 8R, where the battle performance icon AI is temporarily stopped, and the variable icon 9C. Move like this. The battle production icon AI suggests a battle production that will be developed (started, developed) after the end of the specific icon stock production B, and in this battle production, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) It is a fighting performance, with high expectations for a big hit.

When the battle production icon AI moves to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a downward sloping display mode (slanting upward to the right), and the stocking of the battle production icon AI is successful.

The stocking of the battle performance icon AI is successful, and the variable performance (fluctuating display) using the second decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from number 2 to number 1. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed only once in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the fourth (last) fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by pseudo-association is started, the character image AIa disappears from the display screen, and then the left decorative pattern 8L disappears from the display screen, as shown in FIG. 60(J). The display is temporarily stopped at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the fourth (last) decoration by the pseudo series is displayed. After the variation effect (variation display) based on the pattern is completed, as shown in FIG. 60(K), the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. (At this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image), and the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, specific icon stock performance B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(L), fluctuations by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are started again, and by the activation of the stocked battle production icon AI, FIG. 60(M) , (N), the battle performance is developed (started, developed), and the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB will fight. In the battle performance, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C (in this embodiment, although the pending icon 9A does not exist at this point, the pending icon 9A does exist). If the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern. On the other hand, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right The decorative pattern 8R is the same pattern and is not stopped and displayed, resulting in a miss. When the battle performance ends and the jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. In the embodiment, although the hold icon 9A does not exist at this point, if the hold icon 9A does exist, the hold icon 9A is also displayed on the display screen 7a again.

[Specific icon stock production C]
Next, specific icon stock rendering C will be explained with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect C. The specific icon stock performance C is one of multiple pseudo-continuous performances, in which a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern is continuously performed multiple times during the fluctuating performance (during the fluctuating display). It is something that can be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the three-dimensional image is displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern (symbol: number "1" to number "9") fluctuates (varies display). will be started. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 61(A), when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2". , the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the white spherical hold icon 9A that had been displayed moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C, a number image (in this case, number 4) 9Cz is placed in front of the variable icon 9C. The display mode is changed, and the message MG1 "Stock icons!" is displayed in one line approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the numerical image 9Cz may be the same size, or one of them may be larger. Furthermore, when arranging the numeric image 9Cz on the back side of the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the numeric image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C from the viewpoint of visibility of the numeric image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to pseudo-association. In other words, the player is informed that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) at this point in time will be continuously performed for the remaining four times using decorative symbols.

Message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the first (initial) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) with the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association starts, and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) by the first (initial) decorative pattern by the pseudo-association starts. ) is started, as shown in FIG. 61(C), after that, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the first (initial) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) by the pseudo-association is completed, and the numeric image 9Cz of the fluctuating icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. becomes. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed continuously for the remaining three times in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the second fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by pseudo-association is started, as shown in FIG. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to be consumed without stocking the change icon HI.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the white spherical change icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change in the change icon 9C changes. It will be a success.

The change of the fluctuating icon 9C is successful, and the second fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the fluctuating icon 9C changes from numeral 3 to numeral 2. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed continuously for the remaining two times in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the third fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is started, as shown in FIG. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the button effect icon BI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C. ), the button effect icon BI draws a curve toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative pattern 8R, where the button effect icon BI is temporarily stopped, and the variable icon 9C. Move like this. Note that the button performance icon BI suggests a button performance that is developed (started, developed) after the end of the specific icon stock performance C, and this button performance requires the player to operate (press) the performance button 63. This is a performance in which changes can be made in the performance image by intervening in the performance that is proceeding with prompting, and although it is a performance with a lower level of expectation for a jackpot compared to the battle performance described later, the player's performance button 63 Since it is possible to cause a change in the effect image by operating (pressing) the effect image, the player can fully enjoy a sense of accomplishment when operating (pressing) the effect button 63 due to the change in the effect image. It has become.

When the button effect icon BI moves to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a downward-sloping display mode (slanting upward to the right), and the stocking of the button effect icon BI is successful.

Stocking of the button performance icon BI is successful, and the variable performance (fluctuating display) by the second decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is completed, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from number 2 to number 1. This informs the player that the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be performed only once in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

When the fourth (final) variation effect (variation display) using the decorative pattern by the pseudo-association is started, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, and then the left decorative pattern 8L disappears from the display screen, as shown in FIG. 61(J). The display is temporarily stopped at the number "5", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7", the battle performance icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the battle performance icon AI is digested. In order to stock the battle effect icon AI in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative pattern 8R where the battle effect icon AI is temporarily stopped and the variable icon 9C, It moves in a curved manner upwards of the button production icon BI that is already displayed in stock. The battle performance icon AI suggests a battle performance that will be developed (started, developed) after the end of the specific icon stock performance C, and in this battle performance, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) It is a fighting performance, with high expectations for a big hit.

When the battle performance icon AI moves above the button performance icon BI, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a downward-sloping display mode (slanting upward to the right), and the battle production icon AI is successfully stocked.

After that, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7". The display is temporarily stopped at , and the fourth (last) fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern by the pseudo series is completed, and as shown in FIG. 61(L), as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a. Switch again from the lunar surface image THG2 to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, you may switch from the city image THG1 to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image), and the relevant variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock performance C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(M), the variation by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started again, and in the stocked order, the button production icon that was stocked first When the BI is activated, the button effect is developed (started, developed) as shown in FIG. 61(N), and a large button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, A message MG2 "Press!" is displayed above on the display screen 7a. This notifies the player of the development (start, development) of the button performance, and further prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63. At this time, the button effect icon BI disappears from the display screen 7a, and instead of the button effect icon BI, a character "corner" image CI indicating activation completion is displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the button performance is completed, the battle performance is developed (started, developed), although not shown, by activating the second stocked battle performance icon AI. At this time, the battle performance icon AI disappears from the display screen 7a, and instead of the battle performance icon AI, a character "corner" image CI indicating activation completion is displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, the "corner" images CI are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, arranged vertically. When the battle performance is developed (started, developed), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB will fight. In the battle performance, when the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, and it becomes a jackpot, and then the jackpot game ( However, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same and are not stopped and displayed. It will be out of place.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of specific icon stock effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. 61, the image display device is capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. 7 (display means), is capable of executing a predetermined effect, and acquires a specific icon by displaying a change icon HI, etc. as a specific icon that can change (increase) the expected degree of winning each time a pseudo-match is performed. Possible first effects (FIGS. 59(D) to (I) for specific icon stock presentation A, FIGS. 60(D) to (J) for specific icon stock presentation B, and FIG. 61(D) for specific icon stock presentation C) ~(K)) can now be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain a specific icon that can change (increase) the expected degree of winning each time a pseudo-match is performed, which contributes to eliminating the monotony of the performance. In addition, the player can be given a change icon HI as a specific icon that can change (increase) the expectation level of winning. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A shown in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B shown in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C shown in FIG. It is now possible to include a first specific icon (change icon HI) that is digested when the specific icon is acquired, and a second specific icon (battle production icon AI, etc.) that is stocked without being digested when the specific icon is acquired. There is. According to this configuration, the player does not know what kind of specific icon will be displayed, and even if the specific icon stock performance is started, it is not possible for the player to predict the specific icon that will appear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific icon stock performance from losing its freshness, and it is possible to increase variations in the specific icon stock performance.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. When the icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode. According to this configuration, when the first specific icon (change icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode to increase the expectation level. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the appearance of the first specific icon (change icon HI).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. When there is a reach, a reach is prevented from being formed by a plurality of symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R). According to this configuration, by performing a pseudo-connection without forming a reach, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed with respect to the progress of the specific icon stock performance, and suppress the player's feeling of irritation regarding the pseudo-connection. can contribute to this.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60 and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 60 (G) to (J) for specific icon stock effect B, and FIG. 61 for specific icon stock effect C. (G) to (K)) can now be executed. According to this configuration, in the pseudo-series, there is a period of performance in which the second specific icon is stocked by the first performance, and at the end of the pseudo-series, there is a period of performance in which the second specific icon stocked by the second performance is activated. , and can be experienced in succession, and furthermore, since other performances are developed (started, developed) in succession after the specific icon stock performance, players can expect to win the jackpot with other performances. The feeling can be enhanced in the previous stage performance called specific icon stock performance.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61, when there is a reserved ball, The hold icon 9A may be displayed. According to this configuration, when the presence of the hold icon 9A does not interfere with the progression of the second performance to express, for example, a worldview, the hold icon 9A can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the hold icon 9A can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the presence of the icon 9A becomes a nuisance, it can be deleted from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, by displaying the holding icon 9A on the display screen 7a or erasing it from the display screen 7a when there are held balls, it is possible to prevent the holding icon 9A from interfering with the second performance. Note that by displaying the variable icon 9C on the display screen 7a or erasing it from the display screen 7a, it is possible to prevent the pending icon 9A from interfering with the second performance. Furthermore, by displaying the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad on the display screen 7a or erasing them from the display screen 7a, it is possible to prevent the hold icon 9A from interfering with the second performance. .

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the variable specific icon stock presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
The specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. . In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the first performance in the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61, the variable icon 9C is at the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) It was displayed without moving from to any other position. However, in the first effect, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, the variable icon 9C approaches the variable display position 9Cd every time a pseudo link is performed. You can do it like this. In this way, each time a pseudo-association is performed, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position), so the remaining number of pseudo-association is displayed by the variation icon 9C. The sense of distance between the position and the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) can be intuitively and easily understood by the player. Note that the "other position" may be, for example, from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to the left side or the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; It may be near the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or it may be near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Modification 3]
In the first performance in the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61, the variable icon 9C is at the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) It was displayed without moving from to any other position. However, in the first effect, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, it approaches the variable display position 9Cd every time a pseudo-association is performed. Furthermore, even if there is a reserved ball, the reserved icon 9A may not be displayed in the area where the variable icon 9C moves. In this way, each time a pseudo-association is performed, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position), so the remaining number of pseudo-association is displayed by the variation icon 9C. The sense of distance between the position and the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) can be intuitively and easily understood by the player, and furthermore, the presence of a reserved ball in the area where the variable icon 9C moves is indicated. When the hold icon 9A is displayed, by erasing the hold icon 9A from the display screen 7a so as not to obstruct the visibility of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A obstructs the moving change icon 9C. This can be prevented. Note that the "other position" may be, for example, from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to the left side or the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; It may be located closer to the upper left corner or closer to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61, the number of pseudo-connections was four. However, the number of pseudo-runs may be 5, 6, 7, or 8 times. In this way, it is possible to increase the chances of acquiring a specific icon (change icon HI, etc.).

[Modification 5]
In the specific icon stock performance A shown in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B shown in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C shown in FIG. However, each time the specific icon stock effect is performed, the number of pseudo-relationships may be changed to any number from 4 to 8 times. In this way, each time a specific icon stock performance is performed, the chance of acquiring a specific icon (change icon HI, etc.) can be changed, so that variations in the specific icon stock performance can be increased.

[Modification 6]
In the specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. It became. However, an indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a (for example, at a position above the fluctuation icon 9C) to display the number of pseudo-runs. In this way, each time a pseudo series is performed, the level gauge of the indicator decreases, so that the remaining number of pseudo series can be intuitively and easily understood. Note that the indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with a display mode in which the numerical image 9Cz is placed in front of the fluctuation icon 9C, or in a state in which the numerical image 9Cz is removed from the fluctuation icon 9C ( It may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with the variable icon 9C (alone).

[Modification 7]
In specific icon stock presentation A in FIG. 59, specific icon stock presentation B in FIG. 60, and specific icon stock presentation C in FIG. It became. However, the variable icon 9C may be moved each time a pseudo-connection is performed. In this case, each time a pseudo-connection is performed, the variable icon 9C may be advanced one by one for each square to reach the goal, or the dice image may be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the dice image may be displayed on the display screen 7a. It is also possible to move a certain number of squares toward the goal.

[Modification 8]
In the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61, the various symbols are numerical symbols and no character images are provided. However, character images are provided for the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9", and character images are provided for the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8". Furthermore, when the specific icon stock effect is started, character images provided at odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" may be deleted. In this way, it is possible to clearly emphasize to the player that the state has been switched to a special performance called a specific icon stock performance. Note that the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" all have the same bright green color, and the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" have the same bright green color. , all have the same bright blue color, even if a specific icon stock effect is started, the various colors of the numerical patterns are inherited and do not change to other colors. As a result, by switching to a special effect called a specific icon stock effect, even if the character images provided at the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" are deleted, the numbers It is possible to make it difficult for the discrimination of the symbols to be affected.

[Modification 9]
In the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. The reach caused by the right decorative pattern 8R) was no longer formed. However, a reach may be formed. In this way, when performing a pseudo-connection, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed in the progress of the specific icon stock performance until a reach is formed, and suppress the player's sense of irritation regarding the pseudo-connection. can contribute to this. In addition, when a reach is formed, the specific icon stock effect is stopped and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is continued, and when a specific icon is acquired, the second specific icon (battle effect) that is stocked without being consumed is icon AI, etc.), activate a second specific icon (battle production icon AI, etc.) to dissipate it.

[Modification 10]
In the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 was displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish among the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively. In addition, since the display screen 7a is placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed at the rear of the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not obstructed by other images. Ta. In this embodiment, when the specific icon stock effect is started, the display mode is such that the numerical image 9Cz is placed in front of the variable icon 9C. Numerical image 9Cz showed the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to pseudo-association. As a result, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a as the remaining number of consecutive fluctuations due to the pseudo series. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any one of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R) may display a number representing the number of reserved balls as described above. In this way, there is no risk that the number displayed as the number of held balls will be misunderstood by the player as the remaining number of consecutive fluctuations due to pseudo-relationships, and furthermore, the number of held balls will be displayed as a numerical value. The numbers can be made difficult to distinguish because they are mixed in with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be made intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 11]
The specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. 61 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added. You can.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to execute a first performance in which the specific icon can be acquired by displaying a specific icon that can change the expected degree of winning each time a pseudo-match is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
The specific icon may include a first specific icon that is digested when the specific icon is acquired, and a second specific icon that is stocked without being digested when the specific icon is acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1 or aspect A4-2,
In the first performance, when the first specific icon is obtained, it is possible to change the display mode of the variable icon to another display mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
In the first performance, when the pseudo-run is being performed, a reach by a plurality of symbol images may not be formed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the first effect, when the (relevant) variable icon moves from the (relevant) variable icon display position to another position, it approaches the (relevant) variable icon display position each time the pseudo-association is performed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-5,
In the first performance, even if there is a held ball, the held icon is not displayed in the area where the (relevant) fluctuation icon moves;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-2 to A4-6,
When the pseudo-association ends and the first performance ends, a second performance related to the second specific icon stocked by the first performance can be executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-7,
In the second performance, a pending icon may be displayed when a pending ball exists.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation stock performance A (first half), the operation stock performance A (second half), and the operation stock performance B (second half) will be explained below using FIGS. 62 to 64. This operation stock performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation stock performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation stock performance A (first half)]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining operation stock performance A (first half).
First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed on the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B) or FIG. 62(D), a temporary stop effect is performed. The temporary stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 62(B), a special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect pattern 8C, and as shown in FIG. 62(D), the medium effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62(B), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "1," the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "2," and the special symbol replaces the middle effect symbol 8C. He showed how he did it. The special pattern is a button image BG imitating the performance button 63. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium performance symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 62(B), the stock performance is executed as shown in FIG. 62(C). In other words, the stock performance is a performance that is executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop performance. In the stock performance, the button image BG as a special symbol is reduced and moved from the center to the lower right side of the display screen 7a as shown by arrow Y. Then, a reduction button image BGS is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62(D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4," the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9," and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3." I showed you the situation. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → middle performance symbol 8C.

After the stock performance shown in FIG. 62(C) or after the temporary stop performance shown in FIG. 62(D), the fluctuation start performance shown in FIG. 62(A) is executed, so that the pseudo continuous performance becomes. In this embodiment, a repeated pseudo-continuous performance in which such a pseudo-continuous performance is repeated seven times is executed. Then, in the repeated pseudo-continuous performance, the button image BG as a special symbol stops in place of the medium performance symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), thereby executing the stock performance (FIG. 62(C)). The following explanation will be continued assuming that the stock performance is executed four times in the repeated pseudo-continuous performance.

After the repeated pseudo-continuous performance ends, a reach formation performance is executed as shown in FIG. 62(E). The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5" is shown. At this time, the stocked reduced button images BGS are displayed in a stacked manner on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion performance, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by arrow Y and is enlarged, and the word "PUSH" is displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG "Press" is displayed above the button image BG. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the player has pressed the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from a normal reach performance to a super reach performance. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, at this time, the reduction button images BGS are displayed in a stacked manner on the right side of the display screen 7a. Note that even if the player does not press the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 62(F), the advanced performance is executed after the effective period of the performance button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a battle effect (start) is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. Then, if the friendly character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB, it will be a jackpot. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Operation stock performance A (second half)]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining operation stock performance A (second half).
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by arrow Y and is enlarged, and the word "PUSH" is displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves to the ally character CRA side, and the enemy character CRB becomes dominant. At this time as well, the reduction button images BGS are displayed in a stacked manner on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 63(A), a message image MSG "Chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 63(A), the message image MSG "Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion performance, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by arrow Y and is enlarged, and the word "PUSH" is displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), the ally character CRA moves to the enemy character CRB side, and the ally character CRA becomes dominant. At this time as well, the reduction button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 63(C), a message image MSG saying "Big Chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 63(C), the message image MSG "Great Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and the button image BG on which the characters "PUSH" are displayed is displayed. Further, a message image MSG "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), a battle performance (final stage) is executed. In the battle performance (final stage), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight in the center. It should be noted that when the player presses the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 63(E), a message image MSG of "extreme heat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 63(E), the message image MSG of "extreme heat" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA wins. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a message image MSG "Victory" is displayed. In addition, in the case of a loss, for example, an enemy character is displayed and a message image saying "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "5". In addition, in the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined to stop at "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined to be stopped at "6".

[Operation stock performance B (second half)]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining operation stock performance B (second half). The operation stock performance B (first half) is the same as the operation stock performance A (first half), and the explanation will be omitted.
In operation stock performance B (second half), first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), an operation promotion performance is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by arrow Y and is enlarged, and the word "PUSH" is displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves to the ally character CRA side, and the enemy character CRB becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduction button images BGS are displayed in a stacked manner on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 64(A), a message image MSG "Chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 64(A), the message image MSG "Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion performance, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by arrow Y and is enlarged, and the word "PUSH" is displayed. A button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), the ally character CRA moves to the enemy character CRB side, and the ally character CRA becomes dominant. At this time as well, the reduction button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 64(C), a message image MSG of "Big Chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 64(C), the message image MSG "Great Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and the button image BG on which the characters "PUSH" are displayed is displayed. Further, a message image MSG "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation performance is a performance that definitively informs you that it is a win. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Win" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a message image MSG "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the operation stock effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the temporary stop effect (FIGS. 62(B), (D)), the fluctuation start effect (FIG. 62(A)) is executed, thereby repeating the pseudo continuous effect to repeat the pseudo continuous effect. Execute. Then, in this repeated pseudo-continuous performance, the button image BG as a special symbol stops instead of the medium performance symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), thereby executing the stock performance (FIG. 62(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give surprise and expectation to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation promotion effect is executed for the number of reduced button images BGS stocked in the stock effect (FIG. 62(B)), and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes valid (FIG. 62(B)). 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the more the reduced button images BGS are stocked, the more expectations can be given to the players, and the more the game becomes more interesting.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the repeated pseudo-continuous performance consisting of seven pseudo-continuous performances, the button image BG as a special symbol stops instead of the medium performance symbol 8C (see FIG. 62(B)). ), stock performance is executed (FIG. 62(C)). According to this configuration, expectations for the predetermined number of pseudo-continuous performances are increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BG as a special symbol stops in place of the medium performance symbol 8C in the pseudo continuous performance (FIG. 62(B)), thereby executing the stock performance (FIG. 62(B)). C)). In the stock performance, the button image BG as a special symbol is reduced, moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side as shown by the arrow Y, and held. According to this configuration, the number of stocks can be easily understood and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and the button image BG displaying the characters "PUSH" are displayed (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the operation of the performance button 63 can be effectively promoted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation promotion effect (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)) is different from the reach forming effect (see FIG. 62(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for reach formation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the operation stock performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above example, the button image BG as a special symbol temporarily stops in place of the middle effect pattern 8C, but even if the special pattern temporarily stops in place of the left effect pattern 8L or right effect pattern 8R. good.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the repeated pseudo-continuous performance is composed of seven pseudo-continuous performances, but it may be composed of fewer than seven or more than seven pseudo-continuous performances. Furthermore, the number of pseudo-continuous performances may be dynamically changed. For example, it may be arranged such that the higher the number of pseudo-continuous performances, the higher the expectation of winning.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, an example is given in which the stock performance is performed four times, but the number of stock performances is not particularly limited. For example, the higher the number of stock presentations, the higher the expectation of winning.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the operation of the performance button 63 was taken as an example, but the operation is not limited to the operation of the performance button 63 as long as it is an operation unit that can be operated by the player.

[Modification 5]
In the above, an example was given of the effect regarding the first special figure reservation, but it may also be an effect regarding the second special figure reservation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operation section that can be operated by a player,
A stock effect that displays an operating part image that imitates the operating part and maintains the operating part image in the screen in a repeated pseudo-continuous performance in which a production pattern that has started to fluctuate temporarily stops and then starts varying again. is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
After the repetitive pseudo-continuous performance, it is possible to execute an operation part performance in which the operation of the operation part becomes effective according to the number of the operation part images held in the screen in the stock performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1 or aspect A5-2,
The repeated pseudo continuous performance is composed of a predetermined number of pseudo continuous performances,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the stock performance, when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous performance, the operation part image is displayed as a special symbol, and after that, the operation part image is reduced and held.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-2 to A5-4,
In the operation section presentation, the operation section image held within the screen is enlarged to promote operation of the operation section.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-2 to A5-5,
The operation part performance is executed after the repeated pseudo-continuous performance through a reach formation performance in which the performance pattern temporarily stops in a predetermined manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
When the operation section is operated during a period in which the operation of the operation section is valid in the operation section presentation, it is possible to execute a confirmation notification presentation that definitively notifies you of a win;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon number design presentation will be explained below using FIGS. 65 to 67. This icon number pattern presentation can be executed during the special pattern variation presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the variation pattern is a predetermined variation pattern, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a. This is a performance realized by

[Icon number design production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the icon number design effect A. In this icon number pattern effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X having the same aspect (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one pending icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. . This number pattern 8X is a pattern in the same manner as one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. 65(B), the decorative pattern "6" A pattern in the same manner as the pattern is displayed. Further, the numerical symbols 8X move or stop at random on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, one pending icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one of the pending icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 65(B), A) corresponds to the pending icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the reservation icon 9A, and the reservation icon 9A is arranged inside a cylinder. Then, the hold icon 9A moves a predetermined distance toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon is displayed, and then stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement performance 2, the number pattern 8X moves randomly to the right and left, and then stops. In the icon movement effect 2, the reserved icon 9A moves a predetermined distance along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 toward the variable icon display area, and then stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, while the numerical symbols 8X move randomly, the pending icon 9A moves along the guide rail image XA1, reaches the variable icon display area, and stops. In this case, the pending icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop production, the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop fluctuating to form a stopped symbol array. In the example of FIG. 65(E), the stop symbol arrangement is "6 7 6", which is a losing symbol arrangement. In addition, in this decorative symbol stop performance, the pending icon 9A that was being moved in the icon movement performance has become the variable icon 9C.

In addition, in this icon number pattern presentation A, the larger the number of times the pending icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

[Icon number design production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the icon number design effect B. In this icon number pattern performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X having the same aspect (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one pending icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. . This number pattern 8X is a pattern in the same manner as the decorative pattern of one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. 66(B), the decorative pattern "6" A pattern in the same manner as the pattern is displayed. Moreover, this numerical pattern 8X and one reservation icon 9A are arranged adjacent to each other in correspondence. One pending icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one of the pending icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 66(B), corresponds to the pending icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the reservation icon 9A, and the reservation icon 9A (number pattern 8X) is arranged inside a cylindrical shape. The pending icon 9A (numerical pattern 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon is displayed and stops. Note that this hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the number pattern 8X and the pending icon 9A are continuously arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, the numeric symbol 8X has changed from a "6" symbol to a "5" symbol. Further, the pending icon 9A has changed from white to blue (indicated by normal hatching in FIG. 66(C)). In icon movement effect 2, the pending icon 9A moves toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the pending icon 9A associated with the numerical pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1, reaches the variable icon display area, and stops. In this case, the pending icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C from now on. Note that this hold icon 9A has changed from blue to green (indicated by cross hatching in FIG. 66(D)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop performance, the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop fluctuating to form a stopped symbol array. In the example of FIG. 66(E), the stop symbol arrangement is "6 7 6", which is a losing symbol arrangement. In addition, in this decorative pattern stop performance, the pending icon 9A (green) that was being moved in the icon movement performance has become the variable icon 9C.

In addition, in this icon number symbol production B, the larger the number of times the pending icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Moreover, the more times the hold icon 9A moves and stops, the more chance the hold icon 9A changes.

[Icon number design production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the icon number design effect C. In this icon number pattern performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a number pattern 8X having the same aspect (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one pending icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. . This number pattern 8X is a pattern in the same manner as the decorative pattern of one of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. 67(B), the decorative pattern "6" A pattern in the same manner as the pattern is displayed. Moreover, this numerical pattern 8X is arranged within one hold icon 9A. In this case, it can be said that the numerical pattern 8X is associated with this reservation icon 9A. One pending icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one of the pending icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 67(B), corresponds to the pending icon closest to the variable icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the reservation icon 9A, and the reservation icon 9A (number pattern 8X) is arranged inside a cylindrical shape. The pending icon 9A (numerical pattern 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon is displayed and stops. Note that this hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the numeric pattern 8X is continuously arranged within the pending icon 9A. In this case, the numeric symbol 8X has changed from a "6" symbol to a "5" symbol. Further, the hold icon 9A has changed from white to blue (indicated by normal hatching in FIG. 67(C)). In icon movement effect 2, the pending icon 9A moves toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the pending icon 9A including the numerical pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1, reaches the variable icon display area, and stops. In this case, the pending icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C from now on. Note that this hold icon 9A has changed from blue to green (indicated by cross hatching in FIG. 67(D)). Further, the pending icon 9A includes the numeric symbol 8X even when it reaches the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop performance, the fluctuating decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop fluctuating to form a stopped symbol array. In the example of FIG. 67(E), the stop symbol arrangement is "6 7 6", which is a losing symbol arrangement. In addition, in this decorative pattern stop performance, the pending icon 9A (green) that was being moved in the icon movement performance has become the variable icon 9C. In this case as well, the pending icon 9C includes the numeric symbol 8X even when it reaches the variable icon display area.

In addition, in this icon number symbol production C, the larger the number of times the pending icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Moreover, the more times the hold icon 9A moves and stops, the more chance the hold icon 9A changes.
Moreover, the above-mentioned icon number design performance is a performance performed with the same variation.

[Modified example]
In the icon number pattern production of the above embodiment, the number pattern 8X has the same form as the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this.The number pattern 8X has the same form as a part of the decorative pattern, but a part is the decorative pattern. It may be in a different form.
In the icon number pattern effects B and C of the above embodiments, when performing icon movement effect 1 to icon movement effect 2, the pending icon 9A changes and the numeric pattern 8X associated with the pending icon 9A also changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the pending icon 9A changes, the number pattern 8X may not change.

[Effect example]
In the icon number pattern production of the above embodiment, the pending icon 9A and the number pattern 8X move. According to this configuration, an interesting performance can be realized by the movement of the hold icon 9A and the numerical symbol 8X, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, in the icon numeric symbol productions B and C, the pending icon 9A and the numeric symbol 8X are associated and move together, so the movement of the pending icon 9A and the numeric symbol 8X can be emphasized to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, since the number pattern 8X has the same aspect (shape, color) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, it is possible to display a new effect in which the pending icon and the decorative pattern collaborate, adding to the interest of the game. can be improved.
In addition, in the icon numeric pattern productions B and C, after the pending icon 9A and the numeric pattern 8X move in association with each other, the pending icon 9A changes its appearance (color, shape), so the pending icon and the numeric pattern 8X The more the player moves, the more the player can expect the hold change to increase, and the more interesting the game becomes.
In addition, in the icon numeric pattern productions B and C, even if the aspect (color, shape) of the deferred icon 9A changes after the pending icon 9A and the numeric pattern 8X move in correspondence, the aspect of the numeric pattern 8X changes. Since it does not change, the change in the pending icon 9A can be more impressive to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.
Further, in the icon numeric symbol productions B and C, when the pending icon 9A and the numeric symbol 8X move in association with each other, when the numeric symbol 8X changes, the pending icon 9A may also change. According to this configuration, when the numerical symbols change, the player can expect the pending icon 9A to change, so the player will be able to watch both the numerical symbols and the pending icon, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that changes a decorative pattern,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a predetermined icon that is an icon representing suspension or the change, and a numerical pattern including a number,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon moves,
The fourth display performance is a performance in which the numerical symbols move,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, the second display performance is performed, and then the third display performance and the fourth display performance are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed while the third display performance is being performed, and the predetermined icon in the third display performance and the number in the fourth display performance are Moves in association with the design,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
The numerical pattern is in the same manner as the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
In the combination presentation, when the predetermined icon in the third display presentation and the numerical symbol in the fourth display presentation move in association with each other, the predetermined icon changes after being moved.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination presentation, when the predetermined icon in the third display presentation and the numerical symbol in the fourth display presentation move in association with each other, and the predetermined icon changes after being moved, The number pattern does not change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-5,
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the numerical pattern in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, the numerical pattern may change; When the design changes, the predetermined icon also changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The ready-to-reach hold icon effects A to C will be described below using FIGS. 68 to 70. This ready-to-reach icon presentation can be executed during the variation presentation of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reach hold icon effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Pending icon production A when reaching]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining hold icon production A at the time of reach. The on-reach hold icon effect is a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, and only the hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is new from a state where no hold icon is displayed. This is the effect displayed on the screen. First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (in this case, the reach of "2↓2"), the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed. be done. The hold icons 9A and 9B have disappeared from the display screen 7a. The hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C has a rectangular shape and is displayed in the hold display area (fluctuating icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready-to-reach state, the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C disappears from the display screen 7a (is no longer displayed). That is, all the hold icons (the hold icons 9A, 9B, and the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready-to-reach state. That is, among the pending icons, only the pending icon 9C is displayed, and the pending icons 9A and 9B are not displayed. The pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same appearance as before it disappeared. The aspect here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the mode of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a character image representing the changed mode of the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing a mode" refers to the shape, color, movement, and size of the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C, as well as the content and name (e.g., character name) that the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C represents. ), nicknames, etc. are also included. The order in which the modes of the pending icon 9C change is from a mode with a low level of expectation of a jackpot to a mode with a high level of expectation. Here, the color of the hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C changes, and a "square red" character image representing the shape and color of the hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(E), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, an effect is performed in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C and the character image rotate together. . During the rotation, as shown in FIGS. 68(F), (G), and (H), an effect is performed in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C changes. Specifically, the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is split into two, a new star-shaped pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C appears from the split, and a new pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C appears. A character image representing the aspect of icon) 9C is displayed. Here, a "star-shaped" character image representing the shape of the new pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C is displayed. After it is broken, the two square-shaped pieces and the text image of "Square Red" go out of the frame. The new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digested image display area).

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(I), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, an effect is performed in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C and the character image rotate together. . During the rotation, as shown in FIG. 68(J), an effect is performed in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C changes. Specifically, the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C and the character image are displayed in an enlarged manner. Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Pending icon production B when reaching]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining hold icon production B at the time of reach. The on-reach hold icon effect is a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, and only the hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is new from a state where no hold icon is displayed. This is the effect displayed on the screen. First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), four pending icons 9A and the corresponding pending icons (variable icons) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are also collectively referred to simply as "hold icons 9A, 9C." The hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (fluctuating icon display area, hold digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"), and the hold icons 9A, 9B and the corresponding hold display area appear on the display screen 7a. The rectangular image for indicating the position disappears, and only the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 69(C), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready-to-reach state, the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C disappears from the display screen 7a (is no longer displayed). That is, all the hold icons (the hold icons 9A, 9B, and the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG imitating the shape of a bomb is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves to the left while drawing a parabola. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready-to-reach state. That is, among the pending icons, only the pending icon 9C is displayed, and the pending icons 9A, 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the pending display area are not displayed. The pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same appearance as before it disappeared. The aspect here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 69(E) to (G), an effect is performed in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the specific image TG imitating the shape of a bomb explodes, and as shown in FIG. 69(F), the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C is split into two. crack (divide). Then, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the pending icon (variable icon) 9C of the new doll appears, and a character image representing the mode of the new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing a mode" refers to the shape, color, movement, and size of the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C, as well as the content and name (e.g., character name) that the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C represents. ), nicknames, etc. are also included. Here, a character image of "character pending" representing the content of the new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(H), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, an effect is performed in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C and the character image rotate together. . After that, as shown in FIG. 69(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, and the holding icon (fluctuating icon) 9C continues to rotate, and the character image "Character Holding" is displayed. disappears from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Pending icon production C when reaching]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining hold icon performance C at the time of reach. The on-reach hold icon effect is a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, and only the hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is new from a state where no hold icon is displayed. This is the effect displayed on the screen. First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), four pending icons 9A and the corresponding pending icons (fluctuating icons) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), they are also collectively referred to simply as "hold icons 9A, 9C." The hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (fluctuating icon display area, hold digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the hold display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R enter the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"), and the hold icons 9A, 9B and the corresponding hold display area appear on the display screen 7a. The rectangular image for indicating the position disappears, and only the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70(C), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready-to-reach state, the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C disappears from the display screen 7a (is no longer displayed). That is, all the hold icons (the hold icons 9A, 9B, and the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG imitating a person holding a sword is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves to the left. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready-to-reach state. That is, among the pending icons, only the pending icon 9C is displayed, and the pending icons 9A, 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the pending display area are not displayed. The pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same appearance as before it disappeared. The aspect here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 70(E) to (G), an effect is performed in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(E), a specific image TG imitating a person holding a sword passes through the relevant pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C, and then as shown in FIG. 70(F), , the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C is split into two (divided). Then, as shown in FIG. 70(G), the pending icon (variable icon) 9C with a new face shape appears, and a character image representing the aspect of the new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing a mode" refers to the shape, color, movement, and size of the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C, as well as the content and name (e.g., character name) that the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C represents. ), nicknames, etc. are also included. Here, a character image of "face pending" representing the contents of the new pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(H), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, an effect is performed in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C and the character image rotate together. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, and the holding icon (fluctuating icon) 9C continues to rotate, and the character image "Face Holding" is displayed. disappears from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(J), an effect is performed in which a background image corresponding to the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is displayed. Specifically, a background image of the same face as the face represented by the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C is displayed. Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effects of the reach hold icon effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(B), (C), FIGS. 69(C), (D), and FIGS. 70(C), (D), during the reach effect, the display screen 7a It is possible to perform a first effect in which only the pending icon (fluctuation icon) 9C corresponding to the change is newly displayed from a state in which no pending icon is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(E) to (H), FIGS. 69(E) to (G), and FIGS. 70(E) to (G), after the first performance, A second effect in which the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C changes can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(E) to (H), FIGS. 69(E) to (G), and FIGS. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) 9C changes to the second form after the hold icon 9C in the first form is divided into a plurality of pieces. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69(C) to (G) and FIGS. 70(E) to (G), in the second effect, the specific image TG moves and the corresponding pending icon 9C After passing through, the hold icon 9C of the first aspect is divided into a plurality of pieces. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68(H), FIG. 69(G), and FIG. 70(G), in the second effect, the hold icon 9C in the second mode is displayed. At the same time, a character image representing the second aspect is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(I), 69(H), and 70(H), the hold icon 9C in the second aspect is rotated, and the character image is also rotated. Rotate together. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the hold icon performance at the time of reach is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the ready-to-reach pending icon performances A to C, a first performance is performed in which only the pending icon 9C is newly displayed from a state in which none of the pending icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are displayed. However, in reach hold icon performances A to C, the first performance in which only the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B is newly displayed is executed from a state where none of the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are displayed. You can.

[Modification 2]
In the reach hold icon performance A shown in FIGS. 68 (F) and (G) in which the hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C changes, the hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is split into two (divided). , a new star-shaped pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C appears from the crack. However, it may be assumed that the rectangular part of the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C is split into two parts, and a new star-shaped figure appears from the split part.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A game characterized in that, at the time of a reach performance, it is possible to execute a first performance in which only the pending icon corresponding to the change is newly displayed from a state in which none of the pending icons are displayed on the display means. Machine.
◇[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the first performance, a second performance in which the pending icon changes can be executed.
◇[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
In the second performance, the holding icon changes to a second form after the holding icon in the first form is divided into a plurality of pieces.
◇[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
In the second effect, after the specific image moves and passes the pending icon, the pending icon in the first aspect is divided into a plurality of parts.
◇[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-3 or aspect A7-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second effect, the hold icon of the second mode is displayed, and a character image representing the second mode is displayed.
◇[Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-5,
The gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the hold icon rotates, and the character image also rotates.

The special hold effect will be explained below using FIGS. 71 to 73. This special hold performance may be executed during the special symbol variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the effect. The special hold performance is a performance performed with the same variation of special symbols.

[Special hold effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining special hold effect A. In this special hold effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Further, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, an ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A is not displayed, but the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 71(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each have seven symbols and are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining special hold performance B. In this special hold effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Further, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, an ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A is not displayed, but the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed. In addition, in this super reach effect, the third movable accessory 13 is moved from the home position (evacuation position) to the deployment position (deployment position) on the display screen 7a, and the effect hides part of the friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB. It is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 72(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each have seven symbols and are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the special hold effect C. In this special hold effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), an icon display effect is executed. In this icon display performance, the pending icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. is executed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are circular and white. At this time, the number of pending icons 9A is four, that is, the number of pending items is four.
Further, in the special hold effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. This variation icon XB1 represents the production situation in the variation and is an icon corresponding to the hold icon 9C. Further, the hold icon XB2 is an icon representing a hold state, and is an icon corresponding to the hold icon 9A. The hold icon XB2 indicates the number of hold icons in the same way as the hold icon 9A, and has the same number of icons as the hold icon 9A. That is, when the number of pending icons is 3, the number of pending icons 9A is three, and similarly the number of pending icons XB2 is also three. This hold icon XB2 does not change to hold. Note that the hold icon XB2 may change to be on hold corresponding to the hold icon 9A, or may change to be on hold in a manner different from the hold icon 9A. For example, the hold icon XB2 may change to hold a while after the hold icon 9A changes to hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, an ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the pending icon 9A is not displayed, but the variable icon 9C is displayed.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed. In addition, in this super reach effect, the third movable accessory 13 is moved from the home position (retreat position) to the deployment position (deployment position) on the display screen 7a, and the effect hides part of the friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB. It is.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the pending icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 73(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each have seven symbols and are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol arrangement. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.
In this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

[Modified example]
In the above special hold effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, but they are not limited to this, and may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the main display screen 7a. Good too.
Further, the hold icon XB2 may be displayed in a manner that allows the number of holds to be seen. For example, when there are three pending icons XB2, the number "3" may be displayed.
In the above-mentioned special hold performance, the variable icon 9C is displayed without displaying the hold icon 9A during the ready-to-win performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variation icon 9C is in a different form from normal (circular and white in the embodiment) (for example, rectangular and red), the hold icon 9A may not be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the special hold effect of the above embodiment, in the same change, there is an icon display effect that displays the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, and a reach effect that displays the change icon 9C without displaying the hold icon 9A. It is carried out. Then, after the icon display performance, the reach performance is performed. According to this configuration, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display performance, and the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the pending icon 9A during the ready-to-win presentation. It is possible to make the player aware of the importance, and it is possible to improve expectations for the reach performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the special hold effect of the above embodiment, in the same change, an icon display effect that displays the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, and a reach effect that displays the change icon 9C without displaying the hold icon 9A. A super reach effect is performed in which the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. In this case, a reach effect is performed after the icon display effect, and then a super reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display performance, the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the pending icon 9A during the reach effect, and furthermore, the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the hold icon 9A during the reach effect, and furthermore, the player recognizes the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C during the icon display effect. Since the super reach performance can be emphasized at times, it is possible to make the player aware of the importance of the super reach performance itself, and it is possible to improve expectations for the super reach performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in the special holding performance, in a super reach performance in which the holding icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, a performance is performed in which the third movable accessory 13 moves in front of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, since the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, the performance of the third movable accessory 13 can be emphasized to the player, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. .

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays the fluctuation icon representing the fluctuation and a suspension icon representing suspension;
The second display performance is a performance that displays the variable icon without displaying the hold icon;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a effect in which the variable icon and the pending icon are not displayed,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, after the first display effect, the second display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed after the first display performance, and the third display performance is performed after the second display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the combination performance, when the third display performance is being performed, a movable accessory performance in which a movable accessory moves in front of the display means is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon success/failure presentation will be explained below using FIGS. 74 to 76. This icon success/failure presentation may be executed during the special symbol variation presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the effect.

[Icon success/failure performance A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining icon success/failure rendering A. In this icon success/failure effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, a pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are circular and white. Further, variations in the decorative patterns are executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white shape to a shape representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as the ally character 9C) jumps out from the variable icon display area in which the variable icon is normally displayed to outside the variable icon display area, and further becomes larger. It's a performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), a success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure performance, the enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle performance with the ally character 9C to see which one will win, in other words, it is a performance that determines whether or not the battle will be successful. Note that the success/failure presentation broadly includes, in addition to battle presentation, presentations that determine success or failure, such as presentations that decide whether to win or lose in a predetermined game. Note that during this success/failure performance, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but the pending icon 9A is continuously displayed in the pending icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a success effect is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, but the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters representing victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C represents an increased chance and an increased expectation of a jackpot. This premium icon 9C may represent that the jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white appearance before changing with the icon change effect, and a different form from the ally character after changing with the icon change effect, and is a combination of a circular image and a triangular image. It is composed of images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion performance 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining icon success/failure effect B. In this icon success/failure effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, a pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are circular and white. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white shape to a shape representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as the ally character 9C) jumps out from the variable icon display area in which the variable icon is normally displayed to outside the variable icon display area, and further becomes larger. It's a performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure performance, the enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle performance with the ally character 9C to see which one will win, in other words, it is a performance that determines whether or not the battle will be successful. Note that the success/failure presentation broadly includes, in addition to battle presentation, presentations that determine success or failure, such as presentations that decide whether to win or lose in a predetermined game. Note that during this success/failure performance, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the pending icon 9A is not displayed in the pending icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a success effect is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, but the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters representing victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C represents an increased chance and an increased expectation of a jackpot. This premium icon 9C may represent that the jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white appearance before changing with the icon change effect, and a different form from that of the ally character after changing with the icon change effect, and has a circular image, a triangular image, and an enemy character XC1. It is composed of an image that is a combination of a sword image, which is a part of the image. However, the premium icon 9C may include the entire enemy character XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion performance 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure performance C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure rendering C. In this icon success/failure effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, a pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are circular and white. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white shape to a shape representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as the ally character 9C) jumps out from the variable icon display area in which the variable icon is normally displayed to outside the variable icon display area, and further becomes larger. It's a performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure performance, the enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle performance with the ally character 9C to see which one will win, in other words, it is a performance that determines whether or not the battle will be successful. Note that the success/failure presentation broadly includes, in addition to battle presentation, presentations that determine success or failure, such as presentations that decide whether to win or lose in a predetermined game. Note that during this success/failure performance, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the pending icon 9A is not displayed in the pending icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), a success effect is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, but the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, characters representing victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene celebrating the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 1, the icon 9C, which was an ally character, changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C represents an increased chance and an increased expectation of a jackpot. This premium icon 9C may represent that the jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white appearance before changing with the icon change effect, and a different form from that of the ally character after changing with the icon change effect, and has a circular image, a triangular image, and an enemy character XC1. The image is composed of a combination of a part of the sword image and a part of the star-shaped emblem image of the ally character 9C. The present invention is not limited to this, and the premium icon 9C may include all of the ally characters 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), icon promotion performance 2 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion performance 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Modified example]
In the above icon success/failure performance, the variable icon 9C performs the first change in the icon change performance, and if it succeeds (wins) in the success/failure performance, performs the success performance and performs the second change in the icon promotion performance 1. Although this is not limited to this, the first change is made in the icon change effect for one of the pending icons 9A, and if the success/failure effect is successful (in the case of victory), a success effect is performed. The second change may be made in the icon promotion performance 1. In this case, in icon promotion performance 2, the changed icon may be returned to the position where it was originally displayed, or it may be moved to a different icon position and changed to the icon that was displayed at that location. You may also do so.
In the above-mentioned icon success/failure effect, the variable icon 9C is moved to the variable icon display area in the icon promotion effect 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be moved and changed to the pending icon 9A.
In the icon success/failure performance described above, the variable icon 9C performs the first change in the icon change performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending icon 9A performs the icon change performance to perform the first change, and then After the variable icon 9C is obtained, an icon enlargement effect, a success/failure effect, a success effect, an icon promotion effect 1, and an icon promotion effect 2 may be performed.

[Effect example]
In the icon success/failure effect of the above embodiment, the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed, then one of these icons changes, and then the success/failure effect is performed. Then, if the success/failure effect is a success (if the player wins in the battle), the above-mentioned one icon further changes. According to this configuration, a success or failure effect is performed by a change in one icon, and a further change in the icon is performed depending on the success of the success or failure effect, so it is possible to make the stepwise changes of the icon rich in variety. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, if the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed, and then one of these icons changes, the changed icon changes to an icon representing an ally character, and this ally character and enemy character The success or failure performance is performed using According to this configuration, the success/failure effect is performed using the enemy character and the icon representing the character whose one icon has changed, so the success/failure effect and the change in one icon can be linked, and the success/failure effect is created. This can make the player feel like they are supporting the ally character, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon from a group of icons consisting of the change icon representing the change or the hold icon representing hold is displayed in a first form,
The second display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the first form changes and is displayed in a second form,
The third display performance is a performance in which a success/failure performance is performed to determine success or failure using the predetermined icon displayed in the second form,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance in which the predetermined icon displayed in the second form changes and is displayed in a third form due to success in the success/failure performance,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
the predetermined icon in the second form is a first character;
A gaming machine characterized by the following [Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance that displays a second character different from the first character,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination performance, after the fifth display performance is performed, the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination performance, in the third display performance, the success/failure performance is performed using the first character and the second character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon selection effect will be explained below using FIGS. 77 to 79. This icon selection performance may be executed during the special symbol variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the effect.

[Icon selection performance A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect A. In this icon selection performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a decorative pattern variation performance is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, a pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. These pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icons 9C are circular and white. Among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A. The hold icon 9A that is closest to the variable icon is also called the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 77(A), first to third hold icons 9A to 9A are displayed. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD1 including the character A and a star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents a jackpot expectation level, and this character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation level. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 expresses the jackpot expectation level by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation level is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD2 including the character B and a star image. Character B included in the selected image XD2 represents a jackpot expectation level, and this character B has a medium jackpot expectation level. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD2 expresses the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD3 including the character C and a star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents a jackpot expectation, and this character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD3 expresses the expectation of jackpot by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the expectation of jackpot is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Thereafter, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the third pending icon 9A is displayed so as to change at high speed to the selected images XD1 to XD3. Then, as shown in FIG. 77(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination performance, the third pending icon 9A is determined as one of the third pending icons 9A from icon selection performance 1 to icon selection performance 3, and the icon selection performance stops. In this case, the following description will be made assuming that the third pending icon 9A is determined to be the selected image XD2, as shown in FIG. 77(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), an icon movement effect is performed. In this icon movement effect, the third pending icon 9A determined as the selected image XD2 in the above-described icon determination effect is shifted to the second pending icon 9A, and further shifted to the first pending icon 9A, and, Finally, it shifts to the relevant variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a battle effect is performed. In this battle performance, the selected image XD2, which has been shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selected image Displayed as XD22. In this selected image XD22, a star image representing two giant stars is displayed together with the character B who has become gigantic and the words ``Expectation level''. In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the jackpot expectation level is medium. Furthermore, in the battle performance, a smiling image XD4 is displayed, and a battle takes place between the smiling image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If you win this battle, you will win the jackpot, and the jackpot symbol arrangement will be displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. If you lose in the battle, you will lose, and the missing symbol array will be displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. .

[Icon selection performance B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect B. In this icon selection performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a decorative pattern variation performance is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, a pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. These pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icons 9C are circular and white. Among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A. The hold icon 9A that is closest to the variable icon is also called the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 78(A), first hold icon 9A to third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD1 including the character A and a star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents a jackpot expectation level, and this character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation level. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 expresses the jackpot expectation level by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation level is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD2 including the character B and a star image. Character B included in the selected image XD2 represents a jackpot expectation level, and this character B has a medium jackpot expectation level. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD2 expresses the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the third pending icon 9A changes to a selection image XD3 including the character C and a star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents a jackpot expectation, and this character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD3 expresses the expectation of jackpot by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the expectation of jackpot is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Thereafter, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the third pending icon 9A is displayed so as to change at high speed to the selected images XD1 to XD3. Then, as shown in FIG. 78(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination performance, the third pending icon 9A is determined as one of the third pending icons 9A from icon selection performance 1 to icon selection performance 3, and the icon selection performance stops. In this case, the following description will be made assuming that the third pending icon 9A is determined to be the selected image XD1, as shown in FIG. 78(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, when the third pending icon 9A determined as the selection image XD1 in the above-described icon determination effect is shifted to the second pending icon 9A, it changes (promotes) to the selected image XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the second pending icon 9A that has changed to the selected image shift.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a battle effect is performed. In this battle performance, the selected image XD2, which has been shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selected image Displayed as XD22. In this selected image XD22, a star image representing two giant stars is displayed together with the character B who has become gigantic and the words ``Expectation level''. In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the jackpot expectation level is medium. Furthermore, in the battle performance, a smiling image XD4 is displayed, and a battle takes place between the smiling image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If you win this battle, you will win the jackpot, and the jackpot symbol arrangement will be displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. If you lose in the battle, you will lose, and the missing symbol array will be displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. .

[Icon selection performance C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect C. In this icon selection performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a decorative pattern variation performance is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, a pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. These pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icons 9C are circular and white. Among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A. The hold icon 9A that is closest to the variable icon is also called the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 79(A), first to third hold icons 9A to 9A are displayed. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In this icon selection effect 1, the variable icon 9C changes to a selection image XD1 including the character A and a star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents a jackpot expectation level, and this character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation level. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD1 expresses the jackpot expectation level by the number of stars, and since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation level is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In this icon selection effect 2, the variable icon 9C changes to a selection image XD2 including the character B and a star image. Character B included in the selected image XD2 represents a jackpot expectation level, and this character B has a medium jackpot expectation level. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD2 expresses the jackpot expectation by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In this icon selection effect 3, the variable icon 9C changes to a selection image XD3 including a character C and a star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents a jackpot expectation, and this character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation. Further, the star image included in the selected image XD3 expresses the expectation of jackpot by the number of stars, and since this star image has three stars, the expectation of jackpot is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Thereafter, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the variable icon 9C is displayed so as to change rapidly into the selection images XD1 to XD3. Then, as shown in FIG. 79(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination performance, the variable icon 9C is determined to be one of icon selection effects 1 to 3, and stops. In this case, the following description will be made assuming that the variable icon 9C is determined to be the selected image XD2, as shown in FIG. 79(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a battle effect is performed. In this battle performance, the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as the selected image XD22. In this selected image XD22, a star image representing two giant stars is displayed together with the character B who has become gigantic and the words ``Expectation level''. In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the jackpot expectation level is medium. Furthermore, in the battle performance, a smiling image XD4 is displayed, and a battle takes place between the smiling image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22. If you win this battle, you will win the jackpot, and the jackpot symbol arrangement will be displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. If you lose in the battle, you will lose, and the missing symbol array will be displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. .

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned icon selection performance A, during the battle performance, the star image (expectation level display) is in a different position from that for the relevant variable icon 9C (during the icon movement performance), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be in the same position as in 9C (when the icon moves). Further, during battle production, the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but may be displayed. In this case, the same icon as the selection image XD2 at the time of icon movement effect is displayed.
In the above icon selection effects, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are images of different characters A to C or star images with different numbers of stars, but the present invention is not limited to this. The same number of star images may exist.
In the above icon selection effect, after the icon movement effect, a battle effect is performed using the character B of the selection image XD22, but the present invention is not limited to this. Good too.
In the above-mentioned icon selection effect, in the selected images XD1 to XD3, the character and the star image representing the degree of expectation with the number of stars are displayed in association with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the selected images XD1 to XD3, The number of rounds at the time of a jackpot, the expected degree of probability change, etc. may be displayed in association with each other.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned icon selection performance, a decorative pattern fluctuation performance is performed in which the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed, and a predetermined icon, which is one of these icon groups, has a relatively low expectation level. Icon selection effect 1, which is displayed as one star and character A representing a change, and a predetermined pending icon 9A, which is displayed as two stars and character B, representing a medium level of expectation. An icon selection performance 2 is performed, and an icon selection performance 3 is performed in which a predetermined pending icon 9A is changed to three stars and a character C representing a relatively high degree of expectation. Then, icon selection performances 1 to 3 are repeated, and one icon is determined in the icon determination performance from among the predetermined icons displayed in icon selection performances 1 to 3. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to pay close attention to which icon has the expected level of being determined, or which character's icon is determined to be determined, and it is possible to increase interest in the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the icon selection performance A, after performing icon selection performances 1 to 3 and determining one pending icon 9A in the icon determination performance, the icon is moved in the state of the determined pending icon 9A in the icon movement performance (holding shift). According to this configuration, the player can foresee that the pending icon 9A will become the variable icon 9C, and can keep the player interested in the subsequent progress. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays an icon group consisting of a plurality of icons,
The second display effect is a effect in which a predetermined icon of the icon group changes in a plurality of ways,
The third display performance is a performance in which the predetermined icon that changes in the plurality of modes is determined to be one mode among the plurality of modes,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the second display performance, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, each of the plurality of modes includes an expectation level display indicating a jackpot expectation level;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the second display effect, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, each of the plurality of modes includes the expectation level display and a character display representing the character;
The expectation level display and the character display are associated with each other,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
the predetermined icon is a hold icon representing hold;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon determined in one of the plurality of modes moves in the determined mode;
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon special change effect will be explained below using FIGS. 80 to 82. This icon special change performance can be executed during the special symbol change performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the effect.

[Jackpot expectation level by icon]
FIG. 80 is a jackpot expectation level table XE1 by icon. Specifically, the icon-based jackpot expectation level table XE1 shown in FIG. 80 represents a plurality of patterns in which the pending icon 9A or the fluctuation icon 9C changes, and the corresponding jackpot expectation level. For example, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be circular or may change to a square, and if it is circular, it may be blue, green, or red, and if it is square, it may be blue, green, or red. , green, red, or gold. Also, when the hold icon 9A or the fluctuation icon 9C changes to a circular shape in blue, the expected jackpot is 10%, and when it changes to green in a circular shape, the expected jackpot is 30%. If the circle turns red, the jackpot expectation is 50%; if the square turns green, the jackpot expectation is 40%; and if the square turns red, the jackpot expectation is 50%. The expected jackpot is 60%, and when the rectangle turns gold, the expected jackpot is 80%. The sub-control board 90 distinguishes in advance whether it is a jackpot or a loss based on the fluctuation pattern command sent from the image control microcomputer 101, and displays the pending icon 9A or , the change icon 9C changes. In addition, the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is normally circular and white, but it can change to any of the forms in the jackpot expectation table XE1 by icon, and after that, it can be changed to a jackpot by icon. It is possible to change to other aspects of the expectation level table XE1. In this case, at the time of change, the jackpot expectation level changes in such a manner that it does not fall lower than the previous jackpot expectation level. For example, if the icon changes from circular white to circular green (jackpot expectation 30%), then the icon changes to circular red (jackpot expectation 50%), which has a higher jackpot expectation than the circular green. , the rectangle changes to green (40% expectation of jackpot), red rectangle (60% jackpot expectation), or gold rectangle (80% jackpot expectation).

The following can be said about the icon-based jackpot expectation level table XE1. In other words, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the multiple patterns of circular icons, is the green one, which is the pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation among the multiple rectangular icon patterns. The structure has a higher expectation of jackpot than the square icon.
In addition, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest expectation of a jackpot among the multiple patterns of circular icons, is the pattern with the second highest expectation of a jackpot among the multiple patterns of square icons. The structure has a lower expectation of jackpot than the red square icon.
Furthermore, among the multiple patterns of circular icons, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest expectation of jackpot, is the pattern with the highest expectation of jackpot among the multiple patterns of square icons, which is the pattern with the highest expectation of jackpot. The structure has a lower expectation of jackpot than the square icon.
Moreover, a rectangular icon is configured to be larger than a circular icon.

[Icon special change effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining icon special change effect A. In this icon special change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, a pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are circular and white in the normal state. Among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A. The hold icon 9A that is closest to the variable icon is also called the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 81(A), first to third hold icons 9A to 9A are displayed. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third pending icon 9A changes to blue while continuing to have a circular shape. The expected jackpot at this point is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third pending icon 9A shifts to become the second pending icon 9A, and changes to green while continuing to be circular. The expected jackpot at this point is 30%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second pending icon 9A shifts to become the first pending icon 9A, and changes from a circular shape to a rectangular shape while continuing to be green. The expected jackpot at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), the variation effect is performed. In this fluctuating performance, the first pending icon 9A is shifted to become the fluctuating icon 9C, and various performances using the character CRA are performed. Thereafter, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot pattern array is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a losing pattern pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Icon special change effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining icon special change effect B. In this icon special change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, a pending icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are circular and white in the normal state. Among the pending icons 9A, the pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon is also called the second pending icon 9A. The hold icon 9A that is closest to the variable icon is also called the third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, and the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 82(A), first to third hold icons 9A to 9A are displayed. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third pending icon 9A changes to blue while continuing to have a circular shape. The expected jackpot at this point is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third pending icon 9A shifts to become the second pending icon 9A, changes from a circle to a square, and changes to green. The expected jackpot at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second pending icon 9A shifts to become the first pending icon 9A, and changes to red while continuing to be square. The expected jackpot at this point is 60%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), the variation effect is performed. In this variation effect, the first pending icon 9A shifts to become the variation icon 9C, and changes to gold while continuing to be rectangular. At this point, the jackpot expectation is 80%. Furthermore, in the variable performance, various performances using the character CRA are performed. Thereafter, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot pattern array is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a losing pattern pattern is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modified example]
In the icon special change effect, an icon with a low jackpot expectation may change to an icon with a high jackpot expectation, and then change to an icon with a low jackpot expectation. In that case, after changing from an icon with a low jackpot expectation to an icon with a high jackpot expectation, the icon may have a higher jackpot expectation than when changing to an icon with a high jackpot expectation.
In the icon special change production described above, when the icon changes, the jackpot expectation level is changed so that it does not fall below the previous jackpot expectation level, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot expectation level is lower than the previous jackpot expectation level. It may also change to a lower state. In this case, as a special case, the rule may be broken and the jackpot is confirmed.
In the above-mentioned icon special change effect, the icon may be changed to a different shape (for example, a triangle) in addition to the circular or rectangular shape. In that case, if the colors are the same, a rectangle may have a higher jackpot expectation than a circle, and a triangle may have a higher jackpot expectation than a rectangle.

[Effect example]
In the icon special change effect, one of the pending icons 9A or the variable icons 9C may be displayed in a circular or square shape, or in a different color. Furthermore, if one of the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is circular, it may be displayed in a plurality of patterns of blue, green, and red. Furthermore, if one of the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is a rectangle, it may be displayed in a plurality of patterns of green, red, and gold. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C can be changed in various patterns, and various icon change modes can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a predetermined icon from a group of icons consisting of the variation icon representing the change or the hold icon representing the hold is displayed in the first form and in the first form. Performing a display in one of the forms and a second form different from the form,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
the predetermined icon in the first form has a plurality of patterns;
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form each have the same shape and each have different aspect portions,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
the predetermined icon in the second form has a plurality of patterns;
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form each have the same shape and each have different aspect portions,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form have the same shape and different colors,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form have the same shape and different colors,
A gaming machine characterized by:
Note that the above aspect may be changed to the following aspect.
The first form of the predetermined icon may change to the second form of the icon.
Among the plurality of patterns in the first form of icon, the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation is more likely to have a jackpot than the pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the second form of icon. It may be a configuration with high expectations.
Among the multiple patterns in the icon that is the first form, the pattern with the highest expected jackpot is higher than the pattern with the second highest expected jackpot among the multiple patterns in the second form of the icon. , it is also possible to have a configuration in which the expectation of jackpot is low.
Among the plurality of patterns in the first form of icon, the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation is higher than the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the second form of icon. A configuration with low expectations may also be used.
The second form of the icon is larger than the first form of the icon.

The variable icon jump effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 83 to 85. 83 to 85, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. There are some things that have been omitted.

This fluctuating icon jump performance can be executed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the variable icon jump effect is included, the corresponding command is executed from the ROM 103. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2.

Here, first, the fluctuating icon jump performance A will be explained, then the fluctuating icon jump performance B, and then the fluctuating icon jump performance C will be explained in order.

[The relevant fluctuating icon jump effect A]
The variable icon jump effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect A. The fluctuating icon jump performance A is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz, which correspond to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-fluctuation area is provided in which a fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) is performed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, along with this, in the sub-variation area, small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, A variable display (fluctuating display) using the small right decorative pattern 8Rz starts, and at the same time all of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also all stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the small left decorative pattern Even if the right decorative pattern 8Lz and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz) is all in a state where the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is continued.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small The medium decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns.

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they all line up in the same pattern and result in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz , a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no pending icon is displayed at the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock of pending icons that are not consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged and displayed as numbers (not shown) in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 83(A), when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started and the fluctuating icon jump effect A is started, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is changed to the number " The right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) by the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued, and a flash FH1 is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad do not become difficult to see due to the flash FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see due to the flash FH1 and completely disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz do not become difficult to see due to the flash FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R remain completely disappeared from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a. While (while starting to move) the size of the variable icon 9C increases.

When the fluctuation icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the size of the fluctuation icon 9C is approximately 2 times larger than the size of the fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd. It is about .5 times larger.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a flash FH2 is emitted from the center of the fluctuation icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(E), the flash FH2 makes the variable icon 9C difficult to see and disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad also become difficult to see due to the flash FH2 and temporarily disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash FH2 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the flash FH2 disappears, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed at the number "1" and the right decorative pattern 8R that is stopped and displayed at the number "3" are displayed. It is displayed on the display screen 7a again, and further changes from the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C. In other words, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. This star-shaped variable icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display manner in which its left side passes through the front side and moves toward its right side. In addition, in FIG. 83(F), the icon of the relevant fluctuation icon 9C has been successfully changed by changing from the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C, but the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C has successfully changed. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and remains as the white spherical variation icon 9C, it means that the icon change of the variation icon 9C has failed.

Subsequently, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8 are cracked and shattered, the fluctuation icon 9C begins to descend (movement starts) while being reduced toward the fluctuation display position 9Cd while rotating. do. By crushing the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8, the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started again.

Subsequently, when the fluctuation icon 9C completes moving to the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the size of the fluctuation icon 9C changes to the size before jumping up (that is, the size shown in FIG. 83(B)), as shown in FIG. 83(G). The size of the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd shown in the figure returns to the state where it rotates.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (here, temporarily stopped at the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner (variable display) and a reach is formed. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed temporarily, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small The medium decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue to have a variable effect (variable display).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(I), the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It advances (moves) toward a position closer to the lower side (lower advancement position (lower presentation position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then stops as shown in FIG. 83 (J). , return to the evacuation position (home position) again.

Subsequently, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), it is a jackpot. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts, but the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, the number "7") and are not stopped and displayed. Sometimes it's off. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern 8L, small medium decorative pattern 8C, and small right decorative pattern 8R are also stopped and displayed. When a jackpot or a loss is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the second movable accessory 15 is in front of the display screen 7a and stopped at a position near the lower side (lower advancement position (lower presentation position)) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), By placing the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad, the player can see the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. Note that when the hold icon 9A exists, the second movable accessory 15 is placed in front of the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player In contrast, the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad are difficult to visually recognize.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at a position near the bottom of the display screen 7a (downward advancing position (lower presentation position)) for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1.5 seconds), There is a case where the fluctuating icon 9C changes to another icon, suggesting an increase in the jackpot expectation level, and the second movable accessory 15 displays the fluctuating icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the fluctuating display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By being placed in front of the icon, it becomes difficult for the player to see the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad, making it difficult for the player to expect an increase in the jackpot expectation level. It is now possible to do so. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, but the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player expect an increase in the level of expectation for a jackpot.

[The relevant variable icon jump effect B]
Next, the variable icon jump effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuating icon jump effect B. The fluctuating icon jump performance B is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz, which correspond to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-fluctuation area is provided in which a fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) is performed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, A variable display (fluctuating display) using the small right decorative pattern 8Rz starts, and at the same time all of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also all stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the small left decorative pattern Even if the right decorative pattern 8Lz and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz) is all in a state where the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is continued.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small The medium decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns.

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they all line up in the same pattern and result in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz , a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no pending icon is displayed at the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock of pending icons that are not consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged and displayed as numbers (not shown) in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 84(A), when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started and the fluctuating icon jump effect B is started, thereafter, as shown in FIG. The image EG is displayed and appears, and the disk image EG moves at high speed toward the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd and collides with it. It should be noted that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are being displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed), all disappear from the display screen 7a before the disk image EG appears.

When the disk image EG collides with the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation icon 9C flies up toward the center of the display screen 7a (while starting to move) and moves from the fluctuation display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 84(C). The flash FH is emitted up to the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the fluctuating icon 9C becomes difficult to see due to the flash FH. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd may temporarily become difficult to see due to the flash FH and may disappear from the display screen 7a, whereas the pending display position 9Ad may not become difficult to see due to the flash FH and may disappear from the display screen 7a. There is no. Moreover, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz do not become difficult to see due to the flash FH and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 begins to disappear, the presence of the fluctuation icon 9C becomes visible in the center of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 84(D), the fluctuation icon 9C becomes white and spherical. The icon changes from the icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and above the variable icon 9C, a message MG1, which conveys an increase in the jackpot expectation, is displayed on the display screen 7a, tilting upward to the right. Ru. In other words, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. This star-shaped variable icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display manner in which its left side passes through the front side and moves toward its right side. In addition, in FIG. 84(D), the icon change of the relevant fluctuation icon 9C was successfully performed by changing from the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C, but the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C successfully changed. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and remains as the white spherical variation icon 9C, it means that the icon change of the variation icon 9C has failed.

When the fluctuation icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the size of the star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C changes to the size of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd. It is approximately 2.5 times larger than that of the previous year.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 84(E), when the fluctuation icon 9C starts to descend (move) toward the fluctuation display position 9Cd while rotating, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a. When the variable icon 9C completes moving to the variable display position 9Cd, the rotating state of the variable icon 9C is maintained as shown in FIG. 84(F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 84(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed) are displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (here, temporarily stopped at the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner (variable display) and a reach is formed. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed temporarily, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small The medium decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue to have a variable effect (variable display).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(I), the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It advances (moves) toward a position closer to the lower side (lower advancement position (lower presentation position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then stops as shown in FIG. 84 (J). , return to the evacuation position (home position) again.

Subsequently, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), it is a jackpot. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts, but the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, the number "7") and are not stopped and displayed. Sometimes it's off. When a jackpot or a loss is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the second movable accessory 15 is in front of the display screen 7a and stopped at a position near the lower side (lower advancement position (lower presentation position)) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), By placing the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad, the player can see the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. Note that when the hold icon 9A exists, the second movable accessory 15 is placed in front of the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player In contrast, the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad are difficult to visually recognize.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at a position near the bottom of the display screen 7a (downward advancing position (lower presentation position)) for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1.5 seconds), There is a case where the fluctuating icon 9C changes to another icon, suggesting an increase in the jackpot expectation level, and the second movable accessory 15 displays the fluctuating icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the fluctuating display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By being placed in front of the icon, it becomes difficult for the player to see the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad, making it difficult for the player to expect an increase in the jackpot expectation level. It is now possible to do so. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, but the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player expect an increase in the level of expectation for a jackpot.

[The relevant fluctuating icon jump effect C]
Next, the variable icon jump effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuating icon jump effect C. The fluctuating icon jump performance C is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz, which correspond to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. A sub-fluctuation area is provided in which a fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) is performed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, A variable display (fluctuating display) using the small right decorative pattern 8Rz starts, and at the same time all of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also all stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. is formed), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the small left decorative pattern Even if the right decorative pattern 8Lz and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz) is all in a state where the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is continued.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small The medium decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different patterns.

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they all line up in the same pattern and result in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz , a small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and a small right decorative pattern 8Rz are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no pending icon is displayed at the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock of pending icons that are not consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged and displayed as numbers (not shown) in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side, and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 85(A), when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started and the fluctuating icon jump effect C is started, then as shown in FIG. 85(B), the fluctuating display position 9Cd and the hold The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd jumps up (starts to move) toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the fluctuating icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the fluctuating icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes, as shown in FIG. 85(C). At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C is approximately 2.5 times larger than the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd. In addition, in FIG. 85(C), there are cases in which the fluctuation icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and instead of exploding, the fluctuation icon 9C cracks and is shattered. .

The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during a fluctuation performance (variable display) are displayed before the fluctuation icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes. Or, the fluctuation icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases), and before the fluctuation icon 9C cracks and is crushed, it completely disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small medium decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz, which are being displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed), do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, if the fluctuation icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes, or the fluctuation icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases). ) When the fluctuation icon 9C is cracked and shattered, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 85(D). In other words, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. This star-shaped variable icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which its left side passes through the front side and moves toward its right side. In addition, in FIG. 85(D), the icon change of the relevant fluctuation icon 9C was successfully performed by changing from the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C, but the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C successfully changed. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and remains as the white spherical variation icon 9C, it means that the icon change of the variation icon 9C has failed. In addition, in FIG. 85(C), when the fluctuation icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and does not explode, but shrinks again and returns to its original size, the white spherical icon The variable icon 9C remains the same, which means that the icon change of the variable icon 9C has failed.

Then, while the fluctuating icon 9C is rotating, it starts descending (starts moving) while shrinking toward the fluctuating display position 9Cd, and when the fluctuating icon 9C completes moving to the position before jumping up, the fluctuating icon The size of 9C returns to the size before jumping (that is, the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd shown in FIG. 85(B)), and the rotating state is maintained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85(E), the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 85(F), the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ), advances (moves) toward the lower side position (lower advance position (lower presentation position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then moves to FIG. 85 (G). As shown, it returns to the retreat position (home position) again, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are being displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed), are displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a.

When the second movable accessory 15 is in front of the display screen 7a and stopped at a position near the lower side (lower advancement position (lower presentation position)) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), By placing the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad, the player can see the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position. 9Ad becomes difficult to see. Note that when the hold icon 9A exists, the second movable accessory 15 is placed in front of the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player can In contrast, the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad are difficult to visually recognize.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 at a position near the bottom of the display screen 7a (downward advancing position (lower presentation position)) for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 1.5 seconds), There is a case where the fluctuating icon 9C changes to another icon, suggesting an increase in the jackpot expectation level, and the second movable accessory 15 displays the fluctuating icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the fluctuating display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By being placed in front of the icon, it becomes difficult for the player to see the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad, making it difficult for the player to expect an increase in the jackpot expectation level. It is now possible to do so. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, but the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player expect an increase in the level of expectation for a jackpot.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (here, temporarily stopped at the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner (variable display) and a reach is formed. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed temporarily, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz and the small The medium decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue to have a variable effect (variable display).

Subsequently, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), it is a jackpot. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts, but the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, the number "7") and are not stopped and displayed. Sometimes it's off. When a jackpot or a loss is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable icon jump effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of images can be displayed in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. An image display device 7 (display means) is provided, and after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, when the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode), the display mode returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position). The moving first performance (FIGS. 83(B) to (G) for the fluctuating icon jump performance A, FIGS. 84(B) to (F) for the fluctuating icon jump performance B, and FIG. 85 for the fluctuating icon jump performance C) (B) to (E)) can now be executed. According to this configuration, after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode is changed. Since the display mode changes to another display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), the variable icon 9C is given a dynamic movement to create a production variation to the variable icon 9C. Furthermore, by dynamically moving the fluctuation icon 9C and changing the fluctuation icon 9C, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the expectation level of winning for the fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) , the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are not displayed. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, for example, in the first effect shown in FIGS. 83(B) to (G) of the variable icon jump effect A, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed, and the variable icon In the first performance shown in FIGS. 84(B) to (F) of jump performance B, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed. Therefore, in the first performance, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position) may not be displayed. According to this configuration, when the variable icon 9C is present in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to draw attention to the change in the variable icon 9C.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the image display device The variable icon 9C that has changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode) at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of 7 is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (second display position). 1), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, and the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position) is not displayed. There is. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position). Further, for example, in the first effect in FIGS. 83(B) to (G) of the variable icon jump effect A, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. In the first effect in FIGS. 84(B) to (F) of the variable icon jump effect B, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 84(F), and the variable icon jump effect C is In the first effect shown in FIGS. 85(B) to (E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 85(E). According to this configuration, when the fluctuating icon 9C returns to the fluctuating display position 9Cd, the completion of the change of the fluctuating icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuating display position 9Cd (first display position), and furthermore, the image display device By not displaying any image indicating the center position on the display screen 7a (second display position) of the display screen 7a of 7, the existing image, that is, the variable display position 9Cd ( (first display position).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. ), and in the first effect, when displaying the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), the pending display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed. When the display position) is not displayed, the pending display position 9Ad (third display position) is not displayed. Specifically, in the first effect in FIGS. 83(B) to (G) of the variable icon jump effect A, in FIG. 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, whereas the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and pending display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in FIG. 83(E). . Furthermore, in the first effect shown in FIGS. 85(B) to (E) of the variable icon jump effect C, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the pending display position 9Ad (first display position) in FIG. In contrast, in FIG. 85(D), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the pending display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed. Therefore, in the first effect, when displaying the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), the pending display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is When the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is not displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) may not be displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying or not displaying the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the pending display position 9Ad (third display position), the variable icon In combination with the movement and change of 9C, it can contribute to improving the production effect.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the image display device 7 (display means) It has a second movable accessory 15 (movable body) that can appear on the front side of display position), the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) is operated to display the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the pending display position 9Ad (third display position). A second effect that covers and makes it difficult to see (FIG. 83 (I) for the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84 (I) for the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 (F) for the variable icon jump effect C). is now possible to execute. According to this configuration, the colors of the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the pending display position 9Ad (third display position) can be changed by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body). Since it is possible to suggest an increase in the expectation of a jackpot by changing the shape or the like, it is possible to make the player expect an increase in the expectation of a jackpot.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance of the variable icon jump performance A in FIG. 83, the fluctuation icon jump performance B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in FIG. The accessory 15 (movable object) is moved to cover the variable icon 9C and make it difficult to see. Specifically, in FIG. 83 (I) for the fluctuating icon jump performance A, FIG. 84 (I) for the fluctuating icon jump performance B, and FIG. 85 (F) for the fluctuating icon jump performance C, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) covers the fluctuation icon 9C to make it difficult to see. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest an increase in the jackpot expectation level by changing the variable icon 9C to another icon by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable object), so that the player can expect a jackpot. You can expect an increase in the level.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the variable icon When 9C is moved again from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position) to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), at the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), It can be rotated in a predetermined direction. Specifically, in FIG. 83 (G) for the fluctuating icon jump performance A, FIG. 84 (F) for the fluctuating icon jump performance B, and FIG. 85 (E) for the fluctuating icon jump performance C, the fluctuating icon 9C is , the display mode is such that the left side thereof passes through the front side and goes to the right side thereof, and the display mode repeatedly rotates around and around (rotates in a predetermined direction). According to this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the changing icon 9C after the change.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the variable icon jump effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. Met. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
The second effect in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. In icon jump performance B in FIG. 84 (I) and in the variable icon jump performance C in FIG. 85 (F)), when the pending icon 9A exists, the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) is operated to display the pending display. The hold icon 9A at the position 9Ad (third display position) may be covered to make it difficult to see. In this way, it is possible to suggest an increase in the jackpot expectation level by changing the pending icon 9A to another icon, so that the second movable accessory 15 changes to the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and By being placed in front of the pending display position 9Ad, it becomes difficult for the player to see the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad, increasing the player's expectation of a jackpot. It can make you look forward to it.

[Modification 3]
In the second performance of the fluctuating icon jump performance A in FIG. 83, the fluctuating icon jump performance B in FIG. 84, and the fluctuating icon jump performance C in FIG. from the home position) to a position near the bottom of the display screen 7a (downward advance position (lower presentation position)) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and The fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad were difficult to visually recognize. When the hold icon 9A exists, of course, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is placed in front of the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. The variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad are difficult to visually recognize for the player. However, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) does not reach the front (front) of the display screen 7a from the retracted position (home position) to a position near the lower side (lower advancement position (lower presentation position)) ( For example, it may be possible to move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position (lower presentation position) which is the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, and then return to the retracted position (home position) again. In this case, even if the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves, it does not cover the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad, and even if the pending icon 9A exists, Since the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the pending display position 9Ad are not covered, the expectation of a jackpot is increased in that the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A change to other icons. Although there is no suggestion of increasing the jackpot expectation by changing the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad, the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) simply moves. Even in such a case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a suggestion may be made to increase the expectation level of a jackpot.

[Modification 4]
The first effect in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. ), in FIGS. 84(B) to (F) for the fluctuating icon jump performance B, and in FIGS. 85(B) to (E) for the fluctuating icon jump performance C), the white spherical fluctuating icon at the fluctuating display position 9Cd. 9C jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C as another icon, thereby successfully changing the icon of the variable icon 9C. However, the pending icon 9A has already changed from the white spherical icon to the blue smiling spherical icon, and when the blue smiling spherical pending icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable icon jump effect is changed. The fluctuation icon 9C, which is a blue smiling sphere, jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to another icon, for example, a yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C. The icon change may be successful or unsuccessful. In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the expectation level of winning with respect to the fluctuation due to the change of the fluctuation icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the fluctuation icon 9C. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 5]
In the fluctuating icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, when the fluctuating icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the fluctuating icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes. Or, the fluctuation icon 9C cracks and is shattered without exploding. However, when the white spherical variation icon 9C expands and explodes, the explosion causes the shell of the white spherical variation icon 9C to peel off, and for example, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C appears as another icon. Alternatively, the white spherical fluctuating icon 9C may swell, tear, and explode, and another icon, for example, a yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuating icon 9C, may appear. In this way, it is possible to increase the variations in the variation of the variation icon 9C, and contribute to improving the performance effect of the variation of the variation icon 9C.

[Modification 6]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, there is no pending icon 9A, but for example, the first pending display position 9Ad ~When there is a hold icon 9A at each of the third hold display positions 9Ad, that is, when there are three hold icons 9A, or when there are hold icons 9A at each of the first hold display positions 9Ad to 4th hold display positions 9Ad. When there are, that is, when there are four pending icons 9A, a pre-read effect causes the pending icon to be displayed as a suggestion (notice) of the variable icon jump effect each time the pending is exhausted as the game progresses and the pending icon 9A is shifted. The size of 9A may be increased. In this way, the start time of the variable icon jump performance can be suggested to the player, and this can contribute to increasing expectations for the change in the variable icon 9C due to the variable icon jump performance.

[Modification 7]
In the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd is at the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the icon changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C as another icon, and the icon of the variable icon 9C was successfully changed. The size of the variable icon 9C may be increased or decreased before and after this change. In this way, it is possible to increase the variations in the changes of the fluctuating icon 9C, and it is possible to contribute to improving the performance effect of the change of the fluctuating icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops and then the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops. Immediately before, the variable icon 9C may jump up (start moving) from the variable display position 9Cd toward the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display position 9Cd changes from another icon (for example, a white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C) and return to the variation display position 9Cd again. In this way, after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second display position), the display mode changes to another display mode. In order to change the display mode and return to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) again, by giving the variable icon 9C a dynamic movement, the variation of the performance to the variable icon 9C is increased, Furthermore, the change in the fluctuation icon 9C caused by the dynamic movement of the fluctuation icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the expectation level of winning with respect to the fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 9]
In the fluctuating icon jump performance A of FIG. 83(I), the fluctuating icon jump performance B of FIG. 84(I), and the fluctuating icon jump performance C of FIG. 85(F), the second movable accessory 15 is the image display device. From a stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the image display device 7 advances (forward) toward a position near the lower side of the display screen 7a (lower advance position (lower presentation position)). The device moves (moves), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then returns to the retreat position (home position). However, the second movable accessory 15 may be replaced with another movable accessory provided on the game board 2. For example, a lower movable accessory is provided below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the lower movable accessory is moved from a state where the lower movable accessory is stationary at the retreat position (home position) to the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 ( advance (move) so as to cover all of the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A (up to 4 pending balls may exist); It is also possible to stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) and then return to the retreat position (home position). In this way, it is possible to suggest an increase in the jackpot expectation by changing the color or changing the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad by the movement of the lower movable accessory. It is possible to make the player expect an increase in the jackpot expectation level, and it is also possible to suggest an increase in the jackpot expectation level by changing the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A to other icons, so that the player can expect a jackpot hit. You can expect an increase in expectations.

[Modification 10]
The fluctuating icon jump performance A in FIG. 83, the fluctuating icon jump performance B in FIG. 84, and the fluctuating icon jump performance C in FIG. It may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A12-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
After the variable icon moves from the first display position to the second display position, when the display mode of the variable icon is changed to another display mode, the first display position that moves to the first display position again. It is possible to perform the performance of 1.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-1,
In the first presentation, the first display position and the second display position may not be displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-1 or aspect A12-2,
In the first effect, when the variable icon that has changed to the other display mode at the second display position moves to the first display position again, the first display position is displayed and the second display mode is displayed. Do not display the display position of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A12-1 to A12-3,
There is a third display position representing the display position of the hold icon,
In the first performance, when the first display position is displayed, the third display position may be displayed, and when the first display position is not displayed, the third display position may not be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-4,
It has a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
After the first effect, when the first display position and the third display position are being displayed, the movable body is operated to display the first display position and the third display position. It is possible to perform a second effect that covers the area and makes it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-5,
In the second performance, the movable object may be moved to cover the variable icon and make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-5 or aspect A12-6,
In the second effect, the movable body may be operated to cover the hold icon at the third display position and make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A12-1 to A12-7,
In the first effect, when the variable icon is moved from the second display position to the first display position again, it is rotated in a predetermined direction at the first display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation means appearance effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 86 to 88. This operation means appearance effect can be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation means appearance effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Operation means appearance production A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect A. The operation means appearance performance is a performance when the operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating operation means such as the performance button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here In this case, the reach is "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 86(B), an operation promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a text image of "Press!!", and is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed extending beyond the three screens. At this time, the operating means image BTN is not displayed yet. That is, in this performance, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is momentarily confused as to what to operate. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest in the operation target and improve interest. The operation promotion image SG is displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the operation promotion image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation promotion image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. It fits. At this time, the image is still enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operating means image BTN is not displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decoration patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the operation promotion image SG is displayed in a further reduced size, so that the entire operation promotion image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operating means image BTN is not displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decoration patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation promotion image SG is further reduced in size and moved, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. Further, the operation means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. By displaying the operation means image BTN, the player notices that he has been prompted to operate the performance button 63, and concentrates his attention on the performance button 63. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are displayed in a reduced size. Normally, the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are not displayed in a reduced size after being displayed together, so that they can attract the player's attention again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operating means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter, and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. In the specific image TG, as shown in FIGS. 86(G) and (H), this scale panel is displayed in order from the left side, and an effect is executed in which the scale panel is gradually completed. When all the scale panels (6 in this case) are completed and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in FIG. The aspect changes accordingly. Here, when the player presses the production button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side to notify that the remaining period for which the production button 63 needs to be operated is getting shorter. There is. Unless the player presses the effect button 63, the colors of the scale panel of the specific image TG do not change in order from the left side.

Thereafter, when the period during which the production button 63 needs to be operated expires, the display of the operation means image BTN, operation promotion image SG, and specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the game is fixed and stopped in a losing manner.

[Operation means appearance production B]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect B. The operation means appearance performance is a performance when the operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating operation means such as the performance button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here In this case, the reach is "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 87(B), an operation promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a character image of "Continuously hit!!", "Press!!", and "Long press!", and these characters are displayed in sequence at a predetermined timing. Here, the sequence changes in the order of "Continuously press!!" → "Press!!" → "Long press!" → "Continuously press!!" The operation promotion image SG is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed extending beyond the three screens. At this time, the operating means image BTN is not displayed yet. That is, in this performance, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is momentarily confused as to what to operate. Furthermore, since the contents of the operation promotion image SG change periodically, the user is confused as to how to perform the operation. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest in the operation target and operation method and to improve interest. The operation promotion image SG is displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the operation promotion image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation promotion image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. It fits. The character content of the operation promotion image SG is continuously changed. At this time, the image is still enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operating means image BTN is not displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decoration patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the operation promotion image SG is displayed in a further reduced size, so that the entire operation promotion image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. The character content of the operation promotion image SG is continuously changed. At this time, the operating means image BTN is not displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decoration patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation promotion image SG is further reduced in size and moved, and is displayed at a position that does not overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. Further, the operating means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image imitating the effect button 63. By displaying the operation means image BTN, the player notices that he has been prompted to operate the performance button 63, and concentrates his attention on the performance button 63. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are displayed in a reduced size. Normally, the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are not displayed in a reduced size after being displayed together, so that they can attract the player's attention again. At this time as well, the character content of the operation promotion image SG continues to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operating means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter, and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. As shown in FIGS. 87(G) and (H), the specific image TG is displayed in order from the left side by the player operating the effect button 63 according to the content of the operation promotion image SG that changes sequentially. The performance is gradually completed. That is, when the operation promotion image SG is "Continuously press!!", press the production button 63 repeatedly, when it says "Press!!", press the production button 63, and when it is "Long press!", press the production button 63 repeatedly. By pressing and holding 63, the scale panels are displayed in order from the left side. If the player does not perform an operation according to the display contents of the operation promotion image SG, the scale panel does not increase. When all the scale panels (six in this case) are completed within a predetermined period, the specific image TG is completed. If all the scale panels are not aligned within a predetermined period, the operation means image BTN, operation promotion image SG, and specific image TG disappear at that point.

As shown in FIG. 87(I), the specific image TG changes its appearance in conjunction with the player's operation of the operating means (here, the effect button 63). Here, the specific image TG stops switching with "Continuous Hits!!" displayed. In this state, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side, and when the color of all the scale panels changes, the operation means image BTN, operation promotion image The display of SG and specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the game is fixed and stopped in the form of a loss.

[Operation means appearance production C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect C. The operation means appearance effect is a effect when an operation means image ASI, which is an image imitating operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here In this case, the reach is "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 88(B), an operation promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a text image of "Push in!", and is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed extending beyond the three screens. At this time, the operating means image ASI is not displayed yet. That is, in this performance, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image ASI. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is momentarily confused as to what to operate. Thereby, it is possible to increase interest in the operation target and improve interest. The operation promotion image SG is displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the operation promotion image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation promotion image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. It fits. At this time, the image is still enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operating means image ASI is not displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decoration patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the operation promotion image SG is displayed in a further reduced size, so that the entire operation promotion image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operating means image ASI is not displayed yet. The operation promotion image SG is displayed in a position where it does not overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R by being reduced in size.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(E), the operation means image ASI is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. The operation means image ASI is displayed overlapping the operation promotion image SG. At this time, the operating means image ASI is displayed on the front side. This allows the operating means image ASI to have an impact. Here, the operating means image ASI is an image imitating the sword member 65. By displaying the operating means image ASI, the player notices that he is being prompted to operate the sword member 65, and his attention is focused on the sword member 65. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(F), both the operating means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG are reduced in size and displayed below the display screen 7a. Normally, the operation means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG are not displayed in a reduced size after being displayed together, so that they can attract the player's attention again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operating means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter, and is composed of a plurality of scale panels. In the specific image TG, as shown in FIGS. 88(G) and (H), this scale panel is displayed in order from the left side, and an effect is executed in which the scale panel is gradually completed. When all the scale panels (six in this case) are completed and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in FIG. The aspect changes accordingly. Here, when the player pushes the sword member 65 downward, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes sequentially from the left side, indicating that the remaining period during which the sword member 65 needs to be operated is getting shorter. are doing.

Thereafter, when the period during which the sword member 65 needs to be operated has expired, the display of the operating means image ASI, the operation promotion image SG, and the specific image TG disappear. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the game is fixed and stopped in the form of a loss.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means appearance effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), FIGS. 87(B) to (D), and FIGS. 88(B) to (D), the operating means image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Execute a first performance in which the operation promotion image SG is displayed while the BTN and ASI are not displayed, and a second performance in which the operation means image BTN and ASI are displayed after the first performance. can do. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), FIGS. 87(B) to (D), and 88(B) to (D), in the first performance The promotion image SG is displayed across at least one of the sub-display screens 64R and 64L and the display screen 7a, and then is reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), FIGS. 87(B) to (D), and 88(B) to (D), in the first performance The promotion image SG is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and after being displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, it is reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (E), FIGS. 87(B) to (E), and FIGS. 88(B) to (D), in the first performance, After the operation promotion image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in this state, it is reduced and displayed at a position that does not overlap with the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(E) to (F), FIGS. 87(E) to (F), and FIGS. 88(E) to (F), after the second performance Both the operation means images BTN and ASI and the operation promotion image SG are displayed in a reduced size. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(F) to (I), FIGS. 87(F) to (I), and FIGS. 88(F) to (I), after the second performance, On the back side of the operating means images BTN and ASI, a specific image TG whose appearance changes in conjunction with the operation of the operating means by the player is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the operation means appearance effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means appearance effects A to C, the operation promotion image SG is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is also displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. After that, the image is reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the operation promotion image SG may be displayed across one of the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and may not be displayed on the other sub-display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means appearance effect A, as shown in FIG. 86(I), the specific image TG is assumed to change its appearance in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (presentation button 63) by the player. That is, when the player presses the performance button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG changes in order from the left side, and the remaining period during which the performance button 63 must be operated becomes shorter. However, even if the player does not press the performance button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG may change sequentially from the left side over time.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operating means image imitating the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means,
a first effect in which the operation promotion image is displayed in a state where the operation means image is not displayed on the display means;
after the first performance, a second performance in which the operation means image is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 further includes:
Equipped with a sub-display means that can display multiple types of images,
In the first effect, the operation promotion image is displayed across the sub-display means and the display means, and then reduced and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2,
The sub-display means are provided on both sides of the display means, and
In the first effect, the operation promotion image is displayed across both the sub-display means and the display means, and then reduced and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
The first performance is characterized in that the operation promotion image is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the reach state, and then is reduced and displayed at a position that does not overlap the decorative pattern. Game machine.
◇[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After the second effect, both the operation means image and the operation promotion image are displayed in a reduced size.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5,
After the second performance, a specific image whose appearance changes in conjunction with the operation of the operating means by the player is displayed on the back side of the operating means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The parts assembly effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 89 to 91. In FIGS. 89 to 91, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. There are some things that have been omitted.

This parts assembly effect is performed during a variable effect (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific area variable effect is included, the corresponding image is stored from the ROM 103. The data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sub-display screen 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U).

Here, first, parts assembly effect A will be explained, then parts assembly effect B, and then parts assembly effect C will be explained in order.

[Parts assembly direction A]
Parts assembly effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining component assembly effect A. The parts assembly effect A is performed during a variable effect (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, no decorative pattern is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 89(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(B), the image display device 7 is displayed from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. In a display mode in which five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the image display device 7. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward in its entirety by the player. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operation section, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses.

Among the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the component image PT3 , the display mode is such that the part image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display mode is such that the component image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

Thereafter, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are as shown in FIG. 89(C). It will be placed near the bottom center of each display screen, straddling the . The component image PT2 is placed near the upper center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The component image PT3 is placed closer to the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as a result, the component image PT3 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a directly. The component image PT4 is placed near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as a result, the component image PT4 is not passed through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a directly. The component image PT5 is placed in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and does not protrude from the left sub-display screen 64L to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. Displayed directly on 64L. Note that the component image PT1 is rotated three-dimensionally while straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R, and is arranged near the bottom center of each display screen. becomes. In addition, the component image PT2 is also rotated three-dimensionally, straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R, and is arranged near the upper center of each display screen. becomes. Component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Thereafter, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG in a sideways state is shown as shown in FIG. 89(D). is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver in color because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 89(B) and (C) are reduced, and the assembled sword image KG is as shown in FIGS. 89(B) and (C). The size is smaller than that of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in .

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 89(E) and 89(F), the edge of the sword handle in the sword image KG in a sideways state is rotated clockwise so as to face upward, and the sword image KG is Move the sword image KG downward so that the end of the sword hilt in the sword image KG (sword button KBG) is placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is a display mode in which the portion containing the light emitted light.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 89(G), the sword image KG is enlarged, and the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, a message prompting the user to operate (press) the sword button provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, the end of the sword handle (the sword button KBG provided at the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG). A message MG "Press here" is displayed near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is divided into three characters: "Here" and two characters: "Press", and the message "Here" is written on the left side of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. The three characters ``Press'' are placed on the right side of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging it in this manner, it is possible to clearly emphasize to the player the message "Press here" which prompts the player to operate (press) the sword button of the sword member 65 without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. Furthermore, the position of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG imitating the sword button of the sword member 65 that is the object of operation can be clearly emphasized to the player without obstructing the visibility of the message MG. can.

An indicator image IG indicating a period during which operation (pressing) of the sword button of the sword member 65 is accepted (hereinafter referred to as "operation reception period") displays a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the handle of the sword). It is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover it. With this arrangement, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be emphasized and communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the player operates (presses) the sword button of the sword member 65, or when the operation acceptance period elapses without the player operating (presses) the sword button of the sword member 65, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "7", resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the completion of the variation. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. (Fluctuating display) will start.

[Parts assembly direction B]
Next, parts assembly effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining component assembly effect B. Parts assembly performance B is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, no decorative pattern is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves in small increments in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 90(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the image display device 7 is displayed from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. In a display mode in which five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the image display device 7. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, while the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and pending icon 9A change from the display screen 7a. disappear. Thereby, by displaying only the variable icon 9C, which has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, it is possible to emphasize the variable icon 9C in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that here, the variable icon 9C is arranged at the frontmost side on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that its visibility is not obstructed by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward in its entirety by the player. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operation section, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses.

Among the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the component image PT3 , the display mode enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display mode is such that the component image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

Thereafter, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are as shown in FIG. 90(C). It will be placed near the bottom center of each display screen, straddling the . The component image PT2 is placed near the upper center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The component image PT3 is placed closer to the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as a result, the component image PT3 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a. The component image PT4 is placed near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as a result, the component image PT4 is not passed through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a. The component image PT5 is placed in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and does not protrude from the left sub-display screen 64L to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. Displayed directly on 64L. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed.

The component image PT1 is rotated three-dimensionally and is placed near the bottom center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. becomes. In addition, the component image PT2 is also three-dimensionally rotated while being placed near the upper center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. becomes. Component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Thereafter, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG is in a sideways state as shown in FIG. 90(D). is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver in color because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 90(B) and (C) are reduced, and the assembled sword image KG is as shown in FIGS. 90(B) and (C). The size is smaller than that of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in . At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 90(E) and 90(F), the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG in a horizontally fallen state is rotated clockwise so that it faces upward, and then the sword is rotated clockwise. The entire image KG is further reduced in size and placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90(G), the sword image KG is enlarged this time, and the entire sword image KG is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, a message MG "Push in" urging the user to press the entire sword member 65 downward is displayed near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is divided into two characters: ``Oshi'' and ``Kime'', and the two characters ``Oshi'' are placed to the left of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. , the two characters "Kome" are placed on the right side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging it in this way, it is possible to clearly emphasize to the player the content urging the user to press the entire sword member 65 downward (push in) without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. Furthermore, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 to be operated can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the message MG.

An indicator image IG indicating a period during which an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (hereinafter referred to as "operation reception period") is a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the handle of the sword). is displayed near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover the area. With this arrangement, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be emphasized and communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that in FIG. 90(G) as well, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed.

When the player performs an operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (pushing), or when the operation acceptance period elapses without the player performing an operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (pushing), the operation acceptance period shown in FIG. As shown in (H), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90(I), a battle performance is started. The battle performance is a performance in which two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and it is a performance with high expectations for a jackpot. In addition, in the battle performance, the state in which the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained.

When the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot and then a jackpot game (jackpot effect). On the other hand, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern and become out of place. When the battle performance ends and the jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. . Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is performed. (Fluctuating display) will start.

[Parts assembly direction C]
Next, the parts assembly effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the parts assembly effect C. The parts assembly effect C is performed during a variable effect (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, no decorative pattern is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 91(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the image display device 7 is displayed from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. In a display mode in which five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the image display device 7. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, while the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and pending icon 9A change from the display screen 7a. disappear. Thereby, by displaying only the variable icon 9C, which has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, it is possible to emphasize the variable icon 9C in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that here, the variable icon 9C is arranged at the frontmost side on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that its visibility is not obstructed by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward in its entirety by the player. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operation section, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses.

Among the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the component image PT3 , the display mode is such that the part image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display mode is such that the component image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub-display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

Thereafter, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are as shown in FIG. 91(C). It will be placed near the bottom center of each display screen, straddling the . The component image PT2 is placed near the upper center of each display screen, spanning the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The component image PT3 is placed closer to the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as a result, the component image PT3 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a. The component image PT4 is placed near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as a result, the component image PT4 is not passed through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. 7a. The component image PT5 is placed in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and does not protrude from the left sub-display screen 64L to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. Displayed directly on 64L. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed.

Note that the component image PT1 is rotated three-dimensionally while straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R, and is arranged near the bottom center of each display screen. becomes. In addition, the component image PT2 is also rotated three-dimensionally, straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R, and is arranged near the upper center of each display screen. becomes. Component images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Thereafter, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG is in a sideways state as shown in FIG. 91(D). is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver in color because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 91(B) and (C) are reduced, and the assembled sword image KG is as shown in FIGS. 91(B) and (C). The size is smaller than that of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in . At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 91(E) and (F), the end of the sword hilt in the sword image KG in the horizontally fallen state is rotated clockwise so that it faces upward, and then the sword is rotated clockwise. The entire image KG is further reduced in size and placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91(G), the sword image KG is enlarged this time, and the entire sword image KG is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in order to disassemble the assembled sword image KG, the previous steps are returned one by one from FIG. 91(F) → FIG. 91(E) → FIG. 91(D) → FIG. 91(C) (Fig. (H)) (FIG. 91(H) is the same diagram as FIG. 91(C)), and component images PT1 to PT5 appear. Even in such a manner that the procedure returns one by one, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed.

Then, in order to assemble the sword image KG again from the component images PT1 to PT5, the previous steps are performed one by one from FIG. 91(C) (FIG. 91(H)) → FIG. 91(D) → FIG. (E)→FIG. 91(F), and then, as shown in FIG. 91(I), the sword image KG is enlarged again, and the entire sword image KG is placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displayed large. Even in such a manner that the steps proceed one by one, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C remains displayed. Note that the color and shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are silver because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. Also, the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. In contrast, the color and shape of the handle of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(I) change from silver to gold, and the shape of the handle changes from a smooth surface to a rope wrapped It changes into a shape that is curved and uneven. That is, the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are different from the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(I). This clearly emphasizes and suggests that expectations for a jackpot have increased.

In FIG. 91(I), a message MG "Push in" urging the user to press the entire sword member 65 downward is displayed near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is divided into two characters: ``Oshi'' and ``Kime'', and the two characters ``Oshi'' are placed to the left of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. , the two characters "Kome" are placed on the right side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging it in this way, it is possible to clearly emphasize to the player the content urging the user to press the entire sword member 65 downward (push in) without obstructing the visibility of the sword image KG. Furthermore, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 to be operated can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the message MG.

An indicator image IG indicating a period during which an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (hereinafter referred to as "operation acceptance period") is a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the handle of the sword). is displayed near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover the area. With this arrangement, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be emphasized and communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the player performs an operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (pushing), or when the operation acceptance period has elapsed without the player performing an operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (pushing), the operation acceptance period shown in FIG. As shown in (J), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91(K), a battle performance is started. The battle performance is a performance in which two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and it is a performance with high expectations for a jackpot. In addition, in the battle performance, the state in which the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained.

When the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot and then a jackpot game (jackpot effect). On the other hand, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern and become out of place. When the battle performance ends and the jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. . Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is performed. (Fluctuating display) will start.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of parts assembly effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the parts assembly effect A in FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B in FIG. 90, and the part assembly effect C in FIG. The sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (including a plurality of display means), the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (including a plurality of display means) include the image display device 7 (main display There are one or more right sub display screen 64R and left sub display screen 64L (sub display means) other than the image display device 7 (main display means), and a sword member 65 ( The parts images PT1 to PT5 (components) of the sword image KG (operating means image) imitating the sword image KG (operating means) are displayed from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means) to the image display device 7 (main display means). The first performance that moves towards , (C)) and, after the first performance, a second performance in which the part images PT1 to PT5 (components) are assembled on the image display device 7 (main display means) to complete the sword image KG (operating means image). (Fig. 89(D) can be executed in parts assembly effect A, Fig. 90(D) in parts assembly effect B, and Fig. 91(D) in parts assembly effect C. According to the above, the parts images PT1 to PT5 (components) of the sword image KG (operating means image) imitating the sword member 65 (operating means) are displayed on the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (multiple The unprecedented novelty of assembling the sword image KG (operating means image) using the display means (display means) can provide the player with an effect that has not been seen before.Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the parts assembly performance A in FIG. 89, the parts assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and the parts assembly performance C in FIG. 91, the image display device 7 (main display means) Parts of the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means) are partially displayed. According to this configuration, the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) can be displayed in a large size using the image display device 7 (main display means), as well as the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to clearly and emphatically conveying to the player what kind of parts the sword member 65 is actually composed of.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the parts assembly performance A in FIG. 89, the parts assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and the parts assembly performance C in FIG. 91, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display There are component images PT4 and PT5 (components) that are directly displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the screen 64L (sub display means). According to this configuration, part images PT1 to PT5 (components) are displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) via the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means). Part image PT1 ~It is possible to provide diversity in the direction in which the PT5 (component) enters the image display device 7 (main display means). In other words, various performances using the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) are supported by using the image display device 7 (main display means), the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). can be emphasized to others.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the sword member 65 (operating means) is modeled in the second performance in the parts assembly performance A in FIG. 89, the parts assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and the parts assembly performance C in FIG. When the sword image KG (operation means image) is completed, the size of the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in a large size, and furthermore, a message MG (operation promotion image) urging the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is displayed. It is now displayed. According to this configuration, the size of the sword image KG (operating means image) is displayed in a large size, in other words, the sword image KG (operating means image) is displayed in an enlarged manner, and furthermore, the size of the sword image KG (operating means image) is displayed enlarged. A message MG (operation promotion image) is displayed that prompts the player to operate the sword member 65 (operating means), so it clearly tells the player when to start operating the sword member 65 (operating means), and explains what the player is about to do. can be emphasized and communicated to others.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the parts assembly performance A in FIG. 89, the parts assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and the parts assembly performance C in FIG. 91, the sword member 65 (operation means) is operated. When this is done, the sword image KG (operating means image) disappears. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) has been accepted.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the parts assembly performance A in FIG. 89, the parts assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and the parts assembly performance C in FIG. 91, the sword member 65 (operation means) is operated. An indicator image IG (acceptance period image) indicating the period during which applications are accepted is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can grasp the remaining time of the period in which the operation of the sword member 65 (operating means) is accepted, so that the player can calmly operate the sword member 65 (operating means) at his own timing. Can be done.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A in FIG. It is now possible to create a display mode in which (part) (part) of the display emits light. This configuration can contribute to making it easier for the player to recognize which part of the sword member 65 (operating means) modeled by the sword image KG (operating means image) the player wants to operate. .

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the specific area variable effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
Component assembly performance A in FIG. 89, component assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and component assembly performance C in FIG. 91 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In component assembly performance A in FIG. 89, component assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and component assembly performance C in FIG. 91, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using component images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, the decorative pattern may be assembled from a plurality of images. For example, if the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is being displayed in a variable manner (variable display), a reach is formed. , in order to assemble the medium decorative pattern 8C, use the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (a plurality of display means) to move toward the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from all directions, A plurality of fragment images may be collected and finally, a jackpot or a loss may be definitively displayed by the assembled medium decorative pattern 8C. In this case, while the medium decorative pattern 8C is being assembled, the player can change the color of the medium decorative pattern 8C (for example, change it to red or change it to a rainbow) to increase the expectation of a jackpot. It may be suggested that

[Modification 3]
In component assembly performance A in FIG. 89, component assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and component assembly performance C in FIG. 91, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using component images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, other members disposed on the game board 2 or the front frame 53 may be used. For example, images imitating the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories placed on the game board 2 may be assembled from component images, or may be placed on the front frame 53. An image imitating the handle 60 may be assembled from component images. In this way, you can increase the variety of performances. In addition, a plurality of members are prepared to be assembled, such as the sword member 65, the handle 60, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories, and the expectation level of jackpot is set in advance for each. You can do it like this. In this way, it is possible for the player to find out for himself the relationship between the components to be assembled and the expectation level of a jackpot.

[Modification 4]
In parts assembly performance A in FIG. 89, component assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and component assembly performance C in FIG. A left decorative pattern 8L, a medium decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state on the display screen 7a, and the result of the winning/losing determination (jackpot or loss) is communicated to the player. However, when a parts assembly effect is performed in which a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using part images PT1 to PT5, the winning/losing judgment result (jackpot or An image display device that displays a suggestion image (for example, to suggest a jackpot, a friendly character in wingman form is displayed; to suggest a loss, an enemy character is displayed) to the player. 7. It may be displayed on either the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. When a parts assembly performance is performed, the subsequent development of the performance is of important interest to the player, so it is necessary for the player to predict how the performance will develop based on the appearance of suggestive images. Furthermore, it is possible to contribute to the player's own discovery of the relationship and law between the parts assembly performance and the subsequent performance.

[Modification 5]
In component assembly performance A in FIG. 89, component assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and component assembly performance C in FIG. 91, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using component images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, a production button image imitating the production button 63 can be assembled using component images, or a lever image imitating a lever provided on the front frame 53 can be assembled using component images. You can also. In this way, you can increase the variety of performances. The lever provided on the front frame 53 may be a joystick or a rotary lever, and can be operated by the player during performances performed as the game progresses.

[Modification 6]
In component assembly performance A in FIG. 89, component assembly performance B in FIG. 90, and component assembly performance C in FIG. 91, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using component images PT1 to PT5. However, an operation section other than the sword member 65 may be displayed on any one of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. For example, a select button image imitating the select button 68 as an operation unit other than the sword member 65 may be displayed on one of the display screens of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. You may also do so. Unlike the sword image KG that imitates the sword member 65, the select button image is not assembled using component images in the component assembly performance, but is used to change the production mode (for example, spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode). This is to inform the player that a change to any one of these modes can be made (accepted) at the player's timing. In other words, when the select button image is displayed, the player can change (accept) the production mode at his or her own timing. A sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 and a select button image imitating the select button 68 are simultaneously and separately displayed on one of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. may be displayed on the same display screen. In this way, out of the sword members 65 and select buttons 68 that can be operated by the player, the sword members 65 can be assembled according to the parts images in the parts assembly performance, and the select buttons 68 cannot be assembled according to the parts images in the parts assembly performance. However, even if the sword image KG is displayed, the operation of the sword member 65 is as shown in FIG. 89 (G) in parts assembly performance A, as shown in FIG. 90 (G) in parts assembly performance B, and as shown in FIG. 91 in parts assembly performance C. (I) The operation of the select button 68 is different in that it is not accepted if the indicator image IG is not displayed, but the operation of the select button 68 is accepted if the select button image is displayed. Even if the sword member 65 and the select button 68 are displayed at the same time by chance, the sword member 65 and the select button 68 as the operating section can be used separately in the performance.

[Modification 7]
In the parts assembly effects B shown in FIGS. 90(B) to 90(G) and the parts assembly effects C shown in FIGS. 91(B) to (I), from the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, for example, a moving image may be displayed in which the star-shaped variable icon 9C bounces up and down, contracting and expanding vertically, or rotating round and round. In this way, it is possible to contribute to improving the presentation effect of the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the parts assembly effects B shown in FIGS. 90(B) to 90(G) and the parts assembly effects C shown in FIGS. 91(B) to (I), from the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C and was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be made larger by a predetermined time (for example, about 5 to 8 times) as compared to the size of the white spherical icon. In this way, the change in the fluctuation icon 9C can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

[Modification 9]
In the parts assembly effect A in FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B in FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C in FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the game ball was displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish among the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively. , is placed on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are placed and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. Ta. In this embodiment, when the parts assembly effect is started, the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are then moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the sword image KG is assembled. This may cause the player to misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a as the total number of component images forming the sword image KG. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any one of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R) may display a number representing the number of reserved balls as described above. This eliminates the possibility that the number displayed as the number of held balls is misunderstood by the player as the total number of component images that make up the sword image KG, and furthermore, the number of held balls is displayed as a numerical value. The numbers can be made difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be made intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 10]
The parts assembly effect A in FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B in FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C in FIG. 91 may not include some of the effects described, or may include other effects. .

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
The display means includes a main display means and one or more sub-display means other than the main display means,
a first effect in which a part of an operation means image imitating an operation means that can be operated by a player moves from the sub-display means to the main display means;
After the first performance, it is possible to perform a second performance of assembling the parts on the main display means to complete the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
In the second effect, a part of the component displayed on the main display means is displayed so as to protrude onto the sub display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
In the first presentation, there is the part that is displayed directly on the main display means without going through the sub display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
In the second effect, when the operating means image is completed, the operating means image is displayed in a larger size, and furthermore, an operation promotion image is displayed that prompts the operation of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the second effect, when the operating means is operated, the operating means image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or aspect B2-5,
In the second presentation, a reception period image indicating a period during which operations on the operation means are accepted is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by

◇[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-4 to B2-6,
In the second effect, a display mode is such that a part of the operation means image emits light;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Hereinafter, the ready-to-reach decorative symbol performances A to C will be explained using FIGS. 92 to 94. This ready-to-reach decorative pattern presentation may be executed during the variation presentation of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reach decoration pattern production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Decorative pattern production A when reaching]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win decorative pattern production A. In the ready-to-reach decorative pattern production, which is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-reach state, a symbol different from the ready-to-reach symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, or the left sub-display screen 64L. is displayed, and then the decorative reach symbol changes to that symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 92(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here In this case, the reach is "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the symbol 8M enters the frame from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. The symbol 8M is a different number (here, "6") from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As shown in FIGS. 92(C) to 92(D), after entering the frame, the symbol 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the symbol 8M moves to the left and stops while straddling the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. At this time, the left side of the symbol 8M is displayed protruding from the left sub-display screen 64L. Thereafter, the symbol 8M moves to the right, returns to the inside of the display screen 7a, and then moves further to the right and straddles the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 92(F). Stops in a tilted position. At this time, the right side of the symbol 8M is displayed protruding from the right sub-display screen 64R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the symbol 8M disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(H), the left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R of the ready-to-reach symbol move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched (changed) to a pattern with the same number as the pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 92(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are in the reach state with the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and stop there. Thereafter, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning or losing manner.

[Decorative pattern production B when reaching]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win decorative pattern production B. In the ready-to-reach decorative pattern production, which is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-reach state, a symbol different from the ready-to-reach symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, or the left sub-display screen 64L. is displayed, and then the decorative reach symbol changes to that symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here In this case, the reach is "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a plurality of symbols 8M enter the frame from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and move toward the left. The symbol 8M is a different number (here, "6") from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only to the left but also to the upper left and lower left, and move radially from the right sub-display screen 64R toward the display screen 7a. When the symbol 8M moves from the right sub-display screen 64R to the display screen 7a, it is temporarily displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. The symbol 8M also moves to the left, upper left, and lower left on the display screen 7a while being diffused.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the symbol 8M further moves from the display screen 7a toward the left sub-display screen 64L while being diffused. When moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, some of the symbols 8M temporarily overlap the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during movement. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side. The symbol 8M gradually increases in size while moving (is enlarged and displayed while moving).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(D), all of the plurality of symbols 8M move out of the frame from the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. disappears from (does not appear). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(E), a plurality of symbols 8M enter the frame from the bottom of the display screen 7a and move upward. The symbol 8M is a different number (here, "6") from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only upward but also toward the upper right and upper left, and in addition to the upward direction of the display screen 7a, the symbols 8M move toward the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. move radially.

As shown in FIG. 93(F), when moving from the display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. When moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, some of the symbols 8M temporarily overlap the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during movement. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side. The size of the symbol 8M gradually increases while it is moving (it is enlarged and displayed while it is moving).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(G), all of the plurality of symbols 8M move out of the frame from the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. Then, it disappears (is not displayed) from all three screens. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of the ready-to-reach symbol move toward the center of the display screen 7a while horizontally rotating three-dimensionally. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop at the center of the display screen 7a with their left and right sides reversed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(J), the symbol is switched (changed) to a symbol having the same number as the symbol 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (J) of the ready-to-reach decorative symbol production A, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have reached the ready state with the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. and stop there. Thereafter, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning or losing manner.

[Decorative pattern production C when reaching]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-reach decorative pattern production C. In the ready-to-reach decorative pattern production, which is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-reach state, a symbol different from the ready-to-reach symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, or the left sub-display screen 64L. is displayed, and then the decorative reach symbol changes to that symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A) of the reach-time decorative symbol performance A, when nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a. , 8R is in reach state (here, "2↓2" reach). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 94(A), the symbol 8M enters the frame from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. The symbol 8M is a different number (here, "6") from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 94(B) to 94(C), after entering the frame, the symbol 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. By this enlarged display, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the left side of the symbol 8M is in a state spanning the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right side of the symbol 8M is the right sub-display screen 64R. The display screen 7a is now straddled. Moreover, the pattern 8M overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R when enlarged and displayed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the symbol 8M is enlarged to a certain extent and then disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(E), a plurality of symbols 8M enter the frame from above the display screen 7a and move downward. The symbol 8M is a different number (here, "6") from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The plurality of symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only downward but also toward the lower right and lower left. move radially towards.

As shown in FIG. 94(F), when moving from the display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. Moreover, when moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. The symbol 8M gradually increases in size while moving (is enlarged and displayed while moving).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(G), all of the plurality of symbols 8M move out of the frame from the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. Then, it disappears (is not displayed) from all three screens. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the reach pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are switched (changed) to a pattern with the same number as the pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 94(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are in the reach state with the switched numbers, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and stop there. Thereafter, a predetermined ready-to-win effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning or losing manner.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern effect at the time of reach is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the first symbols (for example, "2") and are in the ready-to-reach state on the display screen 7a, A first effect in which a second pattern different from the first pattern (for example, pattern 8M representing "6") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the second pattern is displayed on the right sub-display screen. A second effect displayed on 64R and a third effect in which the decorative symbol in the reach state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol after the second effect can be executed. . According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the second performance, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the first performance, the second symbol (symbol 8M) gradually becomes larger after being displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, in the first performance, a plurality of second symbols (symbols 8M) are displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, some of the plurality of second symbols (designs 8M) are displayed overlapping the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the second performance, the second symbol (design 8M) is also displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern presentation at the time of reach is shown.
[Modification 1]
The reach-time decorative pattern effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the ready-to-win decorative symbol presentation C, instead of the presentations shown in FIGS. 94(A) to (D), the presentations shown in FIGS. 92(B) to (G) of the ready-to-win decorative symbol presentation A may be performed. Furthermore, in the ready-to-win decorative symbol performance A, instead of the performances shown in FIGS. 92(H) to (J), the performances shown in FIGS. 93(H) to (J) of the ready-to-win decorative symbol performance B may be performed.

[Modification 2]
The pattern 8M may be the same as or different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The aspect here refers to shape, font, color, size, etc.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
a first display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which a second symbol different from the first symbol is displayed on the first display means when the decorative symbol is the first symbol and is in a reach state;
a second performance in which the second symbol is displayed on the second display means after the first performance;
After the second performance, the gaming machine is capable of executing a third performance in which the decorative symbol in a ready-to-win state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol.
◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that in the second performance, the second symbol is also displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
In the first performance, the second symbol gradually becomes larger after being displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first performance, a plurality of the second symbols are displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the plurality of second symbols is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol in a ready-to-reach state.
◇[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5 further includes:
Equipped with a third display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
In the second performance, the second symbol is also displayed on the third display means. The gaming machine.

Group promotion effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 95 to 97. This group promotion performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a group promotion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Group promotion performance A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed on the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed on the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), the group effect (first half) is executed. In the group effect (first half), a button image BGS imitating the effect button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as shown by arrow YG. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as ready-to-reach are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a group effect (middle period) is executed. In the group presentation (middle period), the button image BGS moves in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by arrow YG. Also at this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as reach are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), the group effect (later stage) is executed. In the group presentation (later stage), the button image BGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by arrow YG and disappears out of the screen. Also at this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as reach are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(F), a symbol presentation is executed. In the pattern presentation, the pattern may be promoted. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7". These performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the case of a hit with the "7" symbol, the transition to the high-probability-high base state is confirmed through the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined to stop at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined to be stopped at "8".

[Group promotion performance B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed on the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the group effect (first half) is executed. In the group effect (first half), a button image BGS imitating the effect button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as shown by arrow YG. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as ready-to-reach are displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), group performance (middle stage) is executed. In the group presentation (middle period), the button image BGS moves in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by arrow YG. Also at this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as reach are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), the group effect (later stage) is executed. In the group presentation (later stage), the button image BGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as indicated by arrow YG and disappears out of the screen. Also at this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as reach are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the pattern presentation, the pattern may be promoted. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R remain at "4" and are not promoted. These performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (loss), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing manner. Here, it is shown that the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined to stop at "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined to be stopped at "3". In addition, in the case of a hit, for example, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4".

[Group promotion performance C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed on the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the relevant variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the group effect (first half) is executed. In the group presentation (first half), a seven symbol image ZGS imitating the "7" symbol appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The seven symbol images ZGS form a group and move to the left as shown by arrow YG. At this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as ready-to-reach are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), group performance (middle stage) is executed. In the group presentation (middle period), seven symbol images ZGS move in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the 7-symbol image ZGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG. Also at this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as reach are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), the group effect (later stage) is executed. In the group performance (later stage), the seven symbol images ZGS move on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the 7-symbol image ZGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG and disappears out of the screen. Also at this time, the effect patterns 8L and 8R formed as reach are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the pattern presentation, the pattern may be promoted. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7". These performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the case of a hit with the "7" symbol, the transition to the high-probability-high base state is confirmed through the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7". In addition, in the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined to stop at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined to be stopped at "8".

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effects of group promotion effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute group effects (early period), group effects (middle period), and group effects (later period) (Fig. 95(C)(D)(E), Fig. 96(C) ) (D) (E), Figure 97 (C) (D) (E)). Then, taking this as an opportunity, a symbol performance that can promote the symbol is executed (FIG. 95(F), FIG. 96(F), FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect the symbols to be promoted based on the group presentation, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the ready-to-reach mode by the reach formation effect (FIGS. 95(B) and 97(B)) are promoted by the symbol effect (FIG. 95(F)). , FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the performance symbols will be promoted after the reach, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the 7-symbol image ZGS imitating the "7" pattern crosses the display screen 7a from right to left (FIGS. 97(C), (D), and (E)), and the effect pattern 8L , 8R is promoted from "4" to "7" (FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, there is a relationship between the group performance and the promotion of symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7" (FIGS. 95(F) and 97(F)). If the "7" symbol is a hit, a transition to a high-accuracy, high-base state is confirmed after a jackpot game. According to this configuration, expectations for promotion of performance symbols are increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the group effect (FIG. 95(C)(D)(E), FIG. 96(C)(D)(E), FIG. 97(C)(D)(E)) , In the pattern production, the production symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7" (Figures 95 (F) and 97 (F)), and the production symbols 8L and 8R are promoted as "4". There are cases where this is not the case (FIG. 96(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modified example of group promotion performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect symbols 8L and 8R which have become the ready-to-win mode due to the ready-to-reach formation effects (FIG. 95(B), FIG. 96(B), FIG. 97(B)) are promoted. On the other hand, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped in a winning manner may be promoted using the group performance as an opportunity.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the group effect (Fig. 95 (C) (D) (E), Fig. 96 (C) (D) (E), Fig. 97 (C) (D) (E)), the effect patterns 8L and 8R are It was displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the group performance, the performance symbols 8L and 8R may be temporarily hidden. Further, in the group performance, the button image BGS and the seven symbol images ZGS may cover the performance symbols 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the above, an example was given of the effect regarding the first special figure reservation, but it may also be an effect regarding the second special figure reservation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to execute a group movement effect in which specific images move in a gathered state, and using the group movement effect as a trigger, it is possible to execute a promotion effect in which a symbol is promoted to an advantageous symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The promotion performance is a performance that promotes a performance symbol that has been temporarily stopped in a reach mode in a reach formation performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
The promotion performance is a performance that promotes a performance pattern that has been temporarily stopped in a winning manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
The specific image is an image related to the advantageous symbol after being promoted in the promotion effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The advantageous symbol after being promoted in the promotion performance is a symbol that suggests transition to a specific gaming state through a special game in which a game ball can be obtained;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
There are cases in which the promotion effect is executed when the group effect is executed, and cases in which the promotion effect is not executed even if the group effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The stop decorative pattern appearance effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 98 to 100. This stop decorative pattern appearance performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a stop decorative pattern appearance effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Stopped decorative pattern appearance production A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative pattern appearance effect A. In the stop decorative pattern appearance performance, after the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state where they are stopped and displayed in a winning manner, without the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R being displayed. It is a performance that First, after the special drawing starts to fluctuate (after the special drawing lottery starts), as shown in FIG. , 8R continues to not be displayed. That is, even after the variable display (fluctuating display) of the special symbol (identification information) has started on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation, as shown in FIGS. 98(B) to (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the winning mode "777" here. fades in. That is, an effect is performed in which the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become darker and gradually become visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in this production, after the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed without the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R being displayed. .

After the fade-in effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is completed and the images are displayed with normal density, the enlarged display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed as shown in FIG. 98(E). is executed.At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. will be displayed. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 98(F) to (J) show other examples of stop decorative pattern appearance effect A. After the start of variation of special symbols different from those shown in FIGS. 98(A) to (E) (after the special symbol lottery starts), as shown in FIG. 98(F), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 98(G) to (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the winning mode "777" here. fade in in sequence. Here, an effect is performed in which the images gradually become darker in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and gradually become visible in order from left to right. , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a stationary state. In this way, in this production, after the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed without the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R being displayed. .

After the fade-in effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is completed and the images are displayed with normal density, the fade-in effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is completed, as shown in FIG. When the enlarged display effect is executed, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. Displayed across. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

[Stopping decorative pattern appearance production B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative pattern appearance effect B. In the stop decorative pattern appearance performance, after the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state where they are stopped and displayed in a winning manner, without the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R being displayed. It is a performance that First, after the special drawing starts to fluctuate (after the special drawing lottery starts), as shown in FIG. , 8R continues to not be displayed. That is, even after the variable display (fluctuating display) of the special symbol (identification information) has started on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation, as shown in FIGS. 99(B) to (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the winning mode "777" here. A portion of the image is displayed, and the display range gradually increases until the entire image is displayed. Here, parts of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction, so that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG. An effect is performed in which the visible area expands. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in this production, after the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed without displaying the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. .

After the above-mentioned effect in which the range of the visible parts of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually widens is completed and the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as shown in FIG. An enlarged display effect of the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed on the right sub-display. It is displayed across the screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 99(F) to 99(J) show other examples of stop decorative pattern appearance effect B. After the start of variation of special symbols different from those shown in FIGS. 99(A) to (E) (after the special symbol lottery starts), as shown in FIG. 99(F), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation, as shown in FIGS. 99(G) to (J), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the winning mode "777" here. A part of the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed, and the display range gradually increases until finally the entirety of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Here, a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and as the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the left and right direction, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized. A production in which the area expands is performed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In FIG. 99(H), the visible portion of the left decorative pattern 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative pattern 8R are in different states. That is, in FIG. 99(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state where mutually different parts of the decorative pattern are displayed. In this performance, after the special symbols start to fluctuate, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed without displaying the varying display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the above-mentioned effect in which the visible range of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually widens is completed and the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, as shown in FIG. 99(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8R, An enlarged display effect in which 8C and 8R protrude from the frame image WG is executed.At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed on the right side. It is displayed across the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

[Stopped decorative pattern appearance production C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative pattern appearance effect C. In the stop decorative pattern appearance performance, after the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state where they are stopped and displayed in a winning manner, without the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R being displayed. It is a performance that First, after the special drawing starts to fluctuate (after the start of the special drawing drawing), as shown in FIG. , 8R continues to not be displayed. That is, even after the variable display (fluctuating display) of the special symbol (identification information) has started on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation, as shown in FIGS. 100(B) to 100(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the winning mode "777" here. While fading in, a portion of the image is first displayed, and the display range gradually increases until the entire image is displayed. Here, parts of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction, so that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG. A combination of an effect in which the visible area expands and an effect in which the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become darker and gradually become visible are performed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in this production, after the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed without displaying the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. .

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have been faded in and the range of their visible parts gradually expanded, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have been displayed in their entirety at normal density, the screen shown in FIG. As shown in (E), an enlarged display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

FIGS. 100(F) to (J) show other examples of stop decorative pattern appearance effects C. After the start of variation of special symbols different from those shown in FIGS. 100(A) to (E) (after the start of the special symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 100(F), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 100(G) to 100(J), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the winning mode "777" here. A part of the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed while fading in, and the display range gradually increases until finally the entirety of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Here, a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and as the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the left and right direction, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized. In combination with the effect that the area expands, the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become darker and gradually become visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In FIG. 100(H), the visible portion of the left decorative pattern 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative pattern 8R are in different states. That is, in FIG. 100(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state where mutually different parts of the decorative pattern are displayed. In this performance, after the special symbols start to fluctuate, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed without displaying the varying display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the above-mentioned effect in which the visible range of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually widens is completed and the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, as shown in FIG. 100(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8R, An enlarged display effect in which 8C and 8R protrude from the frame image WG is executed.At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed on the right side. It is displayed across the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special symbol variation ends, and the special symbol of the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the stop decorative pattern appearance effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, after the start of variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning manner without being displayed. , 8C, and 8R can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 100, in the first performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed in a fade-in manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99(H) and 100(H), in the first effect, when a part of the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed in the winning mode is displayed, the decorative pattern The part displayed in one of the plurality of symbols included in the figure and the part displayed in the other one are different from each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first performance, after the fluctuation starts, until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed. , decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are enlarged and displayed on the display screen 7a and the right side. It is displayed across the sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the stop decorative pattern appearance effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the stop decorative pattern appearance performances A to C, after the special pattern starts changing (after the special pattern lottery starts), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed until the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. It was assumed that it would not be displayed. However, in the stop decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, after the start of variation of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), until the stationary displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, modes other than the variable display are Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed. For example, after the start of the variation of the special figure (after the start of the special figure lottery), only the stationary and displayed decorative symbol 8L may be displayed until the stationary and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the stop decorative pattern appearance performances A to C, there is a period of time after the start of the special pattern fluctuation (after the start of the special drawing lottery) until the stationary displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. . However, in the stop decorative symbol appearance performances A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed immediately after the start of variation of the special symbols may be displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the start of variation, a first effect can be executed in which the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in a winning manner is displayed without displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern.
◇[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in a win mode is displayed in a fade-in manner.
◇[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in a win mode is partially displayed, and then the entirety is displayed.
◇[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3,
In the first performance, when a part of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in a win mode is displayed, the part displayed in one of the plurality of patterns included in the decorative pattern and the other part are displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the displayed parts of one symbol are different from each other.
◇[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern is not displayed until the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in a win mode is displayed after the fluctuation starts.
◇[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5 further includes:
Equipped with a sub-display means that can display multiple types of images,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the first performance, the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in a win mode is enlarged and displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The symbol color change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 101 to 103. This symbol color change performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a symbol color change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Design color change effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, a message image MSG "Start of final battle" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the display color of the performance pattern that has become a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the display colors of the production symbols 8L and 8R displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display color of the performance symbols 8L and 8R has been changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win. Note that here as well, the performance symbols 8L and 8R whose display color is "red" are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA wins. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a message image MSG "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies the winning/losing result using the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4", and the display color is "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4". It should be noted that here as well, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in the "red" color. As a result, the transition to the high-accuracy, high-base state is confirmed through the jackpot game.

[Design color change effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 102(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, a message image MSG "Start of final battle" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the display color of the performance pattern that has become a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the display colors of the production symbols 8L and 8R displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display color of the performance symbols 8L and 8R has been changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win. Note that here as well, the performance symbols 8L and 8R whose display color is "red" are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA is defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a message image MSG saying "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies the winning/losing result using the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is "5". Furthermore, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R have a "red" display color, and the middle performance symbol 8C has a "blue" display color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (loss), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing manner. Here, it is shown that the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4", and the middle production symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at "5". In addition, at this time, the display color of the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R returns from "red" to "blue" immediately before the final stop.

[Design color change effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 103(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to super reach. Here, a message image MSG "Start of final battle" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the production symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win. Note that here as well, the performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA wins. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a message image MSG "Victory" is displayed. Note that, here as well, the performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the display color of the performance pattern following the win/loss notification performance. Here, the display colors of the production symbols 8L and 8R displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, it is assumed that the display color of the performance symbols 8L and 8R has been changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies the winning/losing result using the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4", and the display color is "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4". It should be noted that here as well, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in the "red" color. As a result, the transition to the high-accuracy, high-base state is confirmed through the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the symbol color change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the performance symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode is changed in response to a specific performance (FIGS. 101(C)(D), FIG. 102(C)(D)). ), Figures 103(E)(F)). According to this configuration, expectations for winning can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the performance symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach mode is changed in response to the reach development performance (FIGS. 101(C)(D), FIG. 102(C)(D)). )). According to this configuration, since the display color of the performance symbols is changed as the game develops to a super reach, expectations for winning are further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the display color of the number images forming the production pattern is changed (FIGS. 101(C)(D), FIGS. 102(C)(D), FIGS. 103(E)(F)). . According to this configuration, changing the display color of the performance symbols becomes easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a win occurs after the color change effect (FIGS. 101(D), 102(D), and 103(F)), the game goes through a jackpot game and returns to a high-precision, high-base state. The transition of is confirmed (FIG. 101(H), FIG. 103(H)). According to this configuration, the player is expected to change the display color of the performance symbols even more, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R is changed to "red" in the confirmed stop effect after a loss in the win/loss notification effect (FIG. 102(G)). is returned to "blue" (FIG. 102(H)). According to this configuration, the display of fixed and stopped performance symbols becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R, which was changed to "red" in the fixed stop effect, is returned to "blue" immediately before the confirmed stop (FIG. 102(H) )). According to this configuration, the display of fixed and stopped performance symbols becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the symbol color change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display color of the performance symbol was changed in response to the reach development performance (Fig. 101 (C), Fig. 102 (C)) or the win/loss notification performance (Fig. 103 (E)). D), FIG. 102(D), FIG. 103(F)). However, the timing of changing the display color of the performance symbols is not limited to this. For example, the display color of the performance symbols may be changed using the reach formation performance as an opportunity.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the display color of the numeric image is changed, but if the effect pattern includes components other than the numeric image, the display color of the portion other than the numeric image may be changed. Furthermore, the display color of both the number image and the portion other than the number image may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, an example was given of the performance regarding the first special figure reservation, but it may also be a performance regarding the second special figure reservation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine,
After executing a reach formation performance in which the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-reach mode, it is possible to execute a display color changing performance that changes the display color of the performance symbols temporarily stopped in the ready-to-reach mode, triggered by a predetermined production;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The predetermined performance is a development performance from a normal reach performance to a super reach performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2,
The display color of the production pattern is the display color of the number image forming the production pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
If a winning notification effect indicating that the winning/losing result is a win is executed after the display color changing effect is executed, a transition to a specific gaming state is confirmed through a special game in which game balls can be acquired;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4,
If a loss notification effect indicating that the winning result is a loss is executed after the display color changing effect is executed, a color restoration effect is executed to return the display color of the effect design to the original display color;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5,
The color return performance is executed prior to the final stop performance of the performance pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The color change reach effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 104 to 106. This color changing ready-to-win performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a color change reach effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Color change reach effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining color change reach effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the left design symbol 8L temporarily stops. Here, a state where the left production symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4" is shown. In addition, the movement of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slower and moves as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. The right symbol reversal performance is a performance in which the right performance symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its moving direction and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by arrow Y.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance in which the right performance symbol 8R, which has been moving towards the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of its number image. For example, the right effect pattern 8R, which is normally "blue", becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. Here, the "4" symbol whose display color has been changed moves so as to encourage whether or not it becomes a reach (for example, moves so as to vibrate), temporarily stops, and changes the display color. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol which has been changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a medium symbol inciting effect is executed. The medium symbol stimulation performance is a performance in which the "4" symbol moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a manner to stimulate whether or not it stops (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) in the normal reach.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies the winning/losing result using the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, a situation is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4".

[Color change reach effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining color change reach effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. Here, a state where the left production symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, the movement of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slower and moves as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. The right symbol reversal performance is a performance in which the right performance symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its moving direction and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by arrow Y.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance in which the right performance symbol 8R, which has been moving towards the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of its number image. For example, normally, the right presentation pattern 8R of "4" which is "blue" becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. Here, the "4" symbol whose display color has been changed moves so as to encourage whether or not it becomes a reach (for example, moves so as to vibrate), temporarily stops, and changes the display color. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol which has been changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a medium symbol inciting effect is executed. The medium symbol stimulation performance is a performance in which the "4" symbol moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a manner to stimulate whether or not it stops (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) in the normal reach. At this time, the display color of the "4" symbol is changed. For example, the "4" symbol, which is normally "blue", becomes "red".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies the winning/losing result using the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4". At this time, the display color of the medium effect pattern 8C is the original display color. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol which has been changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4".

[Color change reach effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the left design symbol 8L temporarily stops. Here, a state where the left production symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4" is shown. In addition, the movement of the right performance symbol 8R becomes slower and moves as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. The right symbol reversal performance is a performance in which the right performance symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its moving direction and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by arrow Y. At this time, the left presentation pattern 8L is enlarged. The enlargement timing may be before, during, or after the right production symbol 8R is reversed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance in which the right performance symbol 8R, which has been moving towards the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of its number image. For example, the "4" symbol, which is normally "blue", becomes "red". At this time, the right presentation pattern 8R is enlarged similarly to the left presentation pattern 8L. The size of the right effect pattern 8R after enlargement may be larger than, smaller than, or the same as that of the left effect pattern 8L after enlargement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. Here, the display color is changed, and the enlarged "4" symbol moves so as to encourage whether or not it becomes a reach (for example, moves like it vibrates), temporarily stops, and changes the display color. . For example, the display color of the "4" symbol which has been changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), a medium symbol inciting effect is executed. The medium symbol stimulation performance is a performance in which the "4" symbol moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a manner to stimulate whether or not it stops (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) in the normal reach.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification performance is a performance that notifies the winning/losing result using the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, compared to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, the middle performance symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the color change reach effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when stopping the right performance pattern 8R, the display color of the right performance pattern 8R is changed and then the right performance pattern 8R is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 104(D), (E), FIG. 105( D) (E), Figure 106 (D) (E)). In addition, in stopping the medium effect pattern 8C, the medium effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped after changing the display color of the medium effect pattern 8C (FIGS. 105(F) and (G)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the performance symbols stands out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the performance symbol is changed and the display color is returned to the original display color when temporarily stopping the performance symbol (FIG. 104(E), FIG. 105(E)(G), FIG. 106 (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the performance symbols becomes more prominent, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right performance symbol 8R is moved in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction, the display color of the right performance symbol 8R is changed, and the right performance symbol 8R is moved in the same direction as the fluctuation direction and temporarily stopped (FIG. 104 (C) (D) (E), Figure 105 (C) (D) (E), Figure 106 (C) (D) (E)). According to this configuration, since the performance symbols move in the opposite direction to the direction of variation, the temporary stop of the performance symbols becomes more noticeable, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach formation effect, the "4" symbol whose display color has been changed moves so as to encourage whether or not it becomes a reach (for example, moves so as to vibrate) and temporarily stops. At the same time, the display color is changed (FIGS. 104(D)(E), FIG. 105(D)(E), FIG. 106(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the reach formation effect stands out and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped after being enlarged (FIGS. 106(D) and (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the performance symbols becomes more prominent, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach formation performance, the enlarged right performance symbol 8R of "4" moves so as to encourage whether or not it becomes a reach (for example, moves in a vibrating manner), and temporarily stops. (Figure 106(E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the performance symbols becomes more prominent, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the color change reach effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the reach formation effect is performed following the color change effect (Fig. 104 (D) (E), Fig. 105 (D) (E), Fig. 106 (D) (E)), but the reach formation effect is not necessarily performed. It does not necessarily mean that it will be carried out. For example, if reach formation is not performed, it is conceivable that the right performance symbol 8R will stop at a value other than "4", and then the middle performance symbol 8C will stop, resulting in a random loss.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, the display color of the right effect pattern 8R and the middle effect pattern 8C is changed, but the display color of the left effect pattern 8L may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, an example was given of the performance regarding the first special figure reservation, but it may also be a performance regarding the second special figure reservation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine,
In stopping the fluctuating performance pattern, after changing the display color of the performance pattern, it is possible to execute a color change stop performance of temporarily stopping the performance pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
In the color change stop production, the display color of the production pattern is changed once, and when the production pattern is temporarily stopped, the display color of the production pattern is returned to the original display color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-2,
In the color change stop production, the production symbol is moved in a direction opposite to the direction of variation, the display color of the production symbol is once changed, and the display color is moved in the same direction as the variation direction and temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3,
The color change stop performance constitutes a part of a ready-to-reach performance that temporarily stops the performance symbol in a predetermined manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
In stopping the fluctuating performance pattern, after changing the size of the performance pattern, it is possible to execute a size change stop performance that temporarily stops the performance pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5,
The size change stop performance constitutes a part of a ready-to-reach performance that temporarily stops the performance symbol in a predetermined manner,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character attack effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 107 to 109. This character attack performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character attack effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Character attack production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining character attack production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B) or FIG. 107(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 107(B), a special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C, and as shown in FIG. 107(D), the medium effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 107(B), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "1," the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "2," and the special symbol is temporarily stopped in place of the middle effect symbol 8C. It showed that it had stopped. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG that imitates the enemy character. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium performance symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 107(B), the attack performance (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 107(C). In other words, the attack performance (before reach) is a performance that is executed when the special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop performance. In the attack performance (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character pattern CRBG. Furthermore, a message image MSG "ATTACK" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 107(D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4," the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9," and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3." He showed how he did it. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → middle performance symbol 8C.

After the attack performance (before reaching) shown in FIG. 107(C) or after the temporary stop performance B shown in FIG. 107(D), the fluctuation start performance shown in FIG. 107(A) is executed. This results in a pseudo-continuous performance. In this embodiment, a repeated pseudo-continuous performance in which such a pseudo-continuous performance is repeated seven times is executed. Then, in the repeated pseudo-continuous performance, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the middle performance pattern 8C (FIG. 107(B)), and the attack performance (before reach) is executed (FIG. 107(C)).

After the repeated pseudo-continuous performance ends, a reach formation performance is executed as shown in FIG. 107(E). The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a situation is shown in which both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack performance (after reach) is a performance that adds a further attack to the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are displayed in order, and when the enemy character CRB and the attack images AG overlap, damage is caused to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA wins. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a message image MSG "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "5".

[Character attack production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining character attack effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B) or FIG. 108(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 108(B), a special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect pattern 8C, and as shown in FIG. 108(D), the medium effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop production A shown in FIG. 108(B), the left production pattern 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right production pattern 8R temporarily stops at "2", and the special symbol is temporarily stopped in place of the middle production pattern 8C. It showed that it had stopped. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG that imitates the enemy character. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium performance symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 108(B), the attack performance (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 108(C). In other words, the attack performance (before reach) is a performance that is executed when the special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop performance. In the attack performance (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character pattern CRBG. Further, a message image MSG "ATTACK" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 108(D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4", the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3". He showed how he did it. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → middle performance symbol 8C.

After the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 108(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 108(D), the fluctuation start effect shown in FIG. 108(A) is executed. This results in a pseudo-continuous performance. In this embodiment, a repeated pseudo-continuous performance in which such a pseudo-continuous performance is repeated seven times is executed. Then, in the repeated pseudo-continuous performance, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the medium performance pattern 8C (FIG. 108(B)), and the attack performance (before reach) is executed (FIG. 108(C)).

After the repeated pseudo-continuous performance ends, a reach formation performance is executed as shown in FIG. 108(E). The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a situation is shown in which both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack performance (after reach) is a performance that adds a further attack to the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG that reads "Consecutive Hits" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are displayed in order, and when the enemy character CRB and the attack images AG overlap, damage is caused to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA wins. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "5".

[Character attack production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining character attack production C.
First, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B) or FIG. 109(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 109(B), a special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect pattern 8C, and as shown in FIG. 109(D), the medium effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 109(B), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "1," the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "2," and the special symbol is temporarily stopped in place of the middle effect symbol 8C. It showed that it had stopped. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG that imitates the enemy character. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium performance symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 109(B), the attack performance (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 109(C). In other words, the attack performance (before reach) is a performance that is executed when the special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop performance. In the attack effect (before reach), a message image MSG1 "ATTACK" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG2 "Press" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, when the player presses the production button 63, an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character pattern CRBG.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109(D), the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4," the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "9," and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at "3." He showed how he did it. For example, the changing performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol 8L → right performance symbol 8R → middle performance symbol 8C.

After the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 109(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109(D), the fluctuation start effect shown in FIG. 109(A) is executed. This results in a pseudo-continuous performance. In this embodiment, a repeated pseudo-continuous performance in which such a pseudo-continuous performance is repeated seven times is executed. Then, in the repeated pseudo-continuous performance, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the medium performance pattern 8C (FIG. 109(B)), and the attack performance (before reach) is executed (FIG. 109(C)).

After the repeated pseudo-continuous effect ends, a reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109(E). The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a situation is shown in which both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R temporarily stop at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack performance (after reach) is a performance that adds a further attack to the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image “Continuous Hit” is displayed above the button image BG. Then, each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are displayed in order, and when the enemy character CRB and the attack images AG overlap, damage is caused to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/defeat notification performance is a performance to notify the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, the win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA is defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Additionally, a message image MSG saying "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (loss), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing manner. Here, it is shown that the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "5", and the middle production symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at "6".

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of character attack effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a series of effects can be executed before and after the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), and 109(E)). 107(C)(F), FIG. 108(C)(F), FIG. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, a uniform performance can be performed within a single fluctuation, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a production in which the same enemy character CRB appears before and after the reach formation production (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), and 109(E)) is executed. (Fig. 107(C)(F), Fig. 108(C)(F), Fig. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, a more consistent performance can be performed within a single change, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of attacking the same enemy character CRB is executed before and after the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), and 109(E)). (Fig. 107(C)(F), Fig. 108(C)(F), Fig. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, a more consistent performance can be performed within a single change, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, before the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), and 109(E)), the pseudo continuous effect (FIGS. 107(A), (B), and 108(A)(B)(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the performance including the pseudo-run.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to perform a performance in which an enemy character pattern CRBG imitating an enemy character is temporarily stopped instead of the medium performance pattern 8C (FIG. 107(B), FIG. 108(B), FIG. 109 (B)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the pseudo-continuous performance will be interesting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the attack performance (before reaching) is a performance using the performance button 63 (FIG. 109(C)). Furthermore, the attack performance (after reach) is performed using the performance button 63 (FIGS. 108(F) and 109(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the operation stock performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the attack performance (after reach), the button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed, and the message image MSG "Continuous Hit" is displayed to encourage the player to repeatedly hit the button. In contrast, a message image "long press" may be displayed to prompt the player to press the button for a long time.

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, when attacking the enemy character CRB (attack performance (before reach), attack performance (after reach)), a display indicating the physical strength of the enemy character CRB may be performed. For example, physical strength may be displayed using a horizontally long bar.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the operation of the performance button 63 was taken as an example, but the operation is not limited to the operation of the performance button 63, as long as it is an operation unit that can be operated by the player.

[Modification 4]
In the above, an example was given of the performance regarding the first special figure reservation, but it may also be a performance regarding the second special figure reservation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine,
The first period and A series of performances spanning the second period can be executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1,
The series of performances are performances in which a specific character appears;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or aspect C6-2,
The series of performances are attack performances that attack a specific character,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3,
The series of performances includes, during the first period, a pseudo-continuous performance in which the performance symbol repeats a temporary stop and a re-fluctuation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-4,
In the pseudo-continuous performance, it is possible to perform a character pattern stop performance in which a pattern imitating a specific character temporarily stops when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-5,
The series of effects includes, in at least one of the first period and the second period, an operation section effect using an operation section that can be operated by a player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern color change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 110 to 112. 110 to 112, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. It has since been omitted.

This decorative pattern color change effect is such that the occurrence is first predicted by a look-ahead effect, and then the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command, a preliminary determination command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a decorative pattern color change effect, The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the decorative pattern color change effect (referred to as "specific background image") is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image, and includes, for example, a moon surface image, a dark space entry image, and a dark space escape image. , specific images such as images inside a spacecraft. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an ocean floor image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be still images or moving images.

Here, first, the decorative pattern color change effect A will be explained, followed by the decorative pattern color change effect B, and then the decorative pattern color change effect C.

[Decorative pattern color change effect A]
The decorative pattern color change effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern color change effect A. The decorative pattern color change effect A is such that the occurrence is first predicted by a look-ahead effect, and furthermore, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 110(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the three-dimensional image is displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern (symbol: number "1" to number "9") fluctuates (varies display). Begins.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad. Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol color change effect A is performed.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is indicated by blue numbers (light blue may be used, dark blue may be used, or blue between bright blue and dark blue may be used). On the left side, the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is indicated by a red number (it can be bright red, dark red, or a red in between bright red and dark red). ) are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The icon with the icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly flashes, and when it is off, it is displayed in a dark blue color, and when it is lit, it is displayed in a bright blue color, and it changes from off to lit. It gradually changes to bright blue, and gradually changes to dark blue as it goes from being turned on to being turned off.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, and when it is off, it is displayed in a dark red color, and when it is lit, it is displayed in a bright red color, and then it changes from off to lit. The light changes to bright red in stages, and gradually changes to dark red as it goes from being turned on to being turned off.

In FIG. 110(A), a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative symbol color change performance A is started by the pre-read performance. When the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns starts, the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed at the number "5" in bright green, and the middle decorative pattern 8C in bright blue stops at the number "6". The right decorative pattern 8R having a bright red color is stopped and displayed at the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110(B), the blue spherical pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C, which is a decorative pattern. When the color change effect A is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, disappears. The first specific background image is switched to the dark space entry image THG2, and the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks loudly (for example, once or twice), then blinks slowly, and finally blinks again sharply (for example, 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative symbol color change effect A.

When the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4" having a dark blue color.

As mentioned above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect A starts, the number "5" forcibly changes from bright green to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect A starts. It has a bright green color and does not appear. In addition, as mentioned above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, the number "4" forcibly changes from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color changes. In production A, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having the same dark blue color. Bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

Note that when the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R that are normally displayed in the background image. , becomes one size larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 110(E), the left decorative pattern The right decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the display mode is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 110(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "5" having a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect A starts, the number "6" forcibly changes from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect A starts. It has a bright blue color and does not appear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R, and the display mode is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern. , a temporary stop is displayed with an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, light comes from behind. The display mode is such that an opaque red number "7" appears as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as the bright red number "7" and the right decorative pattern 8R is suspended at the number "6" which has a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "7" has a bright red color, and when the decorative pattern color change effect A starts, it does not change from bright red to dark blue, that is, the decorative pattern color change effect A starts. It is the only one that appears without any color change even when the color changes.

After that, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" that had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, light comes from behind. When the red opaque number "7" appears as the right decorative pattern 8R, it becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, pretending to be temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 110(I). As shown in FIG. 110(J), the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C is a display mode that is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" starts to decrease, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 110(K), the second The dark space escape image THG3, which is the specific background image, is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image). , an opaque number "8" having a bright blue color appears on the display screen 7a as the right decorative pattern 8R and temporarily stops, and then the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" returns to its original size (normal background image). The display returns to the size of the left decorative pattern 8L that was displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, and an opaque number "3" having a bright green color appears on the display screen 7a as the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the display screen 7a temporarily stops. As a result, the decorative pattern color change performance A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(L), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the bright red number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the bright green number "3", and the right decoration As the symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the bright blue number "6", it becomes a miss, and the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect B]
Next, decorative pattern color change effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern color change effect B. Decorative pattern color change performance B is such that its occurrence is first predicted by a look-ahead performance, and furthermore, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the three-dimensional image is displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern (symbol: number "1" to number "9") fluctuates (varies display). Begins.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad. Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol color change effect B is performed.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is indicated by blue numbers (light blue may be used, dark blue may be used, or blue between bright blue and dark blue may be used). On the left side, the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is indicated by a red number (it can be bright red, dark red, or a red in between bright red and dark red). ) are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The icon with the icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly flashes, and when it is off, it is displayed in a dark blue color, and when it is lit, it is displayed in a bright blue color, and it changes from off to lit. It gradually changes to bright blue, and gradually changes to dark blue as it goes from being turned on to being turned off.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, and when it is off, it is displayed in a dark red color, and when it is lit, it is displayed in a bright red color, and then it changes from off to lit. The light changes to bright red in stages, and gradually changes to dark red as it goes from being turned on to being turned off.

In FIG. 111(A), a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative symbol color change performance B is started by the pre-read performance. When the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns starts, the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed at the number "5" in bright green, and the middle decorative pattern 8C in bright blue stops at the number "6". The right decorative pattern 8R having a bright red color is stopped and displayed at the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(B), the blue spherical pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the corresponding variable display position 9Cd, and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C and becomes a decorative pattern. When color change effect B is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, disappears. The first specific background image is switched to the dark space entry image THG2, and the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks loudly (for example, once or twice), then blinks slowly, and finally blinks again sharply (for example, 2 to 3 times). This allows the player to easily recognize the start of the decorative symbol color change performance B.

When the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4" having a dark blue color.

As mentioned above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect B starts, the number "5" forcibly changes from bright green to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect B starts. It has a bright green color and does not appear. In addition, as mentioned above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect B starts, the number "4" forcibly changes from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color changes. In presentation B, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative pattern color change effect B is started, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having the same dark blue color. Bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

Note that when the decorative pattern color change effect B is started, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R that are normally displayed in the background image. , becomes one size larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 111(E), the left decorative pattern The right decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the display mode is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 111(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "5" having a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect B starts, the number "6" forcibly changes from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect B starts. It has a bright blue color and does not appear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. When the opaque number "6" with dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R, it appears to be temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIGS. 111(I) and (J). , it becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. 111(K), the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "6" appears on the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" starts to decrease, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 111(L), the second decorative pattern 8L displayed on the display screen 7a The dark space escape image THG3, which is the specific background image, is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image). , the opaque number "7" having a bright red color appears on the display screen 7a as the right decorative pattern 8R and temporarily stops, and then the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" having a dark blue color returns to its original size. (The size of the left decorative pattern 8L that was normally displayed in the background image) returns from dark blue to bright blue, and an opaque number "3" with bright green appears on the display screen 7a as the medium decorative pattern 8C. Temporarily stop. This completes the decorative pattern color change performance B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(M), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the bright blue number "6", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the bright green number "3", and the right decoration As the symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the bright red number "7", it becomes a miss, and the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change production C]
Next, the decorative pattern color change effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect C. The decorative pattern color change effect C is such that the occurrence is first predicted by a look-ahead effect, and furthermore, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, The right decorative pattern 8R of the three-dimensional image is displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern (symbol: number "1" to number "9") fluctuates (varies display). Begins.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad. Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol color change effect C is performed.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is indicated by blue numbers (light blue may be used, dark blue may be used, or blue between bright blue and dark blue may be used). On the left side, the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is indicated by a red number (it can be bright red, dark red, or a red in between bright red and dark red). ) and are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The icon with the icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly flashes, and when it is off, it is displayed in a dark blue color, and when it is lit, it is displayed in a bright blue color, and it changes from off to lit. It gradually changes to bright blue, and gradually changes to dark blue as it goes from being turned on to being turned off.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, and when it is off, it is displayed in a dark red color, and when it is lit, it is displayed in a bright red color, and then it changes from off to lit. The light changes to bright red in stages, and gradually changes to dark red as it goes from being turned on to being turned off.

In FIG. 112(A), a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative symbol color change performance C is started by the pre-read performance. When the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative patterns starts, the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed at the number "5" in bright green, and the middle decorative pattern 8C in bright blue stops at the number "6". The right decorative pattern 8R having a bright red color is stopped and displayed at the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 112(B), the blue spherical pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C, which is a decorative pattern. When the color change effect C is started, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, disappears. The first specific background image is switched to the dark space entry image THG2, and the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks loudly (for example, once or twice), then blinks slowly, and finally blinks again sharply (for example, 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative symbol color change effect C.

When the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4" having a dark blue color.

As mentioned above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect C starts, the number "5" forcibly changes from bright green to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect C starts. It has a bright green color and does not appear. In addition, as mentioned above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect C is started, the number "4" forcibly changes from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color changes. In presentation C, it has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative pattern color change effect C is started, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having the same dark blue color. Bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

Note that when the decorative pattern color change effect C is started, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R that are normally displayed in the background image. , becomes one size larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R, and the display mode is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 112(E), the left decorative pattern The right decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. As a result, an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 112(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "5" having a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change effect C starts, the number "6" forcibly changes from bright blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect C It has a bright blue color and does not appear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" which had been temporarily stopped and displayed becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, causing the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. When the opaque number "6" with dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R approach each other as shown in FIG. 112(I). Then, from the dark blue left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6", return to the bright blue left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6", and again the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern. The symbols 8R are separated from each other and returned to their original positions. Then, as shown in FIG. 112(J), a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a and moves in an arc toward the blue spherical variation icon 9C located below, and The display mode will conflict with the icon 9C.

Due to this collision, as shown in FIG. 112(K), the blue spherical variation icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(L), the dark space escape image THG3, which is the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the normal The background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (for example, an underground image). As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect C ends.

Thereafter, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started again. At this time, the colors of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R return to their original colors, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" except the number "7" are all changed. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all return to the same bright blue color. Note that the number "7" always remains bright red regardless of the presence or absence of the decorative pattern color change effect C.

After that, when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it becomes a jackpot and a jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts after that, whereas the left decoration If the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it will be a miss. When a jackpot or a loss is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern color change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of images can be displayed in the decorative pattern color change effect A shown in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B shown in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C shown in FIG. Equipped with an image display device 7 (display means), even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first symbols) having bright blue (first color) and bright blue (first color) Variable effects (fluctuating displays) using one or more of the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (secondary symbols), excluding the odd number "7", which have different bright green colors (secondary colors) Among them, a specific effect that allows the first and second patterns to be changed to dark blue (third color) similar to bright blue (first color) (decorative pattern color change effect A is shown in Figs. 110 (C) to (H) ), FIGS. 111(C) to (K) can be executed in decorative pattern color change performance B, and FIGS. 112(C) to (H)) can be performed in decorative pattern color change performance C. According to this configuration, in a specific production, the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed to dark blue (third color) similar to bright blue (first color), so that By changing the color, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the variation presentation (variation display) of the symbols. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change performance A shown in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B shown in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C shown in FIG. 112, the bright blue (first color) is , is the same color as the blue spherical variation icon 9C. The blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, and when it is off, it is a dark blue display mode, when it is on, it is a bright blue display mode, and it changes gradually from off to on. The light changes to a bright blue color, and gradually changes to a darker blue color as the light turns on and turns off. In other words, since the blue spherical fluctuating icon 9C is displayed in a blinking manner, the bright blue ( The color may be the same as the first color). According to this configuration, the blue spherical variation icon 9C blinks, and the blue spherical variation icon 9C blinks for the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" (first pattern). A display mode in which colors are partially linked can be used.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change performance A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in FIG. 112, the specific performance is different from the first symbol. As a predetermined combination with the second pattern, the left decorative pattern 8L is an odd number "5" (second pattern), and the right decorative pattern is an even number "4" (first pattern). ing. According to this configuration, since the start of the specific performance is a predetermined combination of the first symbol and the second symbol, the start time of the specific performance can be clearly communicated to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect C shown in FIG. ” (first pattern) can be changed again from dark blue (third color) to bright blue (first color). According to this configuration, when a reach is formed with the first symbol in a specific performance, the formation of the reach can be made more noticeable by changing the color, and the expectation of winning for the player is increased by changing the color. It can contribute to predicting the future.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change performance A shown in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B shown in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C shown in FIG. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) that were changed to (third color) are changed again to bright blue (first color), and dark blue (third color). It is now possible to change the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) to bright green (second color) again, except for the odd number "7" which was changed to There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the flow from the end of the specific performance to another performance without any discomfort due to the completion of the specific performance.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. , ``5'' and ``9'' (second pattern) have bright blue (first color), bright green (second color), dark blue (third color), and bright red (fourth color), which are different from each other. ), and in the specific performance, the odd number "7" (second pattern) having bright red (fourth color) is not changed to dark blue (third color). According to this configuration, the odd number "7" (second pattern) that does not change color can be used as the only symbol in a specific production, and the existence of the odd number "7" (second pattern) can be made more noticeable. This can contribute to making the player feel that the expectation level of winning will increase when the odd number "7" (second symbol) appears in the specific presentation.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the decorative pattern color change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
Decorative pattern color change performance A in FIG. 110, decorative pattern color change performance B in FIG. 111, and decorative pattern color change performance C in FIG. 112 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. Met. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A shown in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B shown in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C shown in FIG. 112, the various patterns are numerical patterns and no character images are provided. However, character images are provided only for the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern), and specific effects (decorative pattern color change effect A in FIGS. 110 (C) to (H), 111 (C) to (K) in decorative pattern color change effect B, and FIGS. 112 (C) to (H) in decorative pattern color change effect C), the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9'' (second pattern) may be deleted. In this way, in a specific performance, the color change occurs not in the character image, but in the numerical parts such as odd and even numbers, so by deleting the character image, it is easy to emphasize to the player that the color change in the numerical part occurs. can do. In addition, when providing a character image on the odd number "7" (second pattern), the character image provided on the odd number "7" (second pattern) is not deleted in the specific performance. As a result, it can be the only symbol with a character image in the specific production, making the existence of the odd number "7" (second pattern) more noticeable, and the odd number "7" (second pattern) in the specific production. ) appears, it can contribute to making the player feel that the expectation level of winning will increase.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. The hold icon 9A was displayed at the hold display position 9Ad, indicating a notice to start the decorative pattern color change performance. However, a notice may be given to start the decorative pattern color change effect when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the red spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad as a result of the look-ahead effect. . In this case, in the specific production, except for the odd number "7", the odd number "1","3","5" and "9" and even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" may be forcibly changed to dark blue, Since the red spherical pending icon 9A has a higher probability of winning than the blue spherical pending icon 9A, the odd numbers "1", "3", and "5" and "9" and even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" may be forcibly changed to bright red.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A shown in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B shown in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C shown in FIG. Odd numbers except ``2'', ``4'', ``6'' and ``8'' (first pattern) were changed to bright blue (first color) again, and odd number ``7'' was changed to dark blue (third color) "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbols) were changed to bright green (second color) again. However, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) that were changed to dark blue (third color) are not changed to bright blue (first color) and are changed to dark blue as they are. You may choose to keep the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) bright green, except for the odd number "7" which has been changed to dark blue (third color). It is also possible to maintain the dark blue color without changing it to the second color. In this way, it is possible to increase the variations of the performance after the end of the specific performance, and it is possible to provide the player with a variety of performances depending on the color of the symbols.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. ” (first pattern) is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5” and “9” (second pattern) except odd number “7” are changed from bright green to dark blue. It was forcibly changed to dark blue. However, in a specific production, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) are forcibly changed from bright blue to dark green, and the odd numbers "1" except the odd number "7" are changed. , "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) may be forcibly changed from bright green to dark green. Note that bright green and dark green are colors in the green family and are similar to each other.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A shown in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B shown in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C shown in FIG. '' right decorative pattern 8R) becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward and escapes from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and along with this, an opaque number pattern with a dark blue color (e.g. , the number "5" appears (as the right decorative pattern 8R) and is temporarily stopped. However, when the number pattern that was temporarily displayed (for example, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") becomes translucent and rapidly moves forward, the number pattern (for example, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") The right decorative pattern 8R) may be displayed in a display mode in which the size of the right decorative pattern 8R) gradually increases. In this way, the number symbols that were temporarily stopped and displayed become translucent and can rapidly move forward while increasing in size. It is possible to realize the expression of "coming" and to provide the player with a dynamic performance due to the high-speed movement of the numerical symbols.

[Modification 7]
In the specific effects of decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. 112, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are normal background images. The size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that were displayed on the screen was slightly larger than that shown in FIG. However, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R in the specific production may be the same as the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R that are normally displayed in the background image, or The sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R in the performance may be made one size smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R that are normally displayed in the background image.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed on the display screen 7a in the same bright blue color. This bright blue color is the same as the bright blue color that the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" have in the normal background image.

[Modification 9]
Decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. It may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Of the variable display using one or more of a first symbol having a first color and a second symbol having a second color different from the first color, the first symbol and the second symbol are different from the first color. It is possible to execute a specific effect that can be changed to a similar third color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C7-1,
The first color may be the same color as the color attached to the variable icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C7-1 or aspect C7-2,
The specific production starts from a predetermined combination of the first symbol and the second symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-3,
In the specific production, when forming a reach using the first symbol, the first symbol may be changed from the third color to the first color again.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-4,
A character image is provided only in the second pattern,
In the specific production, the character image provided in the second symbol is deleted;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-5,
When the specific performance is completed, the first symbol that has been changed to the third color is changed to the first color again, and the second symbol that has been changed to the third color is changed to the second color again. There is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-6,
The second design further includes a fourth color that is different from the first color, the second color, and the third color,
In the specific production, the second symbol having the fourth color is not changed to the third color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Special symbol effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 113 to 115. This special symbol presentation can be executed during the variation presentation of presentation symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special symbol production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Special pattern production A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining special symbol production A. Special symbol performance A is executed in a low-probability, low-base state in which the game progresses by left-handed hitting. Further, the special symbol performance A is executed using special performance symbols. Therefore, first, the special effect symbols will be explained.

The special effect design is composed of number images of "0 to 9", and the number images of "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" indicating odd numbers are replaced by "0, 2, 4, 6," indicating even numbers. The size is smaller than the number image of ``8''. Then, when the number image indicating an odd number is in a predetermined manner (double number) and a jackpot is announced, after the jackpot game is executed, a shift to a high-probability, high-base game state is confirmed.

First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed on the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), a left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L temporarily stops. The left effect pattern 8L changes from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, a state where the left production symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become non-displayed or translucently displayed almost at the same time as the temporary stop. In particular, among the numeric images of "0 to 9" constituting the left presentation pattern 8L, the numeric images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the numeric images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a right symbol movement effect is executed. The right symbol movement performance is a performance in which the right performance symbol 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as shown by arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moving near the center, and the symbol "2" is displayed below the symbol "3", and the symbol "4" is displayed above the symbol "3". In particular, among the numeric images of "0 to 9" constituting the right effect pattern 8R, the numeric images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the numeric images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, following the left presentation pattern 8L, the right presentation pattern 8R temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become invisible or semi-transparent almost at the same time as the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The medium symbol movement performance is a performance in which the medium design pattern 8C moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as shown by arrow Y. Here, the symbol "2" is moving near the center, and the symbol "1" is displayed below the symbol "2", and the symbol "3" is displayed above the symbol "2". In particular, among the number images "0 to 9" constituting the medium effect pattern 8C, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), a medium symbol inciting effect is executed. The middle symbol promotion effect is a production in which the medium effect symbol 8C moving in the direction of the arrow Y moves so as to stimulate whether or not it stops at "4" (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) in the normal reach. Here, the symbol "4" is moving near the center, and the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4".

[Special pattern production B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining special symbol production B. Special symbol presentation B is another example of special symbol presentation A.
First, as shown in FIG. 114(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9A and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 1st special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop performance is a performance in which the left design symbol 8L temporarily stops. The left effect pattern 8L changes from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, a state where the left production symbol 8L temporarily stops at "4" is shown. At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become invisible or semi-transparent almost at the same time as the temporary stop. In particular, among the numeric images of "0 to 9" constituting the left presentation pattern 8L, the numeric images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the numeric images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a right symbol movement effect is executed. The right symbol movement performance is a performance in which the right performance symbol 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as shown by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moving near the center, and the symbol "2" is displayed below the symbol "3", and the symbol "4" is displayed above the symbol "3". In particular, among the numeric images of "0 to 9" constituting the right effect pattern 8R, the numeric images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the numeric images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, following the left presentation pattern 8L, the right presentation pattern 8R temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become non-displayed or translucently displayed almost at the same time as the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The medium symbol movement performance is a performance in which the medium design 8C moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as shown by arrow Y. Here, the symbol "2" is moving near the center, and the symbol "1" is displayed below the symbol "2", and the symbol "3" is displayed above the symbol "2". In particular, among the number images "0 to 9" constituting the medium effect pattern 8C, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers. Further, the number images "0 to 9" constituting the middle effect pattern 8C are each smaller than the number images "0 to 9" forming the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), a medium symbol inciting effect is executed. The middle symbol promotion effect is a production in which the medium effect symbol 8C moving in the direction of the arrow Y moves so as to stimulate whether or not it stops at "4" (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) in the normal reach. Here, the symbol "4" is moving near the center, and the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4".

[Special design production C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol production C. The special symbol performance C is executed in a high-accuracy-high base state where the game progresses by hitting right. Further, the special symbol presentation C is executed using the normal presentation symbol. Therefore, first, the normal performance symbols will be explained.

The normal performance pattern is composed of number images "0 to 9", and all number images have the same size. Then, when the number image indicating an odd number is in a predetermined manner (double number) and a jackpot is announced, after the jackpot game is executed, the transition (continuation) to the high-certain high-base game state is confirmed.

First, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9B and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 2nd special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (loss), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing manner. Here, a situation is shown in which the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be "4", the middle performance symbol 8C is "1", and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be "5" and stopped. At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and three pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and the two hold images 9B and the variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop production (loss), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing manner. Here, a situation is shown in which the left performance symbol 8L is determined to be "0", the middle performance symbol 8C is "3", and the right performance symbol 8R is determined to be "6". At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and one hold image 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. At this time, one pending image 9B and the corresponding variable image 9C corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, it will be a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the special design effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at each of the number images of the left presentation pattern 8L, the number image of the right presentation pattern 8R, and the number image of the middle presentation pattern 8C, a specific number image is different from the remaining number image. (FIG. 113(B)(C)(D)(E)(F), FIG. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, variations in the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are produced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at each of the number images of the left presentation pattern 8L, the number image of the right presentation pattern 8R, and the number image of the middle presentation pattern 8C, the number image indicating an odd number indicates an even number. It is smaller than the numerical image (Fig. 113 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, variations in the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are produced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number image that determines the transition to the high-probability-high base state in the event of a jackpot is smaller than the remaining number images (Fig. 113 (B), (C)). D) (E) (F), Figure 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, variations in the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are produced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number images of "0 to 9" forming the middle effect pattern 8C are smaller than the number images of "0 to 9" forming the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. (Fig. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, further variation is produced by fluctuations of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there are cases where a variable display is performed using special effect symbols (FIGS. 113 and 114), and a case where a variable display is performed using normal effect symbols (FIG. 115). According to this configuration, further variation is produced by fluctuations of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the low-accuracy, low-base state (FIGS. 113 and 114), and normal effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the high-accuracy, high-base state (FIG. 115). According to this configuration, variations in the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed depending on the gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the special symbol presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the special effect design, the size of the number image representing an odd number is smaller than the size of the number image representing an even number. On the other hand, the size of the number image showing odd numbers may be larger than the size of the number image showing even numbers.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the special effect pattern, the number image that confirms the transition to the high-accuracy, high-base state in the event of a jackpot is smaller than the remaining number images. On the other hand, the number image that determines the transition to the high-probability-high base state in the event of a jackpot may be larger than the remaining number images.

[Modification 3]
In the above, it is assumed that the special symbol production C (FIG. 115) is executed in a high-accuracy, high-base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the special symbol performance C is executed in any one of the gaming states of a low probability low base state (normal gaming state), a high probability high base state (variable probability gaming state), and a low probability low base state (time saving gaming state), Furthermore, special symbol performance A (special symbol performance B) may be executed in any gaming state.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C8-1]
A gaming machine that notifies winning or losing results using the performance symbols by varying and stopping multiple rows of performance symbols,
The production pattern is composed of numerical images,
In each of the plurality of columns, a variable display is performed using a special effect pattern in which a specific number image among the number images is smaller than the remaining number images;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
The specific number image is a number image indicating an odd number, and the remaining number images are number images indicating an even number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
When announcing a win as the win/loss result, the specific number image is a number image that confirms a transition to a specific game state through a special game in which game balls can be obtained;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-3,
In a specific column among the plurality of columns, the size of the specific number image and the remaining number images are smaller than the remaining columns.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-4,
In each of the plurality of columns, when performing a variable display with the special effect pattern, and when performing a variable display with a normal effect pattern in which a specific number image and the remaining number images among the number images are of the same size. There are cases where
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-5,
In a first game state, a variable display is performed using the special performance symbols, and in a second game state, a variable display is performed using the normal performance symbols;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern visibility changing effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 116 to 118. 116 to 118, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. There are some things that have been omitted.

This decorative pattern visibility change performance is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a decorative pattern visibility change effect is included, the ROM 103 executes the corresponding command. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. The position of 14R and the light emission mode may be changed.

Here, first, the decorative pattern visibility changing performance A will be explained, followed by the decorative pattern visibility changing performance B, and then the decorative pattern visibility changing performance C.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect A]
The decorative pattern visibility changing effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern visibility changing effect A. The decorative pattern visibility changing performance A is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) by a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable display manner (variable display) in which the reels are rotated. ) is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position 9Cd are referred to as the fluctuation display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the pending display area is referred to as the variable and pending display area THA. The variation and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the pending display area are transparent areas, so that the background image at the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the pending display area. Note that when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image at the rear cannot be viewed through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable display area. When displayed, the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C. Furthermore, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image at the rear cannot be viewed through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, , the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The fluctuation region 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the fluctuation and pending display area THA in front and behind, and It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. is not displayed (that is, if there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not yet been used in the game), the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L is visually recognized through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the pending icons 9A.

The variation region 8Cr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuated (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the variation and pending display area THA at the front and back. It is located behind the THA. Thereby, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. is displayed, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. Note that when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable display area When the variable icon 9C is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C.

A variable area 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed) does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA in the front and back directions. Thereby, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the fluctuation and the pending display area THA.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 116(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (2 A smooth curved line with an arch shape connecting from the center right of the bottom edge (the position from the left side of the bottom edge of the display screen 7a that corresponds to two-thirds of the distance dimension of the bottom edge of the display screen 7a) A mini-character presentation area MHG surrounded by a curved line (an arc), the left side of the display screen 7a, and the lower side of the display screen 7a appears on the display screen 7a. In the mini-character performance area MHG, various mini-characters appear and performances by the mini-characters are performed.

This mini-character presentation area MHG includes a variable area 8Lr where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner (variable display), a variable area 8Cr where the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a variable area 8Cr where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). There is an area that overlaps in the front and back with the fluctuation area 8Rr that is displayed (variation display), and there is an area that is placed in front of these fluctuation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr, and that overlaps in the front and back with the fluctuation and pending display area THA, and It is arranged on the rear side of the fluctuation and hold display area THA. That is, the mini-character presentation area MHG is arranged between the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr and the variation and pending display area THA.

A colored opaque background image is provided in the mini-character presentation area MHG. Therefore, when the mini-character presentation area MHG appears, the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps with the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R and the mini-character presentation area MHG. , the variable effects (fluctuating displays) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized through the mini character presentation area MHG. On the other hand, since the fluctuation and hold display area THA is arranged in front of the mini-character presentation area MHG, even if the mini-character presentation area MHG appears, the visibility is obstructed by the mini-character presentation area MHG. Never. In this way, the fluctuation and hold display area THA is arranged so as to overlap the fluctuation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R and the mini-character presentation area MHG. , in the fluctuation and suspension display area THA, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the suspension display position 9Ad, the fluctuation icon 9C, and the suspension icon 9A are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the mini-character production area MHG. This prevents it from becoming difficult to see.

Although the mini-characters that appear in the mini-character presentation area MHG are placed in the front of the mini-character presentation area MHG, they are placed in the rear of the variation and hold display area THA. Even if a mini-character appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, visibility is not obstructed by the mini-character.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green color, and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues. has been done. At the position of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed, the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini-character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. Therefore, the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered and visible by the mini-character presentation area MHG placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. I can't.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(D), a colored and opaque ally character CRA appears as a mini-character in the mini-character presentation area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon using the sword of the ally character CRA at a predetermined timing. Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. Note that the white spherical variable icon 9C may not change to another icon due to the sword of the ally character CRA, and the change of the variable icon 9C may fail.

When the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini-character presentation area MHG and moves into the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may be displayed across the display screen 7a. For example, in FIG. 116(D), when the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA is not covered by the mini-character presentation area MHG among the left decorative symbols 8L temporarily stopped. The part will be covered. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed across the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the mini-character presentation area MHG, the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L is covered by the mini-character presentation area MHG. The exposed portion overlaps with the ally character CRA and cannot be visually recognized. Furthermore, as the ally character CRA moves around, the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the mini-character production area MHG, which is displayed as a temporary stop, becomes in a state where the ally character CRA does not overlap, and the ally character CRA is displayed as a temporary stop. The exposed portion of the left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the mini-character presentation area MHG can be viewed without being obstructed by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "1", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a reach is formed. Ru. The position of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed is not covered by the mini-character production area MHG that is placed in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, so the entire right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily displayed is not visible. Can be done. Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around the mini-character presentation area MHG, and the upper body of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini-character presentation area MHG to the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. , 8Cr, and 8Rr may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "1", but is temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "9", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When the reach is not formed, the mini-character production area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and after that, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. may not stop and display the same pattern, resulting in a miss.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "1", but is temporarily stopped and displayed at, for example, the bright green number "9", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. If the reach is not formed, the ally character CRA, which moves around the mini-character presentation area MHG, jumps over the mini-character presentation area MHG and moves between the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decoration). When straddling the variable area 8Cr of the symbol 8C), send out the number "9" below the variable area 8Rr with the sword of the ally character CRA, pull in the number "1" from above the variable area 8Rr, display a temporary stop, and reach. After forming the ally character CRA, the ally character CRA may return to the mini-character presentation area MHG again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116(F), when the mini-character presentation area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable presentation (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues. Ru. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility changing effect A ends. In addition, when the decorative pattern visibility change effect A is being performed, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed while the mini character presentation area MHG is displayed, Of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C) part) is covered by the mini-character presentation area MHG and cannot be visually recognized.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(G), when the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (it may be displayed blinking), the left decorative pattern 8L , the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, then, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped displaying at the bright red number "1", are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed, and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 116(G), both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 116(F) were temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "1". On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 116(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both the same color as the number "7" in FIG. 116(H). The number is changed to a bright red number "1" and displayed as a temporary stop. As a result, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (in other words, the color change of the decorative pattern), you can win the jackpot. Expectations are rising. Note that when a reach is formed by the bright red number "7", the expectation of a jackpot is set in advance to be higher than when a reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 116(H), the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern ) to suggest one of five levels of expectation for a jackpot (for example, an image that suggests an expectation of a jackpot as 3.5 out of five by arranging five face images of the ally character CRA). One face image is yellow, half the face images are yellow, half the face images are black, and the remaining face image is black.) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it becomes a jackpot and then a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started, but if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and are not stopped and displayed, it will be a miss.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect B]
Next, decorative pattern visibility change effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern visibility changing effect B. Decorative pattern visibility change performance B is performed during variable performance (during variable display) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable display manner in which the reels are rotated. ) is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves in small increments in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position 9Cd are referred to as the fluctuation display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the pending display area is referred to as the variable and pending display area THA. The variation and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the pending display area are transparent areas, so that the background image at the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the pending display area. Note that when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image at the rear cannot be viewed through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable display area. When displayed, the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C. Furthermore, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image at the rear cannot be viewed through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, , the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The fluctuation region 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the fluctuation and pending display area THA in front and behind, and It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. is not displayed (that is, if there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not yet been used in the game), the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L is visually recognized through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the pending icons 9A.

The variation region 8Cr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuated (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the variation and pending display area THA at the front and back. It is located behind the THA. Thereby, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. is displayed, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. Note that when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable display area When the variable icon 9C is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C.

A variable area 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed) does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA in the front and back directions. Thereby, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the fluctuation and the pending display area THA.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 117(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (2 A smooth curve with a gentle concave shape connecting the center of the right side of the display screen (a position corresponding to 1/2 of the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) and the display screen 7a A mini-character production area MHG surrounded by the left side of , the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the display screen 7a appears on the display screen 7a. In the mini-character performance area MHG, various mini-characters appear and performances by the mini-characters are performed.

This mini-character presentation area MHG includes a variable area 8Lr where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner (variable display), a variable area 8Cr where the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a variable area 8Cr where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). There is an area that overlaps in the front and back with the fluctuation area 8Rr that is displayed (variation display), and there is an area that is placed in front of these fluctuation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr, and that overlaps with the fluctuation and pending display area THA in the front and back, and It is arranged on the rear side of the fluctuation and hold display area THA. That is, the mini-character presentation area MHG is arranged between the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr and the variation and pending display area THA.

A colored opaque background image is provided in the mini-character presentation area MHG. Therefore, when the mini-character presentation area MHG appears, the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps with the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R and the mini-character presentation area MHG. , the variable effects (fluctuating displays) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized through the mini character presentation area MHG. On the other hand, since the fluctuation and hold display area THA is arranged in front of the mini-character presentation area MHG, even if the mini-character presentation area MHG appears, the visibility is obstructed by the mini-character presentation area MHG. Never. In this way, the fluctuation and hold display area THA is arranged so as to overlap the fluctuation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R and the mini-character presentation area MHG. , in the fluctuation and suspension display area THA, the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the suspension display position 9Ad, the fluctuation icon 9C, and the suspension icon 9A are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the mini-character production area MHG. This prevents it from becoming difficult to see.

Although the mini-characters that appear in the mini-character presentation area MHG are placed in the front of the mini-character presentation area MHG, they are placed in the rear of the variation and hold display area THA. Even if a mini-character appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, visibility is not obstructed by the mini-character.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1", and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues. has been done. At the position of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed, the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini-character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. Therefore, the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered and visible by the mini-character presentation area MHG placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. I can't.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a colored and opaque ally character CRA appears as a mini-character in the mini-character presentation area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the ally character CRA's sword at a predetermined timing. Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. Note that the white spherical variable icon 9C may not change to another icon due to the sword of the ally character CRA, and the change of the variable icon 9C may fail.

When the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini-character presentation area MHG and moves into the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It may be displayed across the display screen 7a. For example, in FIG. 117(D), when the ally character CRA appears in the mini-character presentation area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA is not covered by the mini-character presentation area MHG among the left decorative symbols 8L temporarily stopped and displayed. The part will be covered. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed across the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the mini-character presentation area MHG, the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L is covered by the mini-character presentation area MHG. The exposed portion overlaps with the ally character CRA and cannot be visually recognized. Furthermore, as the ally character CRA moves around, the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the mini-character production area MHG, which is displayed as a temporary stop, becomes in a state where the ally character CRA does not overlap, and the ally character CRA is displayed as a temporary stop. The exposed portion of the left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the mini-character presentation area MHG can be viewed without being obstructed by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a reach is formed. Ru. At the position of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed, the lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R (a part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered by the mini-character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R. Therefore, the lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed (a part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered and visible by the mini-character presentation area MHG placed in front of the right decorative pattern 8R. I can't. At this point as well, the ally character CRA moves around the mini-character presentation area MHG, and the upper body of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini-character presentation area MHG in the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. , 8Cr, and 8Rr may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "1", but is temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "9", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When the reach is not formed, the mini-character production area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and after that, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. may not stop and display the same pattern, resulting in a miss.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "1", but is temporarily stopped and displayed at, for example, the bright green number "9", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. If the reach is not formed, the ally character CRA, which moves around the mini-character presentation area MHG, jumps over the mini-character presentation area MHG and moves between the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decoration). When straddling the variable area 8Cr of the symbol 8C), send out the number "9" below the variable area 8Rr with the sword of the ally character CRA, pull in the number "1" from above the variable area 8Rr, display a temporary stop, and reach. After forming the ally character CRA, the ally character CRA may return to the mini-character presentation area MHG again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117(F), when the mini-character presentation area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable presentation (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues. Ru. As a result, decorative pattern visibility changing performance B ends. In addition, when the decorative pattern visibility change effect B is being performed, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed while the mini character presentation area MHG is displayed, The lower portions of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R) are mini-character production areas. It is covered with MHG and cannot be seen.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(G), when the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (it may be displayed blinking), the left decorative pattern 8L , the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 117(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped displaying at the number "1" in bright red, are displayed on the display screen 7a. is displayed, and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 117(F) were temporarily stopped and displayed as the bright green number "1". On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both the same color as the number "7" in FIG. 117(H). The number is changed to a bright red number "1" and a temporary stop is displayed. As a result, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (in other words, the color change of the decorative pattern), you can win the jackpot. Expectations are rising. Note that when a reach is formed by the bright red number "7", the expectation of a jackpot is set in advance to be higher than when a reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 117(H), the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern ) to suggest one of five levels of expectation for a jackpot (for example, an image that suggests an expectation of a jackpot as 3.5 out of five by arranging five face images of the ally character CRA). One face image is yellow, half the face images are yellow, half the face images are black, and the remaining face image is black.) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it becomes a jackpot and then a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started, but if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and are not stopped and displayed, it will be a miss.

[Decorative pattern visibility change production C]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility changing effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern visibility changing effect C. The decorative pattern visibility change performance C is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) by a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable display manner in which the reels are rotated. ) is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). The fluctuation icon 9C and the fluctuation display position 9Cd are referred to as the fluctuation display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, in the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the pending display area is referred to as the variable and pending display area THA. The variation and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the pending display area are transparent areas, and the background image at the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the pending display area. Note that when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image at the rear cannot be viewed through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable display area. When displayed, the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C. Furthermore, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image at the rear cannot be viewed through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, , the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The fluctuation region 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated (variably displayed) has an area that overlaps with the fluctuation and pending display area THA in front and behind, and It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. is not displayed (that is, if there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not yet been used in the game), the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L is visually recognized through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of pending icons 9A are displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the pending icons 9A.

The fluctuation area 8Cr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuated (fluctuatingly displayed) has an area that overlaps with the fluctuation and pending display area THA in the front and back, It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. is displayed, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. Note that when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable display area When the variable icon 9C is displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variable icon 9C.

A variable area 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed) does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA in the front and rear directions. Thereby, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the fluctuation and the pending display area THA.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 118(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (2 A left side movable accessory image KGL that imitates the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 from a position corresponding to 1/300 mm) toward the right side of the front screen 7a corresponds to the operation area of the left side movable accessory 14L. It appears so as to cover the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is modeled from the center of the right side of the display screen 7a (a position corresponding to one half of the distance dimension of the right side of the display screen 7a) toward the left side of the front screen 7a. The right side movable accessory image KGR appears so as to cover the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R so as to correspond to the operation area of the right side movable accessory 14R. When the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR appear in a state where they are separated from each other, an effect of lightning running is performed in the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR.

The left side movable accessory image KGL has an area that overlaps the variable area 8Lr in which the left decorative pattern 8L is variablely produced (variably displayed), is placed in front of the variable area 8Lr, and is located in the variable and pending display area. It is arranged so as not to overlap with the THA in front and behind. In addition, the right side movable accessory image KGR has an area that overlaps the variable area 8Rr in which the right decorative pattern 8R is variablely produced (variably displayed), is placed in front of the variable area 8Rr, and is arranged in front of the variable area 8Rr, It is arranged so as not to overlap with the display area THA in front and behind.

The left side movable accessory image KGL imitates the left side movable accessory 14L, and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the left side movable accessory image KGL appears, the left side movable symbol 8L's variable performance (variable display) is changed to It becomes impossible to visually recognize the object through the object image KGL. Moreover, the right side movable accessory image KGR imitates the right side movable accessory 14R, and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the right side movable accessory image KGR appears, the right side movable symbol 8R's variable performance (variable display) is changed to It becomes impossible to visually recognize the object image KGR.

Note that the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR appear separated from each other, and although the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR have a running lightning effect, the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR Since the accessory image KGL and the right-side movable accessory image KGR are arranged so as not to overlap with the fluctuation and hold display area THA in front and behind, the lightning bolt also does not overlap with the fluctuation and hold display area THA in front and behind, In the hold display area THA, even if the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR appear spaced apart from each other and a running lightning bolt is performed, visibility will not be obstructed by the lightning bolt. do not have.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having bright green color, and the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues. has been done. At the position of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed, the left side part of the left decorative pattern 8L (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the left side movable accessory image KGL arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. Therefore, the left side portion of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered and visible by the left movable accessory image KGL placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. I can't.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(D), when the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR appear separated from each other, the ring-shaped decorative part of the left side movable accessory image KGL is The area between the left side decorative part, which is half, and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part of the right movable accessory image KGR (that is, the area extending from the top to the bottom of the left side decorative part, and the right side decorative part) (from the upper side to the lower side). When the lightning bolt SND runs, the variable icon 9C can change to another icon at a predetermined timing under the influence of the lightning bolt SND. Here, under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, the white spherical variation icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the variation icon 9C is successful. Note that even under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, the white spherical variable icon 9C may not change to another icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C may fail.

When the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR appear separated from each other and a lightning bolt SND runs, the lightning bolt SND crosses the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR and becomes the left decorative pattern. 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed on the display screen 7a across the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr. For example, in FIG. 118(D), when the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR appear separated from each other and a lightning bolt SND runs, the left side movable accessory image KGL appears on the left side where the left side movable accessory image KGL is temporarily stopped. The part of the decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the left side movable accessory image KGL is covered. In other words, when the lightning bolt SND is displayed across the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the left side movable accessory image KGL, the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L is covered by the left side movable accessory image KGL. The exposed portion overlaps with the lightning bolt SND and cannot be visually recognized. In addition, by running the lightning bolt SND appropriately in the range from the upper side to the lower side of the semicircular part of the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR, the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed becomes the left side movable accessory image. The exposed part that is not covered by the object image KGL and the lightning bolt SND do not overlap, and the left decorative pattern 8L, which is displayed temporarily, blocks the exposed part that is not covered by the left movable accessory image KGL from the lightning bolt SND. It can be visually recognized without being affected (see FIG. 118(E)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a reach is formed. Ru. At the position of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed, the right side part of the right decorative pattern 8R (part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered by the right movable accessory image KGR placed in front of the right decorative pattern 8R. Therefore, the right side part of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed (part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered and visible by the right movable accessory image KGR placed in front of the right decorative pattern 8R. I can't. At this point, the lightning bolt SND runs appropriately in the range from the upper side to the lower side of the semicircular part of the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR, so that the lightning bolt SND moves to the left side movable accessory image KGL. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the right side movable accessory image KGR and across the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "1", but is temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "9", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When the reach is not formed, the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and after that, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be stopped and displayed as the same pattern and may be out of alignment.

In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the bright green number "1", but is temporarily stopped and displayed at, for example, the bright green number "9", and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. When the reach is not formed, the lightning bolt SND that runs appropriately in the range from the upper side to the lower side of the semicircular part of the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR changes to the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R. The lightning bolt SND may subside after the number "9" is sent out below the variable area 8Rr and the number "1" is pulled in from above the variable area 8Rr and temporarily stopped and displayed to form a reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118(F), when the lightning bolt SND subsides, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C will continue. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility changing performance C ends. In addition, when the decorative pattern visibility change production C is performed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR displayed. When is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left part of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L and the right part of the right decorative pattern 8R (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R) become the left side movable combination. While it is covered by the object image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR and cannot be seen, the middle decorative pattern 8C is not covered by the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR and is visible. be able to.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(G), at the center of the display screen 7a, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are moved to the front (front) center center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (in a direction approaching each other) from the home position, and is attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a. The left side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part, and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left side movable accessory 14L. The left side decorative part of the right side decorative part and the right side decorative part of the right side movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). An ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In this direction, the left side movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right side movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped at the bright red number "1", are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. (Fluctuating display) continues.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 118(G), both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 118(F) were temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "1". On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 118(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both the same color as the number "7" in FIG. 118(H). The number is changed to a bright red number "1" and displayed as a temporary stop. As a result, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (in other words, the color change of the decorative pattern), you can win the jackpot. Expectations are rising. Note that when a reach is formed by the bright red number "7", the expectation level of a jackpot is set in advance to be higher than when a reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 118(H), the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern ) to suggest one of five levels of expectation for a jackpot (for example, an image that suggests the expectation of a jackpot as 3.5 out of five levels by arranging five face images of the ally character CRA) is 3. One face image is yellow, half the face images are yellow, half the face images are black, and the remaining face image is black.) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it becomes a jackpot and then a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started, but if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and are not stopped and displayed, it will be a miss.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern visibility change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A shown in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B shown in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C shown in FIG. 118, a plurality of types of images are displayed. It is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a specific image (decorative pattern visible) so as to overlap a part of the variable area 8Lr (first area) in which the left decorative pattern 8L (design image) is displayed in a variable manner. A second area that can display the ally character CRA, which is a mini-character, in the gender change performances A and B, and the lightning bolt SND in the decorative symbol visibility change performance C; In the decorative pattern visibility change production C, the left movable accessory image KGL) is placed in front of the variable area 8Lr (first area), and a part of the left decorative pattern 8L (design image) is provided in the second area. 116(C) in decorative pattern visibility changing effect A, FIG. 117(C) in decorative pattern visibility changing effect B, and FIG. 118(C) in decorative pattern visibility changing effect C. )) can now be executed. According to this configuration, the second area is placed in front of the variable area 8Lr (first area) so as to overlap a part of the variable area 8Lr (first area) of the left decorative pattern 8L (design image). Since the left decorative pattern 8L (symbol image) is partially located in the second area, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L (symbol image) can be made difficult to see, and the entire image of the left decorative pattern 8L (symbol image) can be seen by the player himself. You can imagine it. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a variable performance (variable display) using an unprecedented and novel symbol image. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A shown in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B shown in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C shown in FIG. 118, Furthermore, the variation and pending display area THA is capable of displaying the variation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A so as to overlap a part of the variable area 8Lr (first area) and a part of the second area of the left decorative pattern 8L. (Third area) is arranged in front of the second area so that the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are not difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L (design image) and the specific image. . The fluctuation icon 9C may be used as a notice (“change performance” that changes the display mode) for the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display), and the pending icon 9A has not been actually used in the game yet. In some situations, it may be used as a performance that suggests future performance by looking ahead. This makes it possible to prevent the symbol images and specific images from obstructing the visibility of the variable icons 9C and pending icons 9A when the symbol images are being displayed in a variable manner. This can contribute to making it difficult to overlook changes in the variable icon 9C and changes in the pending icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A shown in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B shown in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C shown in FIG. 118, A specific image (in decorative pattern visibility change effects A and B, the mini character ally character CRA, decorative pattern visibility change When a lightning bolt (SND) is displayed in production C, other parts (decorative pattern visibility change production A, FIG. 116(D) and decorative pattern visibility In FIG. 117(D) of change production B, the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed overlaps with the ally character CRA, and in FIG. 118(D) of decorative symbol visibility change production C, the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps with the lightning bolt SND. part) is difficult to see. According to this configuration, a part of the pattern image is made difficult to see by the second area, and further, other parts different from the part can also be made difficult to see by the specific image, which is unprecedented. It is possible to provide the player with a fluctuating performance (fluctuation display) using more novel symbol images.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A shown in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B shown in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C shown in FIG. 118, The second area disappears from the display screen 7a, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L (design image) becomes easily visible. According to this configuration, since a part of the symbol image is difficult to see due to the second area, the player can imagine the entire image of the symbol image, and furthermore, the second area disappears from the display screen 7a. By doing so, the user can check the answer with what he or she has imagined, and this can contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuating display of symbol images.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effects in the decorative pattern visibility changing effect A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility changing effect B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility changing effect C in FIG. 118 are as follows. This can be executed after the variable display of symbol images starts and before the temporary stop display is started. According to this configuration, before the symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is possible to make a part of the symbol image difficult to see by the second area, and therefore it is possible to change the fluctuating display by the symbol image. This can contribute to making it difficult for the variable display of symbol images to become monotonous.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the variable icon 9C in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C in FIG. When a specific image (mini character ally character CRA in decorative pattern visibility change effects A and B, lightning bolt SND in decorative pattern visibility change effect C) is displayed, it can change to one with a high expectation of winning. It looks like this. According to this configuration, the variable icon 9C can be used as a notice (a "change effect" that changes the display mode) for a variable effect (during a variable display). Furthermore, when a specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the expectation level of winning may change, so even if the specific image is only displayed on the display screen 7a, the expectation level of the player is increased. can be granted to

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first performance in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in FIG. , a second effect (decorative pattern visual recognition) that increases the expectation of winning by changing the color of the pattern image to another color (for example, changing the color of the number "1" from the normal color (bright green) to bright red) 116 (H) can be executed in the gender change effect A, FIG. 117 (H) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect B, and FIG. 118 (H) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C. . According to this configuration, after the first performance ends, there is a possibility that the second performance in which the color of the symbol image is changed is executed, so when the first performance is started, the player can: While enjoying the first performance, the user can also look forward to the second performance, which has not yet been performed but may be performed in the future.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern visibility change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern visibility change performance A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in FIG. It was to be done. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In decorative pattern visibility change performance A shown in FIGS. 116(E) and (F) and decorative pattern visibility change performance B shown in FIGS. 117(E) and (F), when a reach is formed, the mini character performance area MHG is It had disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the mini-character presentation area MHG may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C shown in FIGS. 118(E) and 118(F), when the reach is formed, the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a. However, the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. In this way, the timing of the temporary stop display of the right decorative symbol 8R can be suggested to the player.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern visibility change performance A shown in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B shown in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C shown in FIG. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R was temporarily stopped and displayed as a number "1" having a bright green color, and a reach was formed by the odd numbered decorative patterns (design images). However, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2" having a bright blue color, and then the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2" having a bright blue color. A reach may be formed by a decorative pattern (design image).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern visibility change production C shown in FIGS. 118(B) to (E), the left side movable accessory image KGL imitating the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 covers the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, a right side movable accessory image KGR imitating the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 appeared so as to cover the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, the left side movable accessory image KGL may be replaced with the left side movable accessory 14L, and the right side movable accessory image KGR may be replaced with the right side movable accessory 14R. By covering a part of the left decorative pattern 8L with the left side movable accessory 14L, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L can be made difficult to see, and by covering a part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the right side movable accessory 14R. Since a part of the right decorative pattern 8R can be made difficult to see, the player can imagine the entire image of the left decorative pattern 8L and the entire right decorative pattern 8R. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a variable performance (variable display) using an unprecedented and novel symbol image. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

Further, the left side movable accessory image KGL is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to correspond to the operating area of the left side movable accessory 14L, and the right side movable accessory image KGR is displayed to correspond to the operating area of the right side movable accessory 14R. Since the left side movable accessory image KGL and the right side movable accessory image KGR do not overlap with the fluctuation and hold display area THA in front and back, the left side movable accessory image KGL is displayed on the screen 7a. Even if the left side movable accessory 14L is used instead of KGL and the right side movable accessory 14R is used instead of the right side movable accessory image KGR, in the first place, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are the same as the fluctuation and reservation display area THA. There is no overlap between the front and back. That is, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R do not cover the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the reservation display position 9Ad, the fluctuation icon 9C, and the reservation icon 9A in the fluctuation and reservation display area THA.

[Modification 5]
The decorative pattern visibility change performance A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C9-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A second area capable of displaying a specific image is provided in front of the first area so as to overlap a part of the first area in which a variable display of the pattern image is performed, and a part of the pattern image is provided. It is possible to execute a first effect in which the second area makes it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C9-1,
In the first effect, a third area in which the variable icon and the hold icon can be displayed overlaps with a part of the first area and a part of the second area, which is further arranged in the second area. is arranged in front of the icon, and the variable icon and the pending icon are not difficult to see due to the pattern image and the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C9-1 or aspect C9-2,
In the first effect, when the specific image is displayed across the first area and the second area, another part of the pattern image that is different from a part of the pattern image is visually recognized by the specific image. It may be difficult
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C9-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-3,
In the first effect, the second area may disappear and the entire pattern image may become easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-4,
The first performance can be performed after the variable display of the symbol image starts and before the temporary stop display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C9-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-5,
The variation icon can change to one with a high expectation of winning when the specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-6,
After the first performance, it is possible to perform a second performance that increases the expectation of winning by changing the color of the symbol image to another color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol rotation stop display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 119 to 121. 119 to 121, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. It has since been omitted.

This decorative symbol rotation stop display performance is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a decorative symbol rotation stop display effect is included, the ROM 103 executes the corresponding command. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A will be explained, the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance C will be explained in order.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A. The decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 119(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each variable area extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. . It should be noted that the medium decorative pattern 8C includes a special pattern in addition to the number pattern. This special design is composed only of character designs.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Odd-numbered designs are composed of various character designs (all different character designs) with multiple colors (full colors), while even-numbered designs have no character designs attached at all. It has not been. The character designs attached to odd-numbered designs are displayed in a large size, with the character design being the main character. Therefore, the odd numbered symbols are smaller in size than the size of the character symbol attached to the odd numbered symbols. On the other hand, since the even-numbered symbols do not have character designs attached to them, the even-numbered symbols themselves are displayed in a large size. Therefore, the even-numbered symbols have the same size as the character symbols attached to the odd-numbered symbols. The special design is a design of a character in the form of a wingman, and has multiple colors (full colors). The special design consists only of the character design in wingman form, and the size of the special design is about the same size or larger than the size of the character design attached to the odd numbered design. ing.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side, and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 119(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is bright green with the character design 8Cb added to the bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca. The right decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having bright blue color, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the right decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern changes again as shown in FIG. 119(B). The effect (fluctuating display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A is started.

Thereafter, the left decorative pattern 8L during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(C), the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the left decorative pattern 8L to At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, a character pattern 8Lb appears attached to a bright green number "1" pattern 8La. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing forward and is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). In addition, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has eyes that are glowing yellow, but does not face forward and is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, making it look like a silhouette. It is displayed in a fluctuating manner (fluctuating display) with a silhouette like this. At this time, the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues.

In the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in FIG. 119(D), the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing the front, and the character pattern 8Lb faces from the front right to the front. When the character slowly changes its posture and the character pattern 8Lb faces forward, it changes from a silhouette-like silhouette to full color, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb facing forward.

Subsequently, the right decorative pattern 8R during the fluctuating performance (fluctuation display) changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(E), the right decorative pattern 8R At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, a bright blue number "2" symbol 8Ra appears without any character attached. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra does not face forward, but tilts to the front left when viewed from the number "2" pattern 8Ra. It is in the same state as it is and is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). At this time, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues.

As shown in FIG. 119(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes its posture so that the bright blue number "2" design 8Ra faces from the front left to the front, and the bright blue number "2" slowly changes its posture. When the ``2'' pattern 8Ra faces the front, the entire right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra facing forward.

Subsequently, the medium decorative pattern 8C during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(G), the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from the medium decorative pattern 8C At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the fluctuation area of , a character pattern 8Cb appears attached to a bright red numeral ``7'' pattern 8Ca. When the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward and is displayed in a variable manner (fluctuating display). In addition, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca has yellow eyes, but does not face forward and is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, making it look like a silhouette. The silhouette is displayed in a fluctuating manner (fluctuating display).

In the medium decorative pattern 8C, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing the front, and the character pattern 8Cb faces from the front right to the front. When the character pattern 8Cb slowly changes its posture and faces forward, it changes from a shadow-like silhouette to full color, and the entire medium decorative pattern 8C moves slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb facing forward. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A ends.

Thereafter, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and are removed. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8La slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front when viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, and in the middle decorative pattern 8C. The character pattern 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8Ca slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, whereas the even-numbered pattern in the right decorative pattern 8R 8Ra slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the front left to the front when viewed from the even numbered pattern 8Ra. In other words, if a character design exists in the decorative design, the character design rotates, and if there is no character design in the decorative design, the number design rotates, and the objects to be rotated are different. It looks like this. Furthermore, the direction in which the character design rotates when the character design exists in the decorative design and the direction in which the number design rotates when the character design does not exist in the decorative design are completely opposite to each other. It has become.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B]
Next, decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B will be explained with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B. Decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each variable region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. . It should be noted that the medium decorative pattern 8C includes a special pattern in addition to the number pattern. This special design is composed only of character designs.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Odd-numbered designs are composed of various character designs (all different character designs) with multiple colors (full colors), while even-numbered designs have no character designs attached at all. It has not been. The character designs attached to odd-numbered designs are displayed in a large size, with the character design being the main character. Therefore, the odd numbered symbols are smaller in size than the size of the character symbol attached to the odd numbered symbols. On the other hand, since the even-numbered symbols do not have character designs attached to them, the even-numbered symbols themselves are displayed in a large size. Therefore, the even-numbered symbols have the same size as the character symbols attached to the odd-numbered symbols. The special design is a design of a character in the form of a wingman, and has multiple colors (full colors). The special design consists only of the character design in wingman form, and the size of the special design is about the same size or larger than the size of the character design attached to the odd numbered design. ing.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves in small increments in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 120(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is bright green, and the character pattern 8Cb is added to the bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca. The right decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having bright blue color, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the right decorative pattern 8C is stopped. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern changes again as shown in FIG. 120(B). The effect (fluctuating display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B is started.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(C), the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the left decorative pattern 8L to At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, a character pattern 8Lb appears attached to a bright green number "1" pattern 8La. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing forward and is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). In addition, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has eyes that are glowing yellow, but does not face forward and is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, making it look like a silhouette. The silhouette is displayed in a fluctuating manner (fluctuating display). At this time, the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues.

In the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in FIG. 120(D), the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing the front, and the character pattern 8Lb faces from the front right to the front. When the character slowly changes its posture and the character pattern 8Lb faces forward, it changes from a silhouette-like silhouette to full color, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb facing forward.

Subsequently, the right decorative pattern 8R during the fluctuating performance (fluctuation display) changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(E), the right decorative pattern 8R At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, a bright blue number "2" symbol 8Ra appears without any character attached. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra does not face forward, but tilts to the front left when viewed from the number "2" pattern 8Ra. The state remains as it is and is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). At this time, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues.

As shown in FIG. 120(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes its posture so that the pattern 8Ra of the bright blue number "2" faces from the front left to the front, and the right decorative pattern 8R has the bright blue number "2" facing forward. When the ``2'' pattern 8Ra faces the front, the entire right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra facing forward.

Subsequently, the medium decorative pattern 8C during the fluctuating performance (fluctuation display) changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(G), the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from the medium decorative pattern 8C A pattern 8Cb of a winged character appears at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area. When the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the pattern 8Cb of the winged character is displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed) in a state in which all the characters have a silver color.

Then, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 120(H), the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes larger while emitting a flash FH, and a pattern of a winged character with a silver color appears. 8Cb changes to another color (full color), and the color of the eyes also changes from silver to yellow. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C remain displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are displayed with the flash FH placed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, it is not covered by the flash FH, so that the visibility of the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C is not obstructed. Note that when the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and a flashing light FH is placed and displayed behind the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A does not disappear from the display screen 7a. 9A is not covered by the flash FH, and the visibility of the pending icon 9A is not obstructed.

After that, when the flash FH is emitted, as shown in FIG. 120 (I) (the flash FH is omitted in the figure), the image of the character in the winged form in the enlarged medium decorative pattern 8C 8Cb jumps forward from the medium decorative pattern 8C, is displayed even larger, and a moving image of the pattern 8Cb of the winged character is performed. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B ends.

In addition, in FIG. 120(I), if the pattern 8Cb of the character in winged form in the medium decoration pattern 8C does not jump forward from the medium decoration pattern 8C, the medium decoration pattern 8C moves below its own fluctuation area. Then, a character pattern 8Cb appears from above on a bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca. When the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward and is displayed in a variable manner (fluctuating display). In addition, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca has eyes that are glowing yellow, but does not face forward and is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, making it look like a silhouette. It is displayed in a fluctuating manner (fluctuating display) with a silhouette like this. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C slowly changes its posture so that the character pattern 8Cb faces from the right front to the front while the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca remains facing the front. When the pattern 8Cb faces the front, the silhouette changes from a shadow-like silhouette to full color, and the entire medium decorative pattern 8C moves slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb facing forward. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B ends. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, and are out of alignment. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 120(J), a battle performance is started. The battle performance is a performance in which two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and it is a performance with high expectations for a jackpot. In the battle performance, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. Of course, if the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A also disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot and then a jackpot game (jackpot effect). On the other hand, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern and become out of place. When the battle performance ends and the jackpot or loss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Note that if the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A is also displayed on the display screen 7a again.

In this way, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the special pattern 8Cb of the character in winged form remains facing forward and does not change its posture, but in the left decorative pattern 8L, the odd numbered pattern 8La The attached character pattern 8Lb slowly changes its posture so as to face from the front right to the front, whereas in the right decorative pattern 8R, the even numbered pattern 8Ra slowly changes its posture so as to face from the front left to the front. It is designed to let you do so. In other words, if there is a character design in the decorative design, excluding special symbols, the character design will rotate, and if there is no character design in the decorative design, the number design will rotate, The objects to be rotated are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character design rotates when the character design exists in the decorative design, excluding special designs, and the direction in which the number design rotates when the character design does not exist in the decorative design are exactly opposite. It has become different.

Furthermore, even when a character design is included in the decorative design, there are some in which the character design rotates, and special designs in which the character design remains facing forward and does not rotate. Furthermore, if there is a decorative pattern consisting of a number pattern as the only pattern, or a pattern of a character in winged form as the only pattern, the only pattern may be It is designed to rotate.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C. The decorative symbol rotation stop display performance C is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each variable area extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. . Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are card-type decorative patterns, and various characters are attached to the numerical patterns in the card. Moreover, the medium decorative pattern 8C includes a special pattern. This special design is composed only of character designs.

The number "7" has a bright red color. Odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Each number design (odd number design and even number design) is composed of various character designs (all different character designs) with multiple colors (full colors), and the character design is the main character design. displayed in large size. Therefore, the size of the number design is smaller than the size of the character design attached to the number design. The special design is a design of a character in the form of a wingman, and has a plurality of colors (full colors). The special design consists only of the character design in wingman form, and the size of the special design is about the same size or larger than the size of the character design attached to the number design. ing.

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 121(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is a bright blue number "2" with a character design 8Lb attached to it and is displayed temporarily, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is a bright green number "3" design 8Ca. The character pattern 8Cb is attached to the number "6" and the right decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, and the character pattern 8Rb is attached to the bright blue number "6" and the character pattern 8Rb is temporarily stopped, and then the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decoration are displayed. The symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and are out of place. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the decorative pattern changes again as shown in FIG. 121(B). The effect (fluctuating display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C is started.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121(C), the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the left decorative pattern 8L to At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, a character pattern 8Lb appears attached to a bright green number "1" pattern 8La. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing forward and is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). In addition, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has eyes that are glowing yellow, but does not face forward and is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, making it look like a silhouette. The silhouette is displayed in a fluctuating manner (fluctuating display). At this time, the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues.

In the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing the front, and the character pattern 8Lb faces from the front right to the front. When the character pattern 8Lb slowly changes its posture and faces forward, it changes from a silhouette-like silhouette to full color, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L of the card type slowly moves vertically in small increments. Become. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L of the card type is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb facing forward.

Subsequently, the right decorative pattern 8R during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121(E), the right decorative pattern 8R At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, a character pattern 8Rb appears attached to a bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra does not face forward, but tilts to the front left when viewed from the number "2" pattern 8Ra. The character pattern 8Rb attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra is in the same state as it was, and the character pattern 8Rb is facing forward in full color with its eyes glowing yellow. It remains in the same state and is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). At this time, the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues.

As shown in FIG. 121(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes its posture so that the bright blue number "2" design 8Ra faces from the front left to the front, and the bright blue number "2" slowly changes its posture. When the "2" pattern 8Ra faces the front, the entire card-type right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly and slowly in the vertical direction. As a result, the card type right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra and the character pattern 8Rb facing forward.

Subsequently, the medium decorative pattern 8C during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121(G), the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from the medium decorative pattern 8C At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the fluctuation area of , a character pattern 8Cb appears attached to a bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca. When the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward and is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). In addition, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca has yellow eyes, but does not face forward and is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, making it look like a silhouette. The silhouette is displayed in a fluctuating manner (fluctuating display).

In the medium decorative pattern 8C, as shown in FIG. 121(H), the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing the front, and the character pattern 8Cb faces from the front right to the front. When the character pattern 8Cb slowly changes its posture and faces forward, it changes from a shadow-like silhouette to full color, and the entire card-type interior decoration pattern 8C slowly moves vertically in small increments. Become. As a result, the card-type medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb facing forward. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C ends.

Thereafter, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and are removed. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the left decorative pattern 8L of the card type, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the odd numbered pattern 8La slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front when viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, and the card type In the medium decorative pattern 8C, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8Ca slowly changes its posture from the front right to the front when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, while the In the decorative pattern 8R, the even-numbered pattern 8Ra slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the front left to the front when viewed from the even-numbered pattern 8Ra. In other words, even if various characters are attached to odd-numbered designs and even-numbered designs, the character design rotates in the odd-numbered design, and the number design rotates in the even-numbered design, and the rotating object are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character symbols in the odd-numbered symbols rotate and the direction in which the number symbols in the even-numbered symbols rotate are completely opposite and different.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A in FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B in FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C in FIG. It is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying, and a character pattern is attached to an odd number of the decorative patterns (plurality of pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8L. A decorative pattern (first pattern image) is temporarily stopped and displayed in a first stopping mode, and an even numbered decorative pattern (second pattern image) is displayed in a second stopping mode (the second stopping mode is , which is different from the first stop mode) (Fig. 119 (B) to (H) for decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A, and Fig. 120 (H) for decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B) B) to (G), and decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C allows execution of FIGS. 121(B) to (I)). According to this configuration, characters are attached to odd-numbered patterns that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first stop mode among the decorative patterns (a plurality of pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L. A novel decorative pattern variation effect (variation display) can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A shown in FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B shown in FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C shown in FIG. The second pattern image is a number pattern (number image), and the first pattern image further includes a character pattern (decoration image). According to this configuration, the first pattern image includes a number pattern (number image) and a character pattern (decoration image), and the second pattern image includes a number pattern (number image) and a character pattern (decoration image). Become. Therefore, a difference has already occurred between the decorative pattern that becomes the first pattern image and the decorative pattern that becomes the second pattern image, and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started and the display is temporarily stopped. In addition, different impressions can be given to the player depending on the combination of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed, and this contributes to eliminating the monotony of the temporary stop display of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols. can.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable effects in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A in FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B in FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C in FIG. As a stop mode, the character pattern (decoration image) is rotated without rotating the number pattern (number image) in the first pattern image, and then the first pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second pattern image is stopped. After rotating the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image, the second pattern image can be temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the first design image in which the character design (decoration image) is included in the number design (number image) is such that the number design (number image) does not rotate and the character design (decoration image) The second pattern image, which is temporarily stopped after rotating and becomes a number pattern (number image), is displayed temporarily stopped after the number pattern (number image) is rotated, and the rotating object is It looks different. As a result, variations in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed include only the first pattern image, only the second pattern image, and the first pattern image and the second pattern image. In any variation, there is always a part that rotates in the decorative pattern, so a unified effect called "rotation" is performed for the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern. Even if the objects to be rotated are different between the symbol image and the second symbol image, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the fluctuating performance (fluctuation display) of the decorative symbols.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A shown in FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B shown in FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C shown in FIG. The number patterns (number images) in the second pattern image have bright green (first color) and bright red (second color). ) has a bright blue color (third color). According to this configuration, there is a difference in the manner in which the first symbol image and the second symbol image are temporarily stopped and displayed, and furthermore, there is a difference in the color of the number symbol (number image). Furthermore, since there are two colors in the number symbols (number images) in the first symbol image, different impressions can be given to the player depending on the combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B shown in FIGS. 120(G) to (I), the decorative patterns (a plurality of The pattern image) further includes a special pattern (third pattern image) of medium decorative pattern 8C which has a character pattern (decorative image) and does not have a number pattern (number image). The special pattern (third pattern image) of the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the third stopping mode, and in the third stopping mode, the special pattern (third pattern image) of the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. When displayed, the pattern (decoration image) of the character in winged form in the special pattern (third pattern image) of the medium decorative pattern 8C jumps out to the outside of the special pattern (third pattern image) of the medium decorative pattern 8C and moves. It is now possible to do so. According to this configuration, when the special pattern (third pattern image) of the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern of the character in wingman form in the special pattern (third pattern image) of the medium decorative pattern 8C (Decoration image) suddenly jumps out from the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and moves, creating a video effect that even the players cannot imagine, making for an impactful effect. It can be provided to players.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable effects in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A in FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B in FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C in FIG. When the pattern image starts to fluctuate, a part of the character pattern (decoration image) in the first pattern image is changed to one imitating a shadow-like silhouette (shadow image), and in the first stop mode, the original ( It is now possible to return to full-color character designs (decorative images). According to this configuration, by returning from a silhouette-like silhouette (shadow picture image) to the original (full color) character design (decoration image), it is possible to easily determine what character design it is. By creating a shadow-like silhouette (shadow picture image), the effect of the production can be further enhanced.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A shown in FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B shown in FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C shown in FIG. The size of the number pattern (number image) in is smaller than the size of the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image. The first design image includes a character design (decorative image) in the number design (number image), so the character design (decoration image) is mainly large in the first design image. The size of the number design is smaller than the size of the character design (decoration image). Further, the second symbol image becomes a numeric symbol (a numeric image), and the numeric symbol itself becomes large. In other words, the first symbol image draws the player's attention to the large displayed character symbol (decorative symbol), and the second symbol image draws the player's attention to the large numerical symbol (number image). The objects to be focused on are now different. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to making it difficult for the variable presentation (variable display) between the decorative pattern that becomes the first pattern image and the decorative pattern that becomes the second pattern image to become monotonous.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A in FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B in FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C in FIG. It was to be done. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A in FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B in FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C in FIG. 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in a line at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be placed in a position slightly above this center line, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be placed further back, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R may be placed in a position slightly above the center line. They may be arranged in a triangular shape with the base as the base. In this case, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is made smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Thereby, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged on the front side, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged on the depth side, thereby realizing a three-dimensional arrangement.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, the special pattern is a pattern of a character in wingman form, and the character in wingman form jumps forward from the medium decorative pattern 8C, and is further displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. A video production of a humanoid character design was being performed. However, in addition to the design of a character in wingman form, a character design may be used as the special design. For example, it may be a pattern of characters that performs a pseudo-connection (a design of characters ``pseudo-connection''), or it may be a pattern of characters that changes the fluctuation icon 9C or pending icon 9A (a pattern of characters ``change''). By doing this, it is possible to perform a production in which the character design jumps forward from the medium decoration pattern 8C and moves to activate the content of the character design, and by increasing the variety of special designs, the special design The effect of the performance can be further enhanced.

[Modification 4]
Decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A in FIG. 119, decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B in FIG. 120, and decorative symbol rotation stop display performance C in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C10-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Among the plurality of symbol images, a first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a first stop mode, and a second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a second stop mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-1,
The first symbol image and the second symbol image are numerical images,
The first pattern image further includes a decorative image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-2,
In the variation effect, as the first stopping mode, the decoration image is rotated without rotating the number image in the first symbol image, and then the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a stopping mode, after rotating the number image in the second symbol image, the second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C10-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-2 or aspect C10-3,
The number images in the first pattern image include those having a first color and those having a second color,
The number image in the second pattern image may have a third color;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-4,
The plurality of pattern images further include a third pattern image that has the decoration image and does not have the number image,
In the variation production, the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a third stop mode,
In the third stopping mode, when the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative image in the third symbol image jumps out to the outside of the third symbol image and is operable.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C10-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-5,
In the variation effect, when the first symbol image starts to fluctuate, a part of the decoration image in the first symbol image is changed to one imitating a silhouette image, and in the first stop mode, the original Return to decorative image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C10-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-6,
The size of the number image in the first symbol image is smaller than the size of the number image in the second symbol image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The expectation level numeric display performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 122 to 124. This expectation level numeric display effect may be executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the expectation numerical display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Expectation level numerical display performance A]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level numeric display effect A. The expectation level numeric display performance is a performance in which, during the reach performance, an image representing the expectation level at the time of reach development in numbers is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after this reach effect, a black doll character CRA1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a text image of ``Chance to enter the jackpot'' is displayed together with the character CRA1.

This character image "Chance to enter a jackpot with a certain probability" is a win type suggestion image that suggests the type of jackpot at the time of a jackpot. In other words, it suggests that if you win at this fluctuation, it will be a definite-variable jackpot. Here, it is suggested that if a jackpot occurs after the change, it will be a jackpot that is expected to pass 16R (round) V (actually 15R or 13R). This character image will be changed if the jackpot in the fluctuation is confirmed by a lottery at the time of winning a prize, and the jackpot type is a jackpot expected to pass through 16RV, and if displaying this character image is selected in the lottery when selecting a fluctuation pattern. will be displayed. Moreover, this character image is selected to be displayed by lottery even when the loss in the fluctuation is determined by the lottery at the time of winning a prize. In addition, this character image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a jackpot that is expected to pass through 16RV, or when it becomes another jackpot (for example, a jackpot that is not scheduled to pass through 16RV) at the time of a jackpot. may also be set to be displayed.

The character image "Chance to hit the jackpot" is displayed for a predetermined period of time and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the character image "Chance to enter a certain variable jackpot" disappears, the character CRA1 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 122(B). The character CRA1 is an image representing the same object (black person) as in FIG. 122(A), but the display position is different (changes) from that in FIG. 122(A). In addition, a character image "Expectation level 40% for Smile Reach development" is displayed together with the character CRA1. The character image "Expectation level 40% for Smile Reach development" is displayed as a speech bubble of the character CRA. The reach state of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

This text image "Expectation level 40% with smile reach development" is a hit expectation level suggestion image that numerically represents the expectation level of a jackpot when the reach development effect is executed during the reach time of the fluctuation. That is, if the Smile Reach development performance is executed after this display, it is suggested that the expected level of jackpot will be 40%. Here, this character image is executed both when a jackpot in the fluctuation is determined by the lottery at the time of winning a prize, and when a loss is determined. If displaying this character image is selected by lottery when selecting a variation pattern, it will be displayed during variation. The ratio of displaying this character image is set to be 4:6 between the variation pattern when winning a jackpot and the variation pattern when losing.

The character image "Expectation level 40% due to Smile Reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period of time and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the text image "Expectation level 40% due to Smile Reach development" disappears, the text image "Smile Reach development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 122(C). be done. This is an image that notifies you that the reach has developed in the reach effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a reach development effect is executed. Here, multiple smiley face images are displayed. Thereafter, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the game is fixed and stopped with a loss of "282".

FIG. 122(F) shows a different variation from FIGS. 122(A) to (E), and the display screen 7a displays a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become in a reach state (here, a reach state of "6↓6"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and a special reach effect is executed. Here, first, a battle video in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While this battle video is being displayed, a text image saying ``Expectation level 30% due to Smile Reach development'' is displayed. The text image "Expectation level 30% for Smile Reach development" is displayed in a rectangular frame below the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB.

This text image "Expectation level 30% with smile reach development" is a hit expectation level suggestion image that numerically represents the expectation level of a jackpot when the reach development effect is executed during the reach time of the fluctuation. That is, if the Smile Reach development performance is executed after this display, it is suggested that the expected level of jackpot will be 30%. Here, this character image is executed both when a jackpot in the fluctuation is determined by the lottery at the time of winning a prize, and when a loss is determined. If displaying this character image is selected by lottery when selecting a variation pattern, it will be displayed during variation. The ratio of displaying this character image is set to be 3:7 between the variation pattern when winning a jackpot and the variation pattern when losing.

Comparing this character image "Expectation level 30% with Smile Reach development" and the character image "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach development" in Figure 122 (B), the same reach development effect (Smile Reach development) is executed. While this image represents the level of expectation when the event occurs, a different numerical value is displayed as the level of expectation. In this way, since numerical values of different expectation levels may be displayed for the same reach development performance (smile reach development), it is possible to make the player pay attention to the numerical values. In addition, this text image "Expectation level 30% with Smile Reach development" is displayed together with the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, while the text image "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach development" shown in FIG. 122(B) is displayed together with the black doll character CRA1. In this way, the text image "Expectation level 30% for Smile Reach development" and the text image "Expectation level 40% for Smile Reach development" in FIG. 122(B) are images representing different objects. Ru. This makes it difficult to understand what image the character image "Expectation level for Smile Reach development is 00%" is displayed with, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the display.

The character image "Expectation level 30% for Smile Reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period of time and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the text image "Expectation level 30% due to Smile Reach development" disappears, the text image "Smile Reach development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 122(H). be done. This is an image that notifies you that the reach has developed in the reach effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(I), a reach development effect is executed. Here, the friendly character CRA is throwing a plurality of smiley face images at the enemy character CRB. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, along with an image in which the ally character CRA is defeated, the game is fixed and stopped in the state of losing "686".

[Expectation level numerical display performance B]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level numeric display performance B. The expectation level numeric display performance is a performance in which, during the reach performance, an image representing the expectation level at the time of reach development in numbers is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after this reach effect, a battle video in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While this battle video is being displayed, a smiley character CRA1 is displayed. In addition, a text image of "A chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" is displayed together with the smiley character CRA1.

This character image "Chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" is a win type suggestion image that suggests the type of jackpot when the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance. In other words, it suggests that if you win in this variation, you will get a jackpot with a RUSH. Here, it is suggested that if a jackpot occurs after the change, it will be a jackpot that is expected to pass 16R (round) V (actually 15R or 13R). This character image will be changed if the jackpot in the fluctuation is confirmed by a lottery at the time of winning a prize, and the jackpot type is a jackpot expected to pass through 16RV, and if displaying this character image is selected in the lottery when selecting a fluctuation pattern. will be displayed. Moreover, this character image is selected to be displayed by lottery even when the loss in the fluctuation is determined by the lottery at the time of winning a prize. In this case, an image in which the ally character CRA is defeated is displayed. This character image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a jackpot that is expected to pass through 16RV, or may be displayed when there is another jackpot (for example, a jackpot that is not scheduled to pass through 16RV). may be set so that

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the text image "Victory in battle gives you a chance to enter RUSH", the text image "Victory in battle gives you a chance to enter RUSH" continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 123(B). In this state, a smiley character CRA2 is further displayed. The smile character CRA2 is an image representing the same object (smiley face) as the smile character CRA1, but the display positions are different (lined up above and below). In addition, a text image of "Expectation level 60% due to smile man participation reach development" is displayed together with the smiley character CRA2. The text image "Expectation level 60% due to smile man participation reach development" is displayed as a speech bubble of the smiley character CRA2. The reach state of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

This character image "Expectation level 60% with Smileman participation reach development" is a hit expectation level suggestion image that numerically represents the expectation level of a jackpot when the reach development performance is executed during the reach time of the fluctuation. That is, if the smile man participation reach development performance is executed after this display, it is suggested that the expected level of jackpot will be 60%. Here, this character image is executed both when a jackpot in the fluctuation is determined by the lottery at the time of winning a prize, and when a loss is determined. If displaying this character image is selected by lottery when selecting a variation pattern, it will be displayed during variation. The ratio of displaying this character image is selected to be 6:4 between the variation pattern for a jackpot and the variation pattern for a loss.

The character image "Expectation level 60% due to Smileman participation reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period of time and then disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the text image that says "Chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" also disappears. After the character images "Expectation level 60% due to Smileman participation reach development" and "Chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" disappear, as shown in FIG. 123(C), during the same fluctuation, the center of the display screen 7a An image of the words "Smile Man Participates!" will be displayed nearby. This is an image that notifies you that the reach has developed in the reach effect. Along with this notification image, Smileman CRC participates in a battle video in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(D), a reach development effect is executed. Here, a video is displayed in which the ally character CRA and the smiley man CRC are defeated by the enemy character CRB. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the game is fixed and stopped with a loss of "282".

FIG. 123(F) shows a variation different from FIGS. 123(A) to 123(E), and a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become in a ready-to-reach state (here, a ready-to-reach state of "6↓6"). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and a special reach effect is executed. Here, first, a battle video in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While this battle video is being displayed, a rectangular striped pattern image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 123(H) to (I), when the striped pattern of the rectangular striped pattern image slides to the left, the text "Expectation level 60% for Smileman participation reach development" appears from inside. The image is displayed. The text image ``Expectation level 60% due to Smileman participation reach development'' is displayed inside the rectangular frame.

This character image "Expectation level 60% with Smileman participation reach development" is a hit expectation level suggestion image that numerically represents the expectation level of a jackpot when the reach development performance is executed during the reach time of the fluctuation. That is, if the smile man participation reach development performance is executed after this display, it is suggested that the expected level of jackpot will be 60%. Here, this character image is executed both when a jackpot in the fluctuation is determined by the lottery at the time of winning a prize, and when a loss is determined. If displaying this character image is selected by lottery when selecting a variation pattern, it will be displayed during variation. The ratio of displaying this character image is selected to be 6:4 between the variation pattern for a jackpot and the variation pattern for a loss.

The text images in Figures 123 (G) to (I) that say "Expectation level is 60% due to Smileman's participation reach development" and the text image "Expectation level 60% due to SmileMan participation reach development" in Figure 123(B). By comparison, these images represent the level of expectation when the same reach development effect (Smileman participation reach development) is executed, and the same numerical value is displayed as the level of expectation. On the other hand, the text image "Expectation level 60% due to Smileman participation reach development" in Figures 123 (G) to (I) is displayed from inside when the striped pattern of the rectangular striped pattern image slides to the left. On the other hand, the character image "Expectation level 60% due to smile man participation reach development" in FIG. 123(B) is displayed as a speech bubble of the smiley character CRA2. In this way, even if the content is the same, the display modes are different. In addition, the character image "Expectation level 60% due to Smileman's participation reach development" in Figures 123(G) to (I) is displayed together with the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB, while the character image "Smileman participation reach development" in Figure 123(B) is displayed together with the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB. The character image "Expectation level 60% due to man participation reach development" is displayed together with the smiley character CRA2. In this way, the text images of "Expectation level 60% due to Smileman participation reach development" in Figures 123 (G) to (I) and ``Expectation level 60% due to SmileMan participation reach development'' in Figure 123(B). Images representing objects different from each other are displayed as character images. As a result, it is difficult to understand in what form the character image "Expectation level 60% due to Smileman participation reach development" will be displayed and with which image, increasing the expectations of the display for players. can.

The character image "Expectation level 60% due to Smileman participation reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period of time and then disappears from the display screen 7a. If the reach development effect is not executed after the character image "Expected level of 60% due to Smileman participation reach development" disappears (if the Smileman CRC in Figure 123 does not appear), as shown in Figure 123 (J). Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, along with an image in which the ally character CRA is defeated, the game is fixed and stopped in the state of losing "686".

[Expectation level numerical display performance C]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level numeric display performance C. 124(A) to (C) are similar to FIGS. 123(A) to (C) of the expectation level numeric display effect B. After FIG. 124(C), a reach development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 124(D). Here, a video is displayed in which the friendly character CRA and the smiley man CRC defeat the enemy character CRB and win. Thereafter, due to this victory, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, since the ally character CRA has won, the winning pattern of "222" is confirmed and stopped.

124(F) to (G) are similar to FIGS. 123(F) to (H) of the expectation level numeric display performance B. After the character image "Expectation level 60% due to Smileman participation reach development" disappears, as shown in FIG. 124(G), "Smileman participation!" appears near the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 124(H). ” is displayed. This is an image that notifies you that the reach has developed in the reach effect. Along with this notification image, Smileman CRC participates in a battle video in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124(I), a reach development effect is executed. Here, a video is displayed in which the friendly character CRA and the smiley man CRC defeat the enemy character CRB and win. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, since the ally character CRA has won, the winning pattern of "666" is confirmed and stopped.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the expectation level numerical display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122(B), FIG. 123(B), and FIG. 124(B), at the time of reach, a first effect is executed that expresses the expectation degree at the time of reach development in numbers. can do. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122(A), FIG. 123(A), and FIG. 124(A), the first effect is during the same variation as the first effect. Before the performance, a second performance that suggests the winning type at the time of winning can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122(A)(B), 123(A)(B), and 124(A)(B), the first performance and the second performance In this case, images representing the same object are displayed, and in the first effect and the second effect, images representing the same object are displayed at different positions. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122(B) and 122(G), the first effect is a numerical representation of the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed; Sometimes, it is possible to perform a third performance in which the degree of expectation when a specific reach development performance is executed is expressed by a number different from the numerical value in the first performance. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122(B) and 122(G), images representing different objects are displayed in the first effect and the third effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123(B)(G) to (I) and FIG. 124(B)(G), a specific reach development effect is executed in the first effect. It is a number that represents the expectation level when a specific reach development effect is executed at the time of reach, and is expressed as a number that is the same as the value in the first effect, but is different from the first effect. It is possible to execute a fourth effect that is displayed in the following manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the expectation level numeric display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In Figure 122 (G) of the expectation level numerical display effect A, the expectation level expressed by the character image "Expectation level 30% with the development of Smile Reach" is the same as that of "Expectation level 40% with the development of Smile Reach" in Figure 122 (B). The value may be the same as the expectation level expressed by the character image. In this case, at the time of reach, the performances that express the expectation level when a specific reach development time performance is executed using the same numerical value are executed in different manners, so that it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, in Figures 123 (G) to (I) of the expectation level numerical display effect B, the expectation level expressed by the character image "Expectation level 60% due to Smile Man participation reach development" is the same as that of "Smile Man The expectation level may be different from the expectation level expressed by the character image "Expectation level 60% due to participation reach development." In this case, at the time of reach, a performance is performed that expresses the degree of expectation when a specific reach development time performance is performed using different numerical values, so that it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 2]
In the expectation level numeric display performance A, a performance in which a text image of "Expectation level XX% with Smile Reach development" is displayed may be executed multiple times during one change. That is, the expectation level may change during one change. In this case, the expectation level displayed later may be higher or lower than the expectation level displayed first.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a first effect that numerically represents the degree of expectation at the time of reach development when the reach is reached.
◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second performance that indicates a winning type at the time of winning during the same fluctuation as the fluctuation in which the first performance is executed and before the first performance. .
◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
In the first effect and the second effect, images representing the same object are displayed,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the first performance and the second performance, images representing the same object are displayed at different positions.
◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3,
In the first performance, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development performance is executed is expressed by a number,
A gaming machine characterized in that, at the time of reaching a reach, a third effect can be executed in which the degree of expectation when the specific reach development effect is executed is expressed by a number different from the numerical value in the first effect.
◇[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that images representing mutually different objects are displayed in the first effect and the third effect.
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
In the first performance, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development performance is executed is expressed by a number,
At the time of reach, the expectation level when the specific reach development time performance is executed is expressed by the same number as the value in the first performance, while a fourth performance is displayed in a different manner from the first performance. A gaming machine characterized by being executable.

Specific performance execution suggestion performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 125 to 127. This specific performance execution suggestion performance may be executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific effect execution suggestion effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Specific performance execution suggestion performance A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining specific performance execution suggestion performance A. The specific performance execution suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that a specific performance will be executed from now on in the change. First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continues. That is, even after the variable display (fluctuating display) of the special symbol (identification information) has started on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (fluctuation icon display area, pending digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed below the hold display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation, a specific effect execution suggestion image ESG indicating that a specific effect will be executed from now on in the variation is displayed. Here, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is a text image of "Smile-kun big gathering!", and notifies that a special reach performance (SP reach performance) will be executed. When the character image "Smile-kun Gathers!" appears, it is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, the performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed protruding from the three screens. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not yet displayed. That is, in this performance, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed after the fluctuation starts and before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Therefore, the player who sees the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suddenly realizes that a specific effect such as a special reach effect will be executed without knowing anything about the state of the decorative symbols, such as whether or not it will be a reach for the decorative symbols. be informed. This can greatly surprise the players and increase their interest. A part of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed overlapping the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(C), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the three sub display screens 64R, 64R, 7a, and 64L. Fits inside the screen. At this time, the image is still enlarged and displayed across three screens. The variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not been displayed yet. A part of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed overlapping the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(D), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed in a further reduced size, so that the entire specific performance execution suggestion image ESG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed yet. A part of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed overlapping with the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C, and the relevant suspended icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. Ru.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(E), while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is being displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the top of the display screen 7a toward the bottom, and It temporarily stops at a position overlapping the performance execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7" here, and is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(F), while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed above the display screen 7a. It moves downward from there and temporarily stops at a position overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative pattern 8R has the same number "7" as the left decorative pattern 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a reach of "7↓7" is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(G), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and a special reach performance as a specific performance is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is split, and a plurality of smile face images (smile-kun) that execute a specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 125(H) and 125(I), a specific effect (special reach effect) using a plurality of smiley face images is executed. That is, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach performance. Here, in the specific performance, a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is being executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the game is fixed and stopped in the form of a jackpot of "777".

[Specific performance execution suggestion performance B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining specific performance execution suggestion performance B. The specific performance execution suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that a specific performance will be executed from now on in the change. First, as shown in FIG. 126(A), a state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. That is, even after the variable display (fluctuating display) of the special symbol (identification information) has started on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (fluctuation icon display area, pending digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed below the hold display area.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variation, a specific performance execution suggestion image ESG indicating that a specific performance will be executed from now on in the variation is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 126(B) and 126(C). Here, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is a text image of "Smile-kun big gathering!", and notifies that a special reach performance (SP reach performance) will be executed. The character image "Smile-kun big gathering!" appears while moving from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not yet displayed. That is, in this performance, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed after the fluctuation starts and before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Therefore, the player who sees the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suddenly realizes that a specific effect such as a special reach effect will be executed without knowing anything about the state of the decorative symbols, such as whether or not it will be a reach for the decorative symbols. be informed. This can greatly surprise the players and increase their interest. When the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 126(C), a part of it is displayed overlapping the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. Displayed across. The variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not been displayed yet. A part of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed overlapping the pending icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(E), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is again fit inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed yet. A part of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed overlapping with the relevant pending icon (variable icon) 9C, and the relevant suspended icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. Ru.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(F), while the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is being displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the top of the display screen 7a toward the bottom, and It temporarily stops at a position overlapping the performance execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7" here, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(G), while the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed above the display screen 7a. It moves downward from there and temporarily stops at a position overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative pattern 8R has the same number "7" as the left decorative pattern 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a reach of "7↓7" is formed in front of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and a special reach performance as a specific performance is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is split, and a plurality of smile face images (smile-kun) that execute a specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(I), a specific effect (special reach effect) using a plurality of smiley face images is executed. That is, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach performance. Here, in the specific performance, a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is being executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the game is fixed and stopped in the form of a jackpot of "777".

[Specific performance execution suggestion performance C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining specific performance execution suggestion performance C. In the specific performance execution suggestion performance C, a specific performance execution suggestion performance and a pseudo continuous performance are executed in combination. First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), a state continues in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. That is, even after the variable display (fluctuating display) of the special symbol (identification information) has started on the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of 64L continues. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (fluctuation icon display area, pending digested image display area) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed below the hold display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, the effects shown in FIGS. 127(B) to (D) are executed. The effects shown in FIGS. 127(B) to (D) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 126(B) to (H) of specific effect execution suggestion effect B. As shown in FIG. 127(D), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and a special reach performance (SP reach performance) as a specific performance is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach mode. Here, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is split, and a plurality of smile face images (smile-kun) that perform a specific performance (special reach performance) appear from the back side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. After that, a specific effect (special reach effect) using a plurality of smiley face images is executed. That is, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach performance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Here, there is a temporary stop in the form of a loss of "767". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(F), the character image "One more time!" is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started to start changing the decorative pattern again. FIGS. 127(G) to (I) are similar to FIGS. 127(B) to (D). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the game is fixed and stopped in the form of a jackpot of "777".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific performance execution suggestion performance is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in a state where the decorative pattern fluctuation display is not continuously displayed after the fluctuation starts, it is possible to execute a specific effect in the fluctuation. A first performance in which a suggested specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, and a second performance in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop overlapping the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG after the first performance. can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the second performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a ready-to-win state overlapping the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, after the second performance, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is broken with the decorative patterns 8L and 8R overlapping, and the SP reach performance is A third effect can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the third effect, a character (smiley face image) corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suggests the specific effect execution. The image ESG is destroyed and a character (smiley face image) appears in the SP reach effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the first effect, a hold icon (the hold icon (fluctuating icon) 9C) is displayed overlappingly in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. be done. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the first performance, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R, and on the display screen 7a and the left sub display screen 64R. The display screen 64L is displayed across the sub-display means. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the specific performance execution suggestion performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific performance execution suggestion performances A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-reach state on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG, but they may be stopped in a manner other than the ready-to-reach state. For example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at "567" on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Further, for example, after temporarily stopping at "567", it may be changed again by a pseudo continuous effect, and a specific effect may be executed at that time.

[Modification 2]
The content of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG may suggest that a performance other than the special reach performance is performed. For example, it may be suggested that a jackpot confirmation performance or a loss confirmation performance will be executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first performance in which a specific performance execution suggestion image that suggests that a specific performance will be executed in the variation is displayed in a state in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is not displayed continuously after the start of the variation;
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the first performance, a second performance can be performed in which the decorative pattern temporarily stops overlapping the specific performance execution suggestion image.
◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-win state overlapping the specific performance execution suggestion image.
◇[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2,
After the second performance, the specific performance execution suggestion image is broken in a state where the decorative symbols overlap, and a third performance can be executed in which an SP reach performance is executed.
◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
In the third performance, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image destroys the specific performance execution suggestion image, and in the SP reach performance, the character appears. Machine.
◇[Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the first performance, the hold icon is displayed in front of the specific performance execution suggestion image in an overlapping manner.
◇[Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5 further includes:
Equipped with a sub-display means that can display multiple types of images,
In the first performance, the specific performance execution suggestion image is displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The special direction suggestion effect will be explained below using FIGS. 128 to 130. This special direction suggestion performance may be executed during a special symbol variation performance or during a jackpot game. That is, this is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variable performance start command and jackpot game start command received from the sub-control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a. It's a performance.

[Special direction suggestion performance A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestion effect A. In this special direction suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), a time saving effect is executed. This time-saving medium performance is performed during a time-saving game state that is relatively advantageous to the player, and displays an ally character XF1, a direction suggestion display XF2, and a time-saving number display XF3. Friendly character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow indicating to the player that he should play right-handed, and the words "right-handed hitting" inside the arrow. The time reduction number display XF3 is a display representing the remaining number of time reductions, and in the example of FIG. 128(A), it is shown as "50 times left". In addition, in this time-saving effect, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Further, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), direction suggestion display performance 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 1 is a continuation of the time saving medium performance and is performed during the time saving game. In this direction suggestion display performance 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. Belt item XF11 and direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and belt item XF11 is arranged at the shaft of the arrow of direction display XF21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 2 is a continuation of the direction display performance 1, and is performed during the time saving game. In this direction suggestion display performance 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time saving number display XF3 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, a movement performance in which the belt item XF11 moves on the arrow shaft part of the direction display XF21 is shown. It is carried out.
This direction suggestion display performance 2 is executed until the end of the time saving game or until a jackpot is achieved.

[Special direction suggestion performance B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining special direction suggestion performance B. In this special direction suggestion performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), a normal medium performance is executed. This normal performance is performed during a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and displays an ally character XF1 and a direction suggestion display XF2. Friendly character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow indicating to the player that he should play right-handed, and the words "right-handed hitting" inside the arrow. Furthermore, in this normal performance, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Further, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. After this, the following will be explained assuming that the game has won a jackpot and entered a time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 1 is performed during a time-saving game that is relatively advantageous to the player. In this direction suggestion display performance 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. Belt item XF11 and direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and belt item XF11 is arranged at the shaft of the arrow of direction display XF21. Further, in this direction suggestion display performance 1, a time saving number display XF3 is displayed. The time reduction number display XF3 is a display representing the remaining number of time reductions, and in the example of FIG. 129(B), it is shown as "50 times left".

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), direction suggestion display performance 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 2 is a continuation of the direction suggestion display performance 1, and is performed during the time saving game state. In this direction suggestion display performance 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time saving number display XF3 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, a movement performance in which the belt item XF11 moves on the arrow shaft part of the direction display XF21 is shown. It is carried out.
This direction suggestion display performance 2 is executed until the end of the time saving game or until a jackpot is achieved.

[Special direction suggestion C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestion effect C. In this special direction suggestion performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 130(A), a normal medium performance is executed. This normal performance is performed during a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and displays an ally character XF1 and a direction suggestion display XF2. Friendly character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 consists of an arrow indicating to the player that he should play right-handed, and the words "right-handed hitting" inside the arrow. Furthermore, in this normal performance, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Further, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. After this, the following will be explained assuming that the game has won a jackpot and entered a jackpot gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 1 is performed during a jackpot game. In this direction suggestion display performance 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. Belt item XF11 and direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and belt item XF11 is arranged at the shaft of the arrow of direction display XF21. Further, in this direction suggestion display performance 1, an acquired ball display XF4 is displayed. The acquired ball display XF4 is a display showing the acquired balls during the jackpot, and in the example of FIG. 130(B), it is shown as "Acquired balls: 1860".

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(C), direction suggestion display performance 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 2 is a continuation of the direction suggestion display performance 1, and is performed during the jackpot game state. In this direction suggestion display performance 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the acquired ball display XF4 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 moves on the shaft part of the direction display XF21. is carried out.
This direction suggestion display performance 2 is executed until the jackpot game ends.

[Modified example]
In the special direction suggestion performances A to C, the display position of the direction suggestion display XF2 is fixed, but the display position is not limited to this, and the direction suggestion display XF2 may also be moved while the belt item XF11 moves. .
Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may also be made to move. Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may blink. Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 may be moved to a position overlapping with the direction display XF21. In this case, the belt item XF11 may be located in front of the direction display XF21. Further, the belt item XF11 may be located behind the direction display XF21. When the direction suggestion display XF2 moves to a position where another image (such as a character (or the ally character XF1)) is superimposed, the direction suggestion display XF2 is displayed in front of the other image. In other words, the other images move behind the direction suggestion display XF2. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11, which is a part of the ally character XF1, but it may also include other parts of the ally character XF1 (for example, the sword) or the entire ally character XF1. , may include other characters or parts of other images.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned special direction suggestion performance B, a normal medium performance is performed in which ally character XF1 is displayed in a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player, and then a right-hand hit is suggested in a time-saving game state that is relatively advantageous for the player. A direction suggestion display XF2 including a direction display XF21 representing a direction to be played, and a direction suggestion display XF2 including a direction display XF11 representing a part of the ally character XF1 is performed. According to this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a part of the ally character XF1 displayed in a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 when hitting right Even though the time is being shortened, the user can recognize the ally character XF1 that appeared during the normal game state and feel a mysterious atmosphere, and can enjoy the time being shortened even more. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the above-mentioned special direction suggestion performance C, a time-saving performance is performed in which the ally character XF1 is displayed in a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player, and then, during a jackpot game, a direction display XF21 that suggests the launch direction of the game ball is performed. and XF11 representing a part of the ally character XF1. According to this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a part of the ally character XF1 displayed in a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 when hitting right Even during the jackpot game, the player can recognize the ally character XF1 that appeared during the normal game state and feel a mysterious atmosphere, and can enjoy the jackpot game even more. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a first image,
The second display effect is a direction indication display, and
The direction suggestion display includes a direction display suggesting the launch direction of the game ball, and a second image representing a part of the first image,
After the first display effect, the second display effect is performed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The second display performance is performed during a second gaming state of a first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The first display effect is performed during the first gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The second display performance is performed during a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects XF-2 to Aspect XF-4,
the first image is a character;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The sound effect productions A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 131 to 133. 131 to 133, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. It has since been omitted.

This production sound effect production can be executed over a plurality of variable productions (variable displays) using decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command, a preliminary determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute a sound effect effect is included, The corresponding image data is read out from the image display device 7, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the production sound effect (referred to as "specific background image") is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image, and includes, for example, a lunar surface image, a space image, an image inside a spacecraft, etc. It becomes. The normal background image is, for example, a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an ocean floor image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be still images or moving images.

Here, the production sound effect production A will be explained first, the production sound effect production B, and the production sound effect production C will be explained in order.

[Sound effect production A]
The sound effect performance A will be explained with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the production sound effect production A. The production sound effect production A is performed over a plurality of variable productions (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 131(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad and the second reservation display position 9Ad, and the third No pending icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only two pending icons remain in stock without being consumed.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)). Note that there are also specific icons having various characters. This specific icon is a white spherical icon in which various characters appear and is used in the sound effect production. icon or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 131(A), when the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, thereafter, during the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display), the As shown in 131(B), a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad (a pre-reading effect is displayed in relation to this ball entering). Although this was done, there was no change from the white spherical pending icon 9A to any other icon, resulting in the white spherical pending icon 9A). At this time, in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a first winning sound called "Pyon" is heard from the speaker 67. That is, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable presentation (during the variable display) and the presentation sound effect presentation A is started by the pre-read presentation, as shown in FIG. 131(C), the fourth A hold icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as "specific hold icon 9A") having the ally character CRA as a specific icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a second winning sound called "kyurukuru", which is different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67, and then, following the second winning sound, a player A first effect sound "OARO", which is the name of the character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first effect sound is played from the speaker 67 subsequently.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

After that, due to the hold consumption, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) continues, and the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in FIGS. When the fluctuation icon 9C is reached, a fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 131(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with the number "2". ", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", so that when the number is off, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable presentation (variable display).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131(E), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second performance sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, starts playing from the speaker 67.

Then, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, as shown in FIG. As shown in F), the city image THG1 as the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and "OARO", the name of the ally character CRA, is flashed as the name image TIL. The FH is displayed in a large manner in the center of the display screen 7a for a first display period (for example, 1 second). When switching from the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, to the space image THG2, which is a specific background image, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if you switch from the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, to the space image THG2, which is a specific background image, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed is short, and the space image THG2 is half displayed. There are cases where the city image THG1 can be seen through the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and their visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. The space image THG2, which is a specific background image, is gradually switched back to the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a. Continue the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 131(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1". If the change occurs due to the stopped display, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the change effect (change display) ends. At this time, the second performance sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, stops playing from the speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131(I), when the specific pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRA is displayed. The second performance sound, which is a song, starts playing from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second effect sound was stopped immediately before, it is not restarted from the point where it progressed to the point immediately before the stop, but is restarted from the beginning.

Then, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, as shown in FIG. As shown in J), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the space image THG2, which is the specific background image, and "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is changed to the name image TIL. It is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a for a second display period (for example, 4 seconds), which is significantly longer than the first display period, accompanied by a flash FH. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2, which is the specific background image, the space image THG2 Since the period during which is displayed becomes longer, the space image THG2 does not become translucent but becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 is not seen through behind the space image THG2. Note that, also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and their visibility is not hindered.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are being displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, a third effect sound "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is played. is played from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. This third effect sound is the same as the content conveyed by the first effect sound ("OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA), but has a different intonation. The first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is different in that it has excessive intonation and is impressive. In addition, the volume of the third effect sound is larger than the volume of the first effect sound, and the content conveyed by the first effect sound and the third effect sound ("OARO", the name of the ally character CRA) is Even if they are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound are conveyed to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 131(K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a A certain space image THG2 is switched to a moon surface image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and their visibility is not hindered.

In FIG. 131(I), the lyrics image TG of the second effect sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA) is used as a specific image related to the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, which has started playing from the speaker 67. ) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the rhythm of the second performance sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA, for the part (13 characters in hiragana) that says "One day, I will start from here...", the lyrics image TG is , In accordance with the rhythm of the second performance sound, first the lyrics image TG1 saying "One day" is displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a (to the left of the ally character CRA), and then the lyrics image TG2 saying "ni" is displayed. It is displayed at the second position of the display screen 7a (upper left of the ally character CRA), then the lyric image TG3 saying "From here" is displayed at the third position of the display screen 7a (to the right of the ally character CRA), and then , a lyrics image TG4 saying "Start" is displayed at the fourth position of the display screen 7a (upper right of the ally character CRA).

After that, when the output of the second effect sound is finished, as shown in FIG. 131(L), the lunar surface image THG3, which is the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is changed back to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. The switching and fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays) are continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When a fireball is shot towards the relevant variable icon 9C in an arc, the fireball collides with the relevant variable icon 9C and moves from the corresponding variable icon 9C having an ally character CRA to a yellow (gold) star-shaped corresponding variable icon. Changes to 9C. As a result, the production sound effect production A ends.

Note that the size of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon is the same as the size of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C in FIGS. 131(A) to 131(G). After the production sound effect production A, various productions may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it becomes a jackpot and then While a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it is a loss.

[Sound effect production B]
Next, the sound effect performance B will be explained with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the production sound effect production B. The production sound effect production B is performed over a plurality of variable productions (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)). Note that there are also specific icons having various characters. This specific icon is a white spherical icon in which various characters appear and is used in the sound effect production. icon or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 132(A), when the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, thereafter, during the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display), the As shown in 132(B), a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad (a pre-reading effect is performed in relation to this ball entering). Although this was done, there was no change from the white spherical pending icon 9A to any other icon, resulting in the white spherical pending icon 9A). At this time, in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a first winning sound called "Pyon" is heard from the speaker 67. That is, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable presentation (during the variable display) and the presentation sound effect presentation B is started by the pre-read presentation, as shown in FIG. 132(C), the third A hold icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as "specific hold icon 9A") having a teammate character CRB as a specific icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a second winning sound called "kyurukuru", which is different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67, and then, following the second winning sound, a player A first effect sound "OARO-B", which is the name of the character CRB, is played from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, the first effect sound is played from the speaker 67 subsequently.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

After that, due to the hold consumption, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) continues, and in FIGS. 132(A) to (C), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the relevant change display position 9Cd, When the fluctuation icon 9C is reached, a fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 132(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with the number "2". ", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", so that when the number is off, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable presentation (variable display).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 132(E), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, starts playing from the speaker 67.

Then, when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, as shown in FIG. As shown in F), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and "OARO-B" which is the name of the ally character CRB is changed to the name image TIL. is displayed in a large manner in the center of the display screen 7a for a first display period (for example, 1 second) with a flash FH. When switching from the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, to the space image THG2, which is a specific background image, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if you switch from the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, to the space image THG2, which is a specific background image, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed is short, and the space image THG2 is half displayed. There are cases where the city image THG1 can be seen through the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

Note that the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flash light FH, and their visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. The space image THG2, which is a specific background image, is gradually switched back to the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a. Continue the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1". If the stop display results in an error, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon completion of the variable effect (variable display). At this time, the second performance sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, stops playing from the speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 132(I), when the specific pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRB The second performance sound, which is a song, starts playing from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second effect sound was stopped immediately before, it is not restarted from the point where it progressed to the point immediately before the stop, but is restarted from the beginning.

Then, when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and start to fluctuate at high speed, as shown in FIG. As shown in J), the city image THG1 as the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and "OARO-B", the name of the ally character CRB, is changed to the name image. TIL is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light FH for a second display period (for example, 4 seconds) which is significantly longer than the first display period. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2, which is the specific background image, the space image THG2 Since the period during which is displayed becomes longer, the space image THG2 is not in a translucent state but is in an opaque state, so that the city image THG1 cannot be seen through behind the space image THG2. Note that, also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and their visibility is not hindered.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are being displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, a third image "OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB, is displayed. Performance sound is played from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. This third effect sound is the same as the content conveyed by the first effect sound ("OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB), but has a different intonation. The first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is different in that it has excessive intonation and is impressive. In addition, the volume of the third effect sound is larger than the volume of the first effect sound, and the content conveyed by the first effect sound and the third effect sound ("OARO-B" which is the name of the ally character CRB) ) are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound are conveyed to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 132(K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a A certain space image THG2 is switched to a moon surface image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRB is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRB is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRB, and their visibility is not hindered.

In FIG. 132(I), the lyrics image TG of the second effect sound (i.e., the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRB ) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the rhythm of the second performance sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRB, for the part (12 characters in hiragana) that says "My passion is still...", the lyrics image TG is the second In accordance with the rhythm of the performance sound, first the lyrics image TG1 saying "hot" is displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a (upper left of the ally character CRB), then the lyrics image TG2 saying "passion" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG3 saying "wo" is displayed at the second position (lower right of the ally character CRB), then the lyrics image TG3 saying "wo" is displayed at the third position (to the right of the ally character CRB), and then the lyrics "not yet" are displayed. The lyrics image TG4 is displayed at the fourth position (upper right of the ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound is finished, as shown in FIG. 132(L), the lunar surface image THG3, which is the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is changed back to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. The switching and fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays) are continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is fired towards the relevant fluctuation icon 9C in an arc, the fireball collides with the relevant fluctuation icon 9C and moves from the relevant fluctuation icon 9C with the ally character CRB to the relevant fluctuation icon 9C with the smiling sphere having blue color. Change. As a result, the production sound effect production B ends.

Note that the size of the blue smiling sphere icon is the same as the size of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C in FIGS. 132(A) to 132(G). Various effects may be continued after the sound effect effect B, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it becomes a jackpot and then While a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, the game becomes a loss.

[Sound effect production C]
Next, the sound effect production C will be explained with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the production sound effect production C. The production sound effect production C is performed over a plurality of variable productions (variable displays) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad and the second reservation display position 9Ad, and the third No pending icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only two pending icons remain in stock without being consumed.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)). Note that there are also specific icons having various characters. This specific icon is a white spherical icon in which various characters appear and is used in the sound effect production. icon or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 133(A), when the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, thereafter, during the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display), the As shown in 133(B), a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad (a pre-reading effect is performed in relation to this ball entering). Although this was done, there was no change from the white spherical pending icon 9A to any other icon, resulting in the white spherical pending icon 9A). At this time, in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a first winning sound called "Piyoung" is heard from the speaker 67. That is, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable presentation (during the variable display) and the presentation sound effect presentation C is started by the pre-read presentation, as shown in FIG. 133(C), the fourth A hold icon 9A (hereinafter referred to as "specific hold icon 9A") having an ally character CRA as a specific icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, in connection with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a second winning sound called "kyurukuru", which is different from the first winning sound, is played from the speaker 67, and then, following the second winning sound, a player A first effect sound "OARO", which is the name of the character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first effect sound is played from the speaker 67 subsequently.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

After that, due to the hold consumption, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) continues, and the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in FIGS. When the fluctuation icon 9C is reached, a fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 133(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with the number "2". ", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3", so that when the number is off, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable presentation (variable display).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133(E), when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second performance sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, starts playing from the speaker 67.

Then, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to fluctuate at high speed, As shown in F), the city image THG1 as the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and "OARO", the name of the ally character CRA, is flashed as the name image TIL. The FH is displayed in a large manner in the center of the display screen 7a for a first display period (for example, 1 second). When switching from the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, to the space image THG2, which is a specific background image, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if you switch from the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, to the space image THG2, which is a specific background image, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed is short, and the space image THG2 is half displayed. There are cases where the city image THG1 can be seen through the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific pending icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and their visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. The space image THG2, which is a specific background image, is gradually switched back to the city image THG1, which is a normal background image, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a. Continue the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1". If the stop display results in an error, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon completion of the variable effect (variable display). At this time, the second performance sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, stops playing from the speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133(I), when the specific pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRA is displayed. The second performance sound, which is a song, starts playing from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second effect sound was stopped immediately before, it is not restarted from the point where it progressed to the point immediately before the stop, but is restarted after returning to the beginning.

Then, the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to fluctuate at high speed, As shown in J), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the space image THG2, which is the specific background image, and "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is changed to the name image TIL. It is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a for a second display period (for example, 4 seconds), which is significantly longer than the first display period, accompanied by a flash FH. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2, which is the specific background image, the space image THG2 Since the period during which is displayed becomes longer, the space image THG2 does not become translucent but becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 is not seen through behind the space image THG2. Note that, also here, the name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and their visibility is not hindered.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are being displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, a third effect sound "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is played. is played from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. This third effect sound is the same as the content conveyed by the first effect sound ("OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA), but has a different intonation. The first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is different in that it has excessive intonation and is impressive. In addition, the volume of the third effect sound is larger than the volume of the first effect sound, and the content conveyed by the first effect sound and the third effect sound ("OARO", the name of the ally character CRA) is Even if they are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound are conveyed to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 133(K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a A certain space image THG2 is switched to a moon surface image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and their visibility is not hindered.

In FIG. 133(I), the lyrics image TG of the second effect sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA) is used as a specific image related to the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA that has started playing from the speaker 67. ) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the rhythm of the second performance sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, here, as part of the lyrics of the theme song for the ally character CRA, instead of the part "One day I will start from here..." (13 characters in hiragana), the part "Soon The lyrics image TG is replaced with the part ``A hit is coming...'' (13 characters in hiragana), and the lyrics image TG is first moved to the first position of the display screen 7a with the lyrics image TG1 ``Soon'' in accordance with the rhythm of the second performance sound. (to the left of the ally character CRA), then the lyrics image TG2 that says "hit" is displayed at the second position of the display screen 7a (upper left of the ally character CRA), and then the lyrics image TG3 that says "ga" is displayed at a third position on the display screen 7a (to the right of the ally character CRA), and then a lyrics image TG4 saying ``I come'' is displayed at a fourth position on the display screen 7a (to the upper right of the ally character CRA). Even if some of the content of the lyrics is replaced, since the number of characters is the same (13 characters) in hiragana, the lyrics can be displayed in accordance with the rhythm, and the player will not feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, the replaced content can suggest to the player that a jackpot has occurred.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound is finished, as shown in FIG. 133(L), the lunar surface image THG3, which is the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is changed back to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. The switching and fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays) are continued, and a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is released towards the variation icon 9C in an arc, the fireball collides with the variation icon 9C, causing the variation of the smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow) from the variation icon 9C having the ally character CRA. The icon changes to 9C. As a result, the production sound effect production C ends.

Note that the size of the smiling sphere icon having seven colors (rainbow) is approximately twice the size of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C in FIGS. 133(A) to (G). If the variable icon 9C of a smiling sphere with seven colors (rainbow) is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, there is a strong chance of winning the jackpot, and various effects may continue after the sound effect C. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, it becomes a jackpot and then a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of the sound effects are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the sound effect production A of FIG. 131, the sound effect production B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect production C of FIG. 133, the first starting opening into which the game ball can enter is 20 (ball entrance), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker 67 capable of outputting a plurality of types of sound effects. The first performance sound (sound effect productions A and C, the name of the ally character CRA, the production sound effect The first production that can output (the name of the ally character CRB in production B) (FIG. 131 (C) for production sound effect production A, FIG. 132 (C) for production sound effect production B, and FIG. 133 for production sound effect production C) (C)), after the first performance, the specific pending icon 9A is displayed as the relevant variable icon 9C, and the second performance sound (sound effect production A, C is the theme song of the ally character CRA, the production sound effect A second production that can output the theme song of the ally character CRB in production B (Figures 131 (I) to (K) in production sound effect production A, and Figures 132 (I) to (K) in production sound effect production B) , in the production sound effect production C, it is possible to perform (I) to (K) in FIG. 133). According to this configuration, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (ball entrance) and the number of specific pending icons increases as a pending icon, the first performance sound is played from the speaker, and the specific pending icon changes to the corresponding variable icon. In this case, since the second effect sound is played from the speaker, it is possible to provide the player with an innovative effect using the first effect sound and the second effect sound. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, before the second performance in the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131, the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133, the second performance sound 131(E) in the sound effect direction A, and in FIG. 131(E) in the sound effect direction B. 132(E), and in the sound effect production C, it is possible to execute the process shown in FIG. 133(E)). According to this configuration, the second effect sound that is played when the specific pending icon becomes the variable icon is played as a preview before the specific pending icon becomes the variable icon, so the player can hear the effect that will be played from now on. Expectations for a hit increase.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131, the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133, the second performance sound is output. Furthermore, it is possible to output a third effect sound (the name of the ally character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the name of the ally character CRB in the effect sound effect B). According to this configuration, when the second effect sound is played, the third effect sound overlaps with each other, so compared to when the second effect sound and the third effect sound are played individually, each effect is different. It is possible to provide a player with a performance sound that has an impact that combines the impressions of the sound, and to enhance the performance effect.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131, the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133, a second performance sound is further added. Lyrics images TG (specific images) related to can be displayed. According to this configuration, when the second effect sound is played, a specific image related to the second effect sound is displayed, so that the player imagines the progress of the second effect sound and imagines the specific image displayed. In addition, it is possible to imagine the second effect sound played by imagining the progress of the specific image, and it is possible to provide the player with an attractive effect by mutually complementing the second effect sound and the specific image. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131, the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133, the rhythm of the second sound effect is Lyrics image TG (specific image) can be displayed in accordance with the song. According to this configuration, the relationship between the second performance sound and the lyrics image TG (specific image) can be emphasized more clearly.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the lyric image TG (specific image) in the sound effect production A in FIG. 131, the sound effect production B in FIG. 132, and the sound effect production C in FIG. It is made up of multiple character images. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the expression method of the lyrics image TG (specific image), and it is also possible to individually emphasize the character images of the lyrics image TG (specific image) that are desired to attract the attention of the player.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the second effect in the effect sound effect effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C in FIG. 133, the variable icon 9C is The fourth effect to be changed (FIG. 131 (L) for sound effect performance A, FIG. 132 (L) for sound effect performance B, and FIG. 133 (L) for sound effect performance C) can be executed. It has become. According to this configuration, since a change in the variable icon may occur after the second effect sound ends, it is possible to maintain expectations for the change in the variable icon while the second effect sound is being played. .

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of the production sound effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
The sound effect performance A in FIG. 131, the sound effect performance B in FIG. 132, and the sound effect performance C in FIG. 133 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. . In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131, the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133, the lyrics image TG was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the lyrics image TG, it may be a video associated with the second sound effect (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the sound effect effect B). Examples include a movie, a video broadcast on TV, a scene of these, etc. in which the second effect sound is played.

[Modification 3]
In the production sound effect production A of FIGS. 131(I) to (K), the production sound effect production B of FIGS. 132(I) to (K), and the production sound effect production C of FIGS. 133(I) to (K), 2 effect sounds (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the sound effect effect B) are played from the speaker 67 until the end, and then the change in the variable icon 9C occurs. was. However, if the second effect sound ends midway, the variation icon 9C may not change. In this case, the white spherical variation icon 9C has the lowest expectation of winning.

[Modification 3]
In the production sound effect production A of Fig. 131(C), the production sound effect production B of Fig. 132(C), and the production sound effect production C of Fig. 133(C), the first starting port is 20, a specific pending icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a by a pre-read effect, and at this time, the first effect sound (in the sound effect effects A and C, the name of the ally character CRA, the effect sound effect) In B, the name of the ally character CRB) was being played from the speaker 67. However, the specific hold icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a and the first effect sound may not be played from the speaker 67. In this case, the second winning sound "kyurukuru", which is different from the first winning sound, may be played from the speaker 67, or may not be played.

[Modification 4]
The lyrics image TG (specific image) in the production sound effect production A of FIG. 131(K), the production sound effect production B of FIG. 132(K), and the production sound effect production C of FIG. It was composed of character images and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lyrics image TG (specific image) may be rotated or its size may be increased or decreased. In this way, it is possible to increase variations in the expression method of the lyrics image TG (specific image), and it is also possible to individually emphasize the character images of the lyrics image TG (specific image) that are desired to draw the player's attention.

[Modification 5]
In the production sound effect production A of FIG. 131(K), the production sound effect production B of FIG. 132(K), and the production sound effect production C of FIG. 133(K), the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, An icon 9C was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, when the hold icon 9A exists, it may of course disappear from the display screen 7a. This is because the fluctuation icon 9C is used as a notice (a "change performance" that changes the display mode) for the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display), so it does not necessarily have to continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a. It is from. Further, since the variable display position 9Cd also indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, it does not necessarily have to continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the pending display position 9Ad also indicates the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed. This is because 9A indicates the position where it is displayed (display position), so it does not necessarily have to continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A indicates the number of hold balls that have not yet been used in a game, and therefore needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged as numbers not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, the pending icon 9A can also be deleted from the display screen 7a. As a result, in the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131(K), the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132(K), and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133(K), the display is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the second sound effect. This can contribute to attracting attention to the lyrics image TG displayed.

[Modification 6]
In the production sound effect production A of FIG. 131(L), the production sound effect production B of FIG. 132(L), and the production sound effect production C of FIG. 133(L), the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the fluctuation An icon 9C was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, when the hold icon 9A exists, it may of course disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, only the variable icon 9C among the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, when a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a, the fireball collides with the variable icon 9C, contributing to attracting attention to the change in the variable icon 9C. Note that the variable display position 9Cd indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, so it does not necessarily have to continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the pending display position 9Ad also indicates the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed. Since the icon 9A indicates the display position (display position), it does not necessarily have to continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a, so the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad should be erased from the display screen 7a. be able to. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A indicates the number of hold balls that have not yet been used in a game, and therefore needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged as numbers not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, the pending icon 9A can also be deleted from the display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
In the production sound effect production A of FIGS. 131(I) to (K), the production sound effect production B of FIGS. 132(I) to (K), and the production sound effect production C of FIGS. 133(I) to (K), Two performance sounds (the theme music of the ally character CRA in the sound effect productions A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the production sound effect production B) were being played from the speaker 67. However, the second performance sound may not be played from the speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
In the production sound effect production A of FIGS. 131(I) to (K), the production sound effect production B of FIGS. 132(I) to (K), and the production sound effect production C of FIGS. 133(I) to (K), During the output of the second sound effect (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the sound effect effect B), the third sound effect (the sound effect effect A, The name of the ally character CRA in C and the name of the ally character CRB in sound effect B were played from the speaker 67. However, the third performance sound may not be played from the speaker 67.

[Modification 9]
In the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131(L), the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132(L), and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133(L), the variable icon 9C is changed. However, the variable icon 9C may not change. In this case, the white spherical variation icon 9C has the lowest expectation of winning.

[Modification 10]
In the production sound effect production A of FIG. 131(L), the production sound effect production B of FIG. 132(L), and the production sound effect production C of FIG. 133(L), the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged and displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. was. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish among the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively. In addition, since the display screen 7a is placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed at the rear of the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not obstructed by other images. Ta. In this embodiment, when the production sound effect is started, the specific pending icon 9A having the ally character CRA as the specific icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad. This may cause the player to misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a as a countdown until the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any one of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R) may display a number representing the number of reserved balls as described above. This eliminates the possibility that the number displayed as the number of held balls is misunderstood by the player as a countdown until the specific held icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. The numbers displayed as numerical values can be made difficult to distinguish because they are mixed in with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be made intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 11]
The production sound effect production A in Fig. 131, the production sound effect production B in Fig. 132, and the production sound effect production C in Fig. 133 may not include some of the described productions, or other productions may be added. You can.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D4-1]
A game machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker capable of outputting a plurality of types of performance sounds,
a first performance capable of outputting a first performance sound corresponding to a specific pending icon among the pending icons displayed in connection with the entry of the game ball into the ball entry hole;
After the first performance, it is possible to perform a second performance in which the specific pending icon is displayed as the variable icon and a second performance sound can be output.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1,
Before the second performance, it is possible to perform a third performance in which the second performance sound is output and the output of the second performance sound is stopped until the specific pending icon becomes the variable icon. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1 or aspect D4-2,
In the second performance, a third performance sound can be further output while the second performance sound is being output.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3,
In the second performance, it is further possible to display a specific image related to the second performance sound.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-4,
In the second performance, the specific image can be displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the second performance sound.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-5,
The specific image is composed of a single or multiple character images,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6,
After the second performance, it is possible to execute a fourth performance that changes the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Lyrics image effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 134 to 136. This lyrics image performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute lyrics image production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Lyrics image production A]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining lyrics image production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 134(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9B and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 2nd special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9B and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 2nd special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 134(D), 134(E), and 134(F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display performance is a performance that displays lyrics images on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle performance. As the song progresses, multiple lyrics images will be displayed in sequence. Here, an example will be shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are sequentially displayed as multiple lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 134(D), the lyrics display effect (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (first half), a lyrics image KG1 titled "Romantically" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that since the battle performance continues, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the lyrics display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (mid-term), a lyrics image KG2 titled "Raw" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In particular, the lyrics image KG2 "raw" is a one-character lyrics image, and is larger than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG1 of the lyrics display performance (first half). Furthermore, the lyrics image KG2 titled "Raw" is displayed in a rotated state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(F), the lyrics display effect (second half) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (second half), a lyrics image KG3 titled "Let's come and see" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, the characters that make up the lyrics image KG3 "Let's come and see" are smaller than the characters that make up the lyrics image KG2 of the lyrics display performance (mid-term).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. Note that when the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and a message image saying "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined to stop at "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined to be stopped at "5".

[Lyrics image production B]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining lyrics image production B. Lyrics image performance B is another example of lyrics image performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 135(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9B and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 2nd special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9B and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 2nd special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 135(D), 135(E), and 135(F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display performance is a performance that displays lyrics images on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle performance. As the song progresses, multiple lyrics images will be displayed in sequence. Here, an example will be shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are sequentially displayed as multiple lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(D), the lyrics display effect (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (first half), a lyrics image KG1 titled "Roman" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, the characters "ro" and "ma" constituting the lyrics image KG1 are transparent except for their outlines, and the ally character CRA as a background image is visible. Note that since the battle performance continues, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the lyrics display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (mid-term), a lyrics image KG2 titled "Tick ni" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, a lyrics image KG3 titled "Raw" is displayed. In particular, the characters composing the lyrics image KG2 "Tick ni" are smaller than the characters composing the lyrics image KG1 of the lyrics display production (first half), and after the lyrics image KG2 is displayed, the arrow Y1 Move to the left side of the display screen 7a as shown in . In addition, the lyrics image KG3 "raw" is a one-character lyrics image, which is larger than the characters that make up the lyrics image KG1 of the lyrics display performance (first half). , after being displayed, rotates counterclockwise as shown by arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), the lyrics display effect (second half) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (second half), a lyrics image KG4 titled "Let's come and see" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, the characters that make up the lyrics image KG4, "Let's come and see," are larger than the characters that make up the lyrics image KG2 of the lyrics display performance (mid-term), and are smaller than the letters that make up the lyrics image KG3. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. Note that when the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and a message image saying "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined to stop at "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined to be stopped at "5".

[Lyrics image production C]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining lyrics image production C. Lyrics image production C is another example of lyrics image productions A and B.
First, as shown in FIG. 136(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, three pending images 9B and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 2nd special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4" is shown. In addition, three pending images 9B and the said fluctuation image 9C corresponding to the 2nd special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle performance, if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a win. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 136(D), (E), and (F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display performance is a performance that displays lyrics images on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle performance. As the song progresses, multiple lyrics images will be displayed in sequence. Here, an example will be shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are sequentially displayed as multiple lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the lyrics display effect (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (first half), a lyrics image KG1 titled "Romantically" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that since the battle performance continues, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), a lyrics display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (middle stage), a lyrics image KG2 saying "Let's live" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the lyrics display effect (second half) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (second half), a lyrics image KG3 saying "Let's live" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, the lyric image KG2 "Let's live" displayed in the lyrics display effect (middle period) is gradually enlarged and displayed to become a lyric image KG3. In other words, the lyrics image KG3 is enlarged after being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The victory/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. Note that when the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and a message image saying "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In the confirmed stop production (win), the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left and right have been fixed and stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are determined to stop at "4", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined to be stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of lyrics image production are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when displaying the lyrics "Let's live romantically" as a plurality of lyric images, it is possible to display the sequentially displayed lyric images in various ways (Fig. 134(D)(E)(F), FIG. 135(D)(E)(F), FIG. 136(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the outputted music even more, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to display the lyric image "raw" in a rotated state (FIG. 134(E)). According to this configuration, since a change occurs in the display of the lyrics image, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display lyrics images in various sizes (Fig. 134(D)(E)(F), Fig. 135(D)(E)(F)). ). According to this configuration, since a change occurs in the display of the lyrics image, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display a lyrics image composed of one character (FIGS. 134(E) and 135(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to display the lyrics image with an impact, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyrics image transparently or semi-transparently so that the background image is visible (FIG. 135(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the background image together with the lyrics image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, it is possible to change the aspect of the lyrics image (FIGS. 135(E), 136(E), and (F)). According to this configuration, since a change occurs in the lyrics image after being displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, it is possible to move the lyrics image (FIG. 135(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to display the lyrics image with an impact, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, it is possible to rotate the lyrics image (FIG. 135(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to display the lyrics image with an impact, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, it is possible to change the size of the lyrics image (FIGS. 136(E) and (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to display the lyrics image with an impact, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of lyrics image production is shown.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the display color of the lyrics image may be changed after the lyrics image is displayed. For example, it is conceivable to change the display color of the lyrics image in accordance with the output of the song.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, the displayed lyrics image is rotated around the front and rear directions (Fig. 135 (E)), but for example, it is possible to prepare a three-dimensional lyrics image and rotate it around the vertical or horizontal directions. You can.

[Modification 3]
In the above, an example was given of the performance regarding the second special figure reservation, but it may also be a performance regarding the first special figure reservation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D5-1]
A gaming machine that displays lyrics of a song as a plurality of lyric images in accordance with the output of the song,
When sequentially displaying the plurality of lyric images, it is possible to perform mode display effects for displaying the sequentially displayed lyric images in various modes;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1,
The mode display performance includes a performance that displays the lyrics image in a rotated state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1 or aspect D5-2,
The mode display performance includes a performance that displays the lyrics image in various sizes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-3,
The mode display performance includes a performance that displays the lyrics image composed of one character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-4,
The aspect display performance includes a performance that displays the lyrics image transparently or semi-transparently so that the background image is visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-6]
A gaming machine that displays lyrics of a song as a plurality of lyric images in accordance with the output of the song,
In sequentially displaying the plurality of lyric images, after displaying the lyric image, it is possible to perform a mode change effect that changes the mode of the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-5,
In sequentially displaying the plurality of lyric images, after displaying the lyric image, it is possible to perform a mode change effect that changes the mode of the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-6 or aspect D5-7,
The aspect change production includes a production that moves the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-8,
The aspect change production includes a production that rotates the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-9,
The aspect change production includes a production that changes the size of the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-11]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-10,
The aspect change production includes a production that changes the display color of the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific area variable effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 137 to 139. 137 to 139, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. There are some things that have been omitted.

This specific area variable performance is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific area variable effect is included, the corresponding image is stored from the ROM 103. The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable production start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. The position of 14R and the light emission mode may be changed.

Here, first, specific area variable effect A will be explained, then specific area variable effect B, and then specific area variable effect C will be explained in order.

[Specific area variable effect A]
Specific area variable effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining specific area variable effect A. The specific area variable presentation A is performed during a variable presentation (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each variable region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. .

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 137(A), a flash FH is then emitted from the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 137(B). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8L that are being displayed in a variable manner (variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and pending icon 9A also disappear. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8L, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be displayed. The flashing light FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flashing light FH and its visibility is not obstructed.

Thereafter, when the flash FH gradually disappears from the display screen 7a, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are respectively displayed on the image display device 7 at the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 137(C). Advance (move) from the home position toward the front (front) center center position of the display screen 7a (in a direction approaching each other), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a. , a left side decoration that is half of the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L, and a right side decoration that is half of the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined to form one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). An ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In this direction, the left side movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right side movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are suddenly displayed with the number "1" approaching from the rear to the front of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 137(D), Temporary stop display is performed to form a reach at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in each variable area. At this time, the variable icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a, and the medium decorative pattern 8C remains hidden from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(E), when the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" starts to move downward in its own fluctuation area, the number "2" starts moving from behind the left decorative pattern 8L. "The left decorative pattern 8L appears, and the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" starts moving above its own fluctuation area. On the other hand, when the temporarily stopped and displayed right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" starts to move above its own variable area, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, and the number The right decorative pattern 8R of "2" starts moving downward in its own fluctuation area.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" completes its movement downward to its own variable area and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" When the left decorative pattern 8L has completed its movement above its own variable area and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, each of the left decorative patterns 8L appears independently in its normal size (hereinafter referred to as "normal size"). ) is smaller (for example, about one size smaller). On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" has completed its movement above its own variable area and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" has moved above its own variable area. When the downward movement is completed and the display screen 7a is temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the size is compared with the normal size, similar to the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2". It has become smaller (for example, about one size smaller). As a result, the first reach is formed on the upward-sloping line formed by the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right. , a second reach is formed on a downward-sloping line to the right formed by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right, and a double It becomes a reach.

In FIG. 137(F), a double reach is formed by two left decorative patterns 8L and two right decorative patterns 8R, and if the two left decorative patterns 8L and two right decorative patterns 8R are respectively vertex images, then four A rectangular first specific area is formed by connecting the vertex images. In other words, a first specific area surrounded by four vertex images is formed. When the first specific area is formed, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed again from the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) is performed within the first specific area. Since the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed, it will be visually recognized as an unclear image within the first specific area.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137(G), the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed at the upper left jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a in an arc. When the left decorative pattern 8L starts moving, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" appears from behind the left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" remains in place and is temporarily stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower right jumps out of its own fluctuation area and starts moving toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in an arc, this right decorative pattern 8R The right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" appears from behind, and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" remains in place and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 137(G), the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed at the upper left is switched to the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3", and the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed at the bottom right Since the right decorative pattern 8R has been switched from the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3", the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left and the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left ” left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number “3” temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right, and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number “1” temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper right as the vertex image. Then, a rectangular second specific area is formed by connecting the four vertex images. In other words, a first specific area surrounded by four vertex images is formed. This second specific area has the same size as the first specific area.

The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2", which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left corner, jumps out of its own fluctuation area and starts moving toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a in an arc, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right corner. Since the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" jumps out of its own fluctuation area and starts moving toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in an arc, the left decorative pattern of the number "2" that started moving 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that has started moving are included in the second specific area, the size of the second specific area is compared to the size of the first specific area. It gets bigger.

Since the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C is performed within the first specific area, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C is also continued within the second specific area. . Since the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed, it will be visible as an unclear image even within the second specific area. Note that in the second specific area, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues, but instead of this, the medium decorative pattern 8C may be erased from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(H), the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" jumps out of its own variable area, completes its movement to the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, and temporarily moves to the center of the left side of the display screen 7a. In the stopped display state, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" temporarily stopped is displayed in the upper left, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side, and the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped displayed in the lower left. The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" is smaller than the normal size (for example, about the size of the lid). In other words, it is smaller than when it was a double reach. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" jumps out of its own fluctuation area and completes its movement to the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, it moves downward to the lower right. The right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper right side. 8R is smaller than the normal size (for example, about the size of the lid). In other words, it is smaller than when it was a double reach. As a result, the first reach is formed on the upward-sloping line formed by the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right. , a second reach is formed on a downward-sloping line to the right formed by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right, and the second reach is formed on the left side. A third reach is formed on the horizontal line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side, and a triple reach is formed. becomes.

In FIG. 137(H), a triple reach is formed by three left decorative patterns 8L and three right decorative patterns 8R, and if the three left decorative patterns 8L and three right decorative patterns 8R are respectively vertex images, six A hexagonal third specific area is formed by connecting the vertex images. In other words, a third specific area surrounded by six vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of the first specific area (second specific area) and the third specific area, in FIG. 137(G), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed forms an arc. It jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a as if drawing, and a left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" appears from behind this left decorative pattern 8L, and moves to the left of the number "3". The decorative pattern 8L remains in place and is temporarily stopped, while the temporarily stopped and displayed right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" moves in an arc toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in its own variable area. The right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" remains in place and is displayed as a temporary stop. The size of the No. 3 specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area (second specific area). Although the third specific area has a hexagonal shape when the six vertex images are connected, it actually has a substantially circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape) passing through the six vertex images.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(I), a medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" is displayed in a display mode that approaches the center of the display screen 7a while increasing in size from the rear to the front in the third specific area. appears as a clear image and is displayed temporarily. The size of the clear image that is temporarily stopped and displayed is larger than the normal size (for example, it is about twice as large as the normal size). Then, the temporarily stopped and displayed medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(J), a medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "2" is displayed in a display mode that approaches the center of the display screen 7a while increasing in size from the rear to the front in the third specific area. appears as a clear image and is displayed temporarily. The size of the clear image that is temporarily stopped and displayed is larger than the normal size (for example, it is about twice as large as the normal size). Then, the temporarily stopped and displayed medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "2" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(K), a medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed in the third specific area in a display mode that approaches the center of the display screen 7a while increasing in size from the rear to the front. appears as a clear image and is displayed temporarily. The size of the clear image that is temporarily stopped and displayed is larger than the normal size (for example, it is about twice as large as the normal size).

It should be noted that when the medium decoration pattern 8C of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a, it becomes a disconnection, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific area variable effect A ends. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a again, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Following FIG. 137(K), as shown in FIG. 137(L), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are respectively placed in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Advance (move) from the home position again toward the (front) center advance position (in the direction of approaching each other), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the left side moving position A left side decorative part is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the object 14L, and a right side decorative part is half of the ring-shaped ornamental part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. When combined, the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape. At this time, the three left decorative patterns 8L, the three right decorative patterns 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C disappear from the display screen 7a, while the variable icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a. ing.

When the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, an image display corresponding to a circular area formed within the ring shape On the display screen 7a of the device 7, an ally character CRA is displayed. By the appearance of the left side movable accessory 14L, the right side movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, it is possible to notify the player that a jackpot has been won.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In this direction, the left side movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right side movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific area variable effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are larger than their normal sizes (e.g., they are larger than their normal sizes by about the size of the lid). ) and are placed at the center of each variable area, and the number "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the horizontal line. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "3", and when it is stopped and displayed, it becomes off, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a again, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Following FIG. 137(M), when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the number "3", it becomes a jackpot and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. . When the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When the icon moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Note that a quadruple reach may be formed after a triple reach is formed in FIG. 137(H). In this case, when the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left jumps out of its own fluctuation area and starts moving toward the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a in an arc, this left The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "4" appears from behind the decorative pattern 8L, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "4" remains in place and is temporarily stopped, and the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side. ” starts moving toward the bottom center of the left side. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right corner jumps out of its own fluctuation area toward the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a in an arc and starts moving, this right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops and displays. The right decorative pattern 8R with the number "4" appears from behind the pattern 8R, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "4" remains in place and is temporarily stopped, and the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side. starts moving toward the upper center of the right side.

When the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" jumps out of its own fluctuation area and moves to the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" moves to the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a. The movement is completed to the bottom center of the left side and a temporary stop is displayed. In this state, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left side, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed near the top center of the left side, and the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped displayed near the bottom center of the left side. The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" displayed and the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" temporarily stopped at the lower left are smaller than their normal size (for example, about half a size smaller around the lid). There is. In other words, it is smaller than when it became triple reach. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" jumps out of its own variable area and moves to the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" is displayed. The movement to the upper center of the right side of the screen 7a is completed and a temporary stop is displayed. In this state, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right side, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed on the bottom center of the right side, and the temporary stop displayed on the right side near the top center. The right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" displayed and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" temporarily stopped at the upper right corner are smaller than their normal size (for example, about half a size smaller around the lid). There is. In other words, it is smaller than when it became triple reach. As a result, the first reach is on the first upward-sloping line formed by the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper right. The second reach is formed on the first right-down line formed by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right. On the second upward-right line formed by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the bottom of the center on the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the top of the center of the right side. A third reach is formed, and a second reach is formed by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed near the top of the center on the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed near the bottom of the center of the right side. A fourth reach is formed on the downward-sloping line, making it a quadruple reach.

In this way, a quadruple reach is formed by the four left decorative patterns 8L and the four right decorative patterns 8R, and if the four left decorative patterns 8L and the four right decorative patterns 8R are respectively vertex images, eight vertex images are formed. When tied together, an octagonal fourth specific region is formed. In other words, a fourth specific area surrounded by eight vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of this fourth specific area and the third specific area formed by the triple reach described above, the display screen shows that the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed draws an arc. It jumped out of its own variable area and started moving toward the upper center of the left side of 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "4" appeared from behind this left decorative pattern 8L, and was temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side. The number "2" starts to move toward the bottom of the center of the left side, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" remains in place and is temporarily stopped, while the right decorative pattern of the number "3" that is temporarily stopped is displayed. 8R jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the bottom center of the right side of the display screen 7a in an arc, and a right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R. The number "2" that was temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the right side starts moving toward the top center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" remains in place and is displayed temporarily stopped, so that the fourth specific area The size is larger than that of the third specific area. In other words, the size is determined in the following order: the first specific area (second specific area) formed by double reach, the third specific area formed by triple reach, and the fourth specific area formed by quadruple reach. is getting bigger.

The expected success rate increases in the following order: double reach, triple reach, and quadruple reach. In other words, there are four vertex images in double reach, six vertex images in triple reach, and eight vertex images in quadruple reach, so the higher the number of vertex images, the higher the expectation of winning.

In addition, in the fourth specific area formed by the quadruple reach, a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the medium decorative pattern 8C shown in FIGS. 137(I) to (K), and a variable display is performed as shown in FIG. 137(L). A performance is performed using the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R.

[Specific area variable effect B]
Next, specific area variable effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining specific area variable effect B. The specific area variable performance B is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 138(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each variable region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. .

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 138(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138(B), a circle is displayed in a display mode intruding into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Three shaped effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "round effect images EG") appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other.

Then, the three round effect images EG are moved counterclockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 As shown in FIG. 138(C), the three round effect images EG are taken as vertex images, a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images is formed, and the three round When the effect image EG completes movement a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped, the three round effect images EG emit light at once. As a result, a first specific region having a triangular shape is formed by the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round effect images EG.

In the first specific area, the ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) just before the three round effect images EG emit light all at once. The straight line RG has a blue color, and when creating a clear image (a focused image (an image that is not out of focus)), it is easy to see the boundary line between the inside and outside of the first specific area. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a blue color, and when an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) is to be obtained, the straight line RG has a blue color. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some kind of influence is exerted on a specific area of the screen.

Thereafter, when the three round effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the ambiguous image of the ally character CRA and the three straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(D), an effect image EG having a triangular shape (hereinafter referred to as "triangular effect image EG") is displayed in a display mode that intrudes into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Four appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so that they do not overlap each other. The size of the triangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the round effect image EG, which can contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

The four triangular effect images EG are then moved clockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 138(E), the four triangular effect images EG are taken as vertex images, a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images is formed, and the four triangular When the pattern effect image EG completes movement a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped, the four triangular effect images EG emit light at once. As a result, a second specific area having a quadrangular shape is formed by the four straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area formed in FIG. 138(C). In this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

In the second specific area, just before the four triangular effect images EG emit light all at once, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image). do. The straight line RG has a green color, and when creating a clear image (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)), it is easy to see the boundary line between the inside and outside of the second specific area. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and when an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) is obtained, a second It is possible to realize a display mode in which some kind of influence is exerted on a specific area of the screen. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green, unlike the blue shown in FIG. 138(C), can also contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Thereafter, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the ambiguous image of the ally character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(F), a rectangular effect image EG (hereinafter referred to as a "square effect image EG") is displayed in a display mode that intrudes into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Five appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a so that they do not overlap each other. The size of the rectangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the triangular effect image EG, which can contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the five rectangular effect images EG maintain the positions where the five rectangular effect images EG are arranged, and move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent rectangular effect image EG a predetermined number of times (for example, , 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 138(G), the five rectangular effect images EG are taken as vertex images, a straight line RG connecting the five vertex images is formed, and the five When the rectangular effect image EG completes movement a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the five rectangular effect images EG emit light at once. As a result, a third specific area having a pentagonal shape is formed by the five straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the five rectangular effect images EG. The size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the second specific area formed in FIG. 138(E). In this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to further increasing the expectation of winning for the players.

In this embodiment, there are three vertex images in FIGS. 138(B) and (C), four vertex images in FIGS. 138(D) and (E), and five vertex images in FIGS. 138(F) and (G). As the number of vertex images increases, the sizes of the first to third specific areas become larger.

In the third specific area, just before the five rectangular effect images EG emit light all at once, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)). do. The straight line RG has a red color, and when creating a clear image (a focused image (an image that is not out of focus)), it is easy to see the boundary line between the inside and outside of the third specific area. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and when an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) is obtained, a third It is possible to realize a display mode in which some kind of influence is exerted on a specific area of the screen. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, unlike green in FIG. 138(E), can also contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Thereafter, when the five rectangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the ambiguous image of the ally character CRA and the five straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the third specific area disappears. As a result, specific area variable effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "6", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "5". The variable icon 9C is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific area variable effect C]
Next, specific area variable effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining specific area variable effect C. The specific area variable performance C is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each variable region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. .

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 139(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139(B), a circle is displayed in a display mode intruding into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Three shaped effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "round effect images EG") appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other.

Then, the three round effect images EG are moved counterclockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 As shown in FIG. 139(C), the three round effect images EG are taken as vertex images, a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images is formed, and the three round When the effect image EG completes movement a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped, the three round effect images EG emit light at once. As a result, a first specific region having a triangular shape is formed by the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round effect images EG.

In the first specific area, the ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) just before the three round effect images EG emit light all at once. The straight line RG has a blue color, and when creating a clear image (a focused image (an image that is not out of focus)), it is easy to see the boundary line between the inside and outside of the first specific area. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a blue color, and when an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) is to be obtained, the straight line RG has a blue color. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some kind of influence is exerted on a specific area of the screen.

Thereafter, when the three round effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the ambiguous image of the ally character CRA and the three straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 139(D), an effect image EG (hereinafter referred to as "triangular effect image EG") having a triangular shape in a display mode that enters into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a is displayed. Four appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so that they do not overlap each other. The size of the triangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the round effect image EG, which can contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

The four triangular effect images EG are then moved clockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 139(E), the four triangular effect images EG are taken as vertex images, a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images is formed, and the four triangular When the pattern effect image EG completes movement a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the four triangular effect images EG emit light all at once. As a result, a second specific area having a quadrangular shape is formed by the four straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area formed in FIG. 139(C). In this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

In the second specific area, just before the four triangular effect images EG emit light all at once, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image). do. The straight line RG has a green color, and when creating a clear image (a focused image (an image that is not out of focus)), it is easy to see the boundary line between the inside and outside of the second specific area. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and when an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) is obtained, a second It is possible to realize a display mode in which some kind of influence is exerted on a specific area of the screen. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green, unlike the blue shown in FIG. 139(C), can also contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Thereafter, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the ambiguous image of the ally character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 139(F), a rectangular effect image EG (hereinafter referred to as "square effect image EG") is displayed in a display mode that intrudes into the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Five appear and are temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a so that they do not overlap each other. The size of the rectangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the triangular effect image EG, which can contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the five rectangular effect images EG maintain the positions where the five rectangular effect images EG are arranged, and move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent rectangular effect image EG a predetermined number of times (for example, , 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 139(G), the five rectangular effect images EG are taken as vertex images, a straight line RG connecting the five vertex images is formed, and the five When the rectangular effect image EG completes movement a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the five rectangular effect images EG emit light at once. As a result, a third specific area having a pentagonal shape is formed by the five straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the five rectangular effect images EG. The size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the second specific area formed in FIG. 139(E). In this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to further increasing the expectation of winning for the player.

In this embodiment, there are three vertex images in FIGS. 139(B) and (C), four vertex images in FIGS. 139(D) and (E), and five vertex images in FIGS. 139(F) and (G). As the number of vertex images increases, the sizes of the first to third specific areas become larger.

In the third specific area, just before the five rectangular effect images EG emit light all at once, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image). do. The straight line RG has a red color, and when creating a clear image (a focused image (an image that is not out of focus)), it is easy to see the boundary line between the inside and outside of the third specific area. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and when an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) is to be obtained, a third It is possible to realize a display mode in which some kind of influence is exerted on a specific area of the screen. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, unlike green in FIG. 139(E), can also contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

After that, the five rectangular effect images EG do not simply disappear from the display screen 7a, but fly away in all directions toward the outside of the display screen 7a, causing the length and direction of the straight line RG to change and move into the third specific area. Shape changes. When the five rectangular effect images EG fly away, as shown in FIG. 139(H), the five straight lines RG forming the third specific area form one almost circular shape (shape similar to a circular shape) line RG, and a fourth specific region having a substantially circular shape (a shape similar to a circular shape) is formed. The size of the fourth specific area is larger than the size of the third specific area formed in FIG. 139(G), which contributes to further increasing the player's expectation of winning. can do.

In the fourth specific area, the ally character CRA appears as a clear image (a focused image (an image that is not out of focus)). The color of the straight line RG is inherited as it is and is red, but it may also have yellow (gold). In this way, it is possible to contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

After that, the clear image of the ally character CRA and the substantially circular (similar to circular) line RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the fourth specific area disappears, as shown in FIG. 139(I). As shown in , before the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", five square effect images EG fly away in all directions. One of the rectangular effect images EG becomes larger (approximately four times as large as when displayed in FIGS. 139(F) and (G)) and appears near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a. do. Then, when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", a lightning bolt is emitted from the rectangular effect image EG to the right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R is forcibly changed into a variable effect (fluctuating display). ), the number "6" is temporarily stopped, and a reach is formed. As a result, the specific area variable effect C ends.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139(K), a battle performance is started. The battle performance is a performance in which two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and it is a performance with high expectations for a jackpot. In addition, in the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is displayed. The state is maintained. When a battle performance is being performed, the sword of the ally character CRA is swung down and changes from a white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(L), at the center of the display screen 7a, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are moved to forward positions at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (move toward each other) from the home position again, and attach it to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a. The left side decorative part, which is half of the annular decorative part attached to the ring-shaped decorative part, and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left side movable accessory. One decorative member (combined accessory) having a ring shape is formed by the left side decoration part of 14L and the right side decoration part of right side movable accessory 14R. At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, an image display corresponding to a circular area formed within the ring shape On the display screen 7a of the device 7, an ally character CRA is displayed. By the appearance of the left side movable accessory 14L, the right side movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, it is possible to notify the player that a jackpot has been won.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In this direction, the left side movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right side movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed at the center position of each variable area, and the number "6" is lined up on the horizontal line to display a temporary stop. be done. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "6", and when it is stopped and displayed, it becomes off. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variable icon 9C is reached, a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Following FIG. 139(M), when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the number "6", it becomes a jackpot. When the jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. When the icon moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of specific area variable effects is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A shown in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B shown in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C shown in FIG. 7 (display means), and a medium decorative pattern 8C or an ally character CRA (second 137 (E) to (K) for specific area variable effect A, and 138 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable effect B, specific area In the variable performance C, it is possible to execute (C), (E), (G), (H)) in FIG. 139. According to this configuration, the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area) surrounded by the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) are intentionally formed on the image display device 7 (display means). By displaying the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) in the formed first to third specific areas (specific areas), an unprecedented and novel effect is provided to the player. can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and specific area variable effect C in FIG. ), the sizes of the first to third specific areas (specific areas) become larger. Even if the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) is the same, if the positions where the multiple vertex images (multiple first effect images) are placed differ, the size of the specific area may become smaller. , may become large. For this reason, even if the number of the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) increases, the size of the specific area may become smaller, and there is a possibility that expectations for the effect may decrease. Therefore, when the number of a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) increases, the size of the specific area becomes larger, which can contribute to suppressing the decrease in expectations for the effect. .

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and specific area variable effect C in FIG. ) The expectation of winning increases as the number increases. According to this configuration, by drawing attention to the number of a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), it is possible to clearly emphasize the degree of expectation of winning.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 137 (F) to (K), specific area variable effect B in Figures 138 (C), (E), (G), specific area variable effect C in Figures 139 (C), (E), (G)) , display the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) indistinctly (out of focus image (blurred image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area). It is now possible to do so. According to this configuration, the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (the third specific area) is displayed as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area). 2 effect images) can be displayed to attract attention, allowing the player to imagine what the unclear image looks like, and when other effects are performed afterwards, the unclear image The player can find out the relationship or law between the image and other effects by himself/herself.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 (in the specific area variable effect A, FIGS. 137 (H) to (K), In specific area variable effect C, in FIG. 139(H), after being surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), a specific area (in specific area variable effect A, a third specific area, a specific area variable In production C, when the fourth specific area) is formed in a shape similar to a circular shape, the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second production image) can be clearly seen (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)). )) can be displayed in a specific area. According to this configuration, when the specific area surrounded by the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) is formed as a polygonal area, it is then formed into a shape similar to a circular shape. It draws the player's attention to the change from a straight line to a smooth curve due to the polygon, and changes the image of the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) displayed in a specific area (for example, an unclear It is possible to make it easier to recognize an image (change from an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) to a clear image (in-focus image (out-of-focus image)).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 137 (E), (G), specific area variable effect B in Figures 138 (B), (D), (F), specific area variable effect C in Figures 139 (B), (D), (F)) , a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) can be temporarily stopped and displayed after being moved in a predetermined direction. According to this configuration, after the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) appear, the first effect image surrounded by the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) is moved in a predetermined direction. The specific area to the third specific area (specific area) can be suggested.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139, the first movable accessory that can appear on the near side of the image display device 7 (display means) 14 (movable body), and the first effect (FIGS. 137 (E) to (K) in specific area variable effect A, and FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G) in specific area variable effect C, After (H)), a second effect (specific area variable 137 (L) can be executed in the effect A, and FIG. 139 (L) can be executed in the specific area variable effect C. According to this configuration, the movement of the first movable accessory 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, indicates that it is a jackpot. can be communicated to the player.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the specific area variable effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. . In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138 and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 (C), (E), (G)), the ally character CRA (second effect image) is displayed in an unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) from the first specific area to the third specific area. It was displayed in a specific area (specific area). However, other images may be used instead of the ally character CRA. For example, if there are multiple enemy characters, the first to third specific areas will be displayed in a step-up display mode based on the expected hit rate set for the enemy character fighting against the ally character CRA. They may be displayed in order. In addition, in place of the ally character CRA, an image of an icon that can change the variable icon 9C, an image of an icon that can change the pending icon 9A, an image of an icon that foretells the occurrence of a pseudo-association, and an image of a preview effect. It may also be an image of an icon that foretells the occurrence. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 3]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 (in the specific area variable effect A, the specific area 138 (C), (E), (G) for variable effect B, and FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable effect C), the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (No. 2 effect images) were displayed indistinctly (out-of-focus images (out-of-focus images)) in the first to third specific areas (specific areas). However, certain parts of the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) are made unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) and other parts are made clear (in-focus image (out-of-focus image)). It is also possible to use an image that has not been used)). Further, the sub-control board 90 may independently conduct a lottery, and when a lottery is won, the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) may be made clear. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 4]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. ), after being surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), a specific area (the third specific area in specific area variable effect A, the fourth specific area in specific area variable effect C) becomes a circle. When formed into a shape similar to the shape, the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) was clearly displayed (in-focus image (out-of-focus image)) in a specific area. However, certain parts of the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) are made unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) and other parts are made clear (in-focus image (out-of-focus image)). It is also possible to use an image that has not been used)). Alternatively, the sub-control board 90 may independently conduct a lottery, and if a lottery is won, the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be made unclear. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 5]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 138 (B), (D), (F) for variable effect B, and FIGS. 139 (B), (D), (F) for specific area variable effect C), multiple vertex images (multiple first effects) image) was temporarily stopped and displayed after moving in a predetermined direction. However, the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) may be temporarily stopped and displayed as they are after appearing on the display screen 7a without moving in a predetermined direction. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased. The planned direction may be to move in one direction, move in one direction and then move in the opposite direction, or rotate clockwise or counterclockwise (clockwise). It may be rotated in a direction and then rotated counterclockwise again, it may be rotated counterclockwise and then rotated clockwise again), it may be moved in a zigzag manner, or it may be moved in a zigzag manner, or a combination of these. It may be. Note that the sub control board 90 can perform a lottery independently, and if it wins, it can move in a predetermined direction and then display a temporary stop, or if it loses, it can display a temporary stop.

[Modification 6]
In the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139, the first movable accessory 14 ( 137 (F) to (K) for specific area variable effect A, and 139 (C), (E), (G), (H) for specific area variable effect C. )), a second effect (specific area variable effect A) in which the movable body is moved by erasing the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) and the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) 137(L) in the case of FIG. 137(L), and FIG. 139(L) in the specific area variable effect C). However, since the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) appears on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R respectively appear on the image display device 7. When advancing (moving) from the home position toward the advancing position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), an object that does not appear in the front (front) of the display screen 7a and is on the way It may be arranged to return to the home position again. In this case, the variable effect (fluctuating display) may proceed without the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) and the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) disappearing from the display screen 7a. Become. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 7]
In the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21 was displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish among the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively. In addition, since the display screen 7a is placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed at the rear of the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not obstructed by other images. Ta. In this embodiment, when the specific area variable effect is started, a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This may cause the player to misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a as the number of the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first performance images). Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any one of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R) may display a number representing the number of reserved balls as described above. In this way, there is no possibility that the number displayed as the number of held balls will be misunderstood by the player as the number of the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images). The numbers displayed as numerical values can be made difficult to distinguish because they are mixed in with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be made intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 8]
In specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and specific area variable effect C in FIG. It may be a three-dimensional image. Further, the straight line RG may be a planar image or a three-dimensional image. Further, the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image. Furthermore, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery among these images to determine either a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 9]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 (in the specific area variable effect A, the specific area 138 (C), (E), (G) for variable effect B, and FIGS. 139 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable effect C), the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (No. 2 effect images) were displayed indistinctly (out-of-focus images (out-of-focus images)) in the first to third specific areas (specific areas). However, the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all, or the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g. , 3 seconds) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, the sub control board 90 may independently perform a lottery to determine whether to display or not display the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image). In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 10]
In the specific area variable effect A shown in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B shown in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C shown in FIG. 139, an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image) is used as an unclear image. An image that is out of focus may be expressed as something that undulates and sways like a wave, or as a hazy image that flickers like haze. In this case, it may be a still image or a moving image. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 11]
The specific area variable effect A shown in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B shown in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C shown in FIG. You can.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect capable of displaying a second effect image in a specific area surrounded by a plurality of first effect images can be executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1,
The size of the specific area increases as the number of the plurality of first effect images increases;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2,
The expectation of winning increases as the number of the plurality of first effect images increases,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-3,
In the first effect, the second effect image may be displayed indistinctly in the specific area;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-4,
In the first effect, when the specific area is formed into a shape similar to a circular shape after being surrounded by the plurality of first effect images, the second effect image is clearly displayed in the specific area. In some cases,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-5,
In the first effect, the plurality of first effect images may be temporarily stopped and displayed after being moved in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-6,
It has a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
After the first performance, it is possible to execute a second performance in which the plurality of first performance images and the second performance images are erased and the movable body is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reliability change effects A and B will be explained below using FIGS. 140 to 142. 141 and 142, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. It has since been omitted.

This reliability change effect is performed during a variable effect (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a reliability change effect is included, the corresponding image is extracted from the ROM 103. The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the reliability in single appearance and double appearance of each character appearing in the reliability change performance will be explained, and then the reliability change performance A and the reliability change performance B will be explained in order.

[Reliability of single and double appearances by each character]
The reliability of single appearance and double appearance of each character will be explained with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the reliability in single appearance and double appearance of each character.

In the reliability change performance, multiple balloons covering the card displaying the winning or losing result can be defeated by a character that appears alone, or a specific character can appear in addition to the character that appeared alone to double (jointly) ), and the confidence level, which is the expectation level of a jackpot, is different for each type.

First, "character" includes symbols such as cross marks, circle marks, square marks, heart marks, star marks, etc., as well as balloons, characters, etc. Here, as characters belonging to the first group, These are a cross mark, a circle mark, a square mark, a heart mark, and a star mark, and a balloon is a character that does not belong to the first group.

In addition, the above-mentioned characters that appear alone are characters that belong to the first group, and are the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark.The star mark does not appear alone, and is Double (jointly) with characters that appear in , and destroy multiple balloons (characters that do not belong to the first group).

The reliability when the characters belonging to the first group, such as the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark, appear alone (that is, the reliability when attacking alone) is as shown in FIG. 140(A). 8% are cross marks, 16% are circle marks, 12% are triangle marks, 15% are square marks, and 50% are heart marks.If a heart mark appears alone, the reliability is already high. As much as 50%.

In addition to the single appearance of cross marks, circle marks, triangle marks, square marks, and heart marks, which are characters belonging to the first group, the reliability of the double appearance of the star mark, which is a specific character (i.e., the reliability at the time of double attack) As shown in Figure 140 (B), the reliability of the cross mark is 18% (up 10% from when it was used alone), 23% for the circle mark (up 7% from when it was taken alone), and 42% for the triangle mark (it was increased by 7% from when it was taken alone). (up 30% from the original), square marks by 55% (up 40% from the original), and heart marks by 47% (down 3% from the original). The reliability is 7% to 40% higher when the star mark, which is a specific character, appears double (jointly) than when it appears alone.

On the other hand, when only the heart mark or the star mark, which is a specific character, appears double (jointly), the reliability is 3% lower than when it appears alone. Furthermore, when the heart mark appeared alone, it had the highest reliability, and when the square mark appeared alone, it had the second highest reliability, but when it was double (jointly) with a specific character, the reliability was the highest. When it appears, the reliability of the square mark and the star mark, which is a specific character, is the highest, and the reliability of the heart mark and the star mark, which is a specific character, is the second highest. , the ranking of high reliability is reversed when it appears double (jointly) with a specific character.

In this way, in addition to the single appearance of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark, when the star mark, which is a specific character, appears double (jointly), the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark appear. The reliability is higher than when it appears alone, and as an exception, when only the heart mark or the star mark, which is a specific character, appears double (jointly), it is more reliable when it appears alone. reliability is lower than that of . As a result, the reliability level basically increases when a star mark, which is a specific character, appears, so players can expect the reliability of the performance to increase when a star mark, which is a specific character, appears. It is possible to discover for oneself the relationship and regularity of the expectation level between the individual appearance of marks, triangle marks, square marks, and heart marks, and the star mark, which is a specific character.

[Reliability change performance A]
Next, reliability change effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining reliability change effect A. The reliability change effect A is performed during a variable effect (during a variable display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each variable region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. .

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to the fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 141(A), when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, thereafter, although not shown, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are tentatively made with the same pattern (for example, the number "5"). The display stops and a reach is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 141(B), the reliability change performance A is started, and the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a, and " The message MS "X mark" is displayed. Because this cross mark GZ1 appears alone, the reliability shown in FIG. 140(A) is 8%. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being displayed in a variable manner (variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and pending icon 9A also disappear. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be displayed. Note that here, the variable icon 9C remains a white spherical icon, and there is no change to other icons.

Thereafter, when the cross mark GZ1 and the message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG with the words "Double Attack Chance" flashes in the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 141(C). It emits FH and appears in a blinking manner approaching from the rear to the front. At this time, the flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash FH and visibility is not obstructed. This double attack chance icon TG suggests the appearance of a star mark, which is a specific character, in addition to the cross mark GZ1.

When the double attack chance icon TG blinks and disappears from the display screen 7a while approaching from behind to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 141(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "5", resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. As a result, reliability change performance A ends. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is performed. (Fluctuating display) will start.

On the other hand, following FIG. 141(C), when the double attack chance icon TG approaches the front again from behind while blinking, as shown in FIG. 141(E), the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R appear. advance (move) from their home positions (in the direction of approaching each other) toward the advance position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; position (deployed position)), the left side decoration is half of the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L, and the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The right side decorative part which is half of the part is combined, and the left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape. Ru.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the white spherical variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When a first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the smiling image was displayed on the display screen 7a, the smiling image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction of The object 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 141(F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light FH, and a "star mark" appears on the right side of the star mark GZ2. Message MS is displayed. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 makes it a double (joint) of the cross mark GZ1 and star mark GZ2, and the reliability shown in FIG. 140(B) is 18% (10% higher than when it was alone).

When a second predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) that is longer than the first predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the star mark GZ2 was displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 141(G), A plurality of balloons GZ4 are arranged and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a to appear. At this time, a star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a reliability image KDG indicating reliability is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG shows the reliability that the balloon is destroyed and the winning result displayed on the card is a win due to the double (joint) of the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2 which is a specific character. The reliability image KDG suggests this reliability by ranking it in five stages, and it shows the number of black circle images among the five white circle images, and the number of half black circles and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as "half black circles"). It is suggested by . Here, as the reliability image KDG, "expectation level" is shown in the figure, which means "reliability", and there are three black circle images, and the expectation level (after trust) is in five stages. Of these, it is suggested that it is level 3.

Next, when the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, fires lightning bolts towards multiple balloons GZ4 and starts destroying them, as shown in Figure 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 also emits lightning bolts towards multiple balloons GZ4. Start destroying it.

When multiple balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke from the blast gradually disappears and a card appears, and the winning result displayed on the card is a win, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same. The symbol (number "5") will be stopped and displayed, resulting in a jackpot. As a result, reliability change performance A ends. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C changes to the display screen. It disappears from 7a. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. (Fluctuating display) will start.

On the other hand, when the winning result displayed on the card is a loss, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "6". is stopped and displayed as the number "5", resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. As a result, reliability change performance A ends. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. (Fluctuating display) will start.

In this way, in the reliability change effect A, the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a. At this point, the reliability is 8%. Thereafter, a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light FH. When this star mark GZ2 appears, it becomes a double (joint) of cross mark GZ1 and star mark GZ2. As a result, the reliability has increased to 18% (10% higher than when it was used alone).

[Reliability change effect B]
Next, reliability change effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining reliability change effect B. Reliability change performance B is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 142(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In each variable region extending from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. .

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad, and the second reservation display position 9Ad to fourth reservation No pending icon is displayed at display position 9Ad. In other words, only one pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 142(A), when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, thereafter, although not shown, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are tentatively made with the same pattern (for example, the number "5"). The display stops and a reach is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 142(B), the reliability change effect B is started, and the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a, and this heart mark GZ3 appears alone. By appearing in , the reliability shown in FIG. 140(A) is 50%. A message MS "Heart Mark" is displayed to the right of the heart mark GZ3. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being displayed in a variable manner (variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, and pending icon 9A also disappear. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. The state will be displayed. Here, the changing icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a red smiling spherical icon.

Thereafter, when the heart mark GZ3 and the message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG with the words "Double Attack Chance" appears in the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 142(C). It emits a flash FH and appears in a blinking manner approaching from behind to the front. At this time, the flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash FH and visibility is not obstructed. This double attack chance icon TG suggests the appearance of a star mark, which is a specific character, in addition to the heart mark GZ3.

When the double attack chance icon TG blinks and disappears from the display screen 7a while approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 142(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "5", resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. As a result, reliability change effect B ends. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is performed. (Fluctuating display) will start.

On the other hand, following FIG. 142(C), when the double attack chance icon TG approaches the front again from behind while blinking, as shown in FIG. 142(E), the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R appear. advance (move) from their home positions (in a direction closer to each other) toward the advance position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; position (deployed position)), the left side decoration is half of the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L, and the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The right side decorative part which is half of the part is combined, and the left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R form one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape. Ru.

When the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape becomes a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the variation icon 9C of the red smile sphere disappears from the display screen 7a.

When a first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the smiling image was displayed on the display screen 7a, the smiling image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction of The object 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(F), the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light FH, and to the right of the star mark GZ2 a "star mark" appears. Message MS is displayed. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 makes it a double (joint) of heart mark GZ3 and star mark GZ2, and the reliability shown in FIG. 140(B) is 47% (down 3% from when it was alone).

When a second predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) that is longer than the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the star mark GZ2 was displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 142(G), A plurality of balloons GZ4 are arranged and displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a to appear. At this time, a star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a reliability image KDG indicating reliability is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG shows the reliability that the winning result displayed on the card when the balloon is destroyed is a double (joint action) between the heart mark GZ3 and the specific character star mark GZ2. The reliability image KDG suggests this reliability by ranking it in five stages, and it shows the number of black circle images among the five white circle images, and the number of half black circles and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as "half black circles"). It is suggested by . Here, as the reliability image KDG, "expectation level" is shown in the same figure, but it means "reliability", there are three black circle images, one half black circle, and the expectation level (after trust) ) is level 3.5 out of 5 levels, suggesting that it is an intermediate level between level 3 and level 4.

Next, when the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, fires lightning bolts toward multiple balloons GZ4 and starts destroying them, as shown in FIG. 142(H), heart mark GZ3 also fires lightning bolts toward multiple balloons GZ4. Shoot it and start destroying it.

When multiple balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke from the blast gradually disappears and a card appears, and the winning result displayed on the card is a win, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same. The symbol (number "5") will be stopped and displayed, resulting in a jackpot. As a result, reliability change effect B ends. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable effect (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C changes to the display screen. It disappears from 7a. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is performed. (Fluctuating display) will start.

On the other hand, when the winning result displayed on the card is a loss, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "6". is stopped and displayed as the number "5", resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. As a result, reliability change effect B ends. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. (Fluctuating display) will start.

In this way, in the reliability change performance B, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears alone. At this point, the reliability is 50%. Thereafter, a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a with a flash of light FH. When this star mark GZ2 appears, it becomes a double (joint) of heart mark GZ3 and star mark GZ2. As a result, the reliability is 47% (down 3% from when it was used alone).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the reliability change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, for example, in reliability change performance A in FIG. 141 and reliability change performance B in FIG. When the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed after GZ1 (first image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is higher (confidence level is 18% (10% increase from when it was alone)) , when the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is displayed and the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning becomes lower (reliability is 47% (3% lower than when alone) )) Execute the first performance (FIGS. 141 (A) to (C) and (D) for reliability change performance A, and FIGS. 142 (A) to (C) and (D) for reliability change performance B) It is now possible to do so. According to this configuration, even if the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning may be changed to be higher or lower, so that the expectation of winning may be changed to star. It is possible to provide the player with an innovative performance that changes depending on the combination with the mark GZ2 (second image). Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in reliability change performance A in FIG. 141 and reliability change performance B in FIG. image), after displaying the fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, hide the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or heart mark GZ3 (third image), and then display the fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd. Of the icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd can be hidden. According to this configuration, even when the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) changes from a displayed state to a hidden state, the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the variable icon 9C changes to another icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the reliability change performance A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change performance B in FIG. An attack chance icon TG (specific image) can be displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the double attack chance icon TG (specific image), it is possible to contribute to increasing the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) will be displayed.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in reliability change performance A in FIG. 141 and reliability change performance B in FIG. 142, the first movable accessory that can appear on the near side of the image display device 7 (display means) 14 (movable object), and in the first performance, the first movable accessory 14 (movable object) can be moved as a suggestion of the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). . According to this configuration, the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) will be displayed due to the movement of the first movable accessory 14 (movable object), that is, the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, is created. can contribute to increasing the

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142, in addition to the star mark GZ2 (second image), a plurality of A second effect (confidence change effect A) that displays balloon GZ4 (fourth image) and further displays confidence image KDG (image of expectation of winning) based on star mark GZ2 (second image). In FIG. 141(E) and reliability change effect B, FIG. 142(E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to clearly emphasize to the player the suggestion that the performance is to be started using the star mark GZ2 (second image) and the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image). Furthermore, since the reliability image KDG (image of the expectation of winning) is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the reliability of this performance.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the reliability change performance A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change performance B in FIG. 142, in addition to the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image), When GZ1 (first image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) are displayed, or when heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) are displayed There are cases. According to this configuration, since the double (joint) effect is developed by the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image), in addition to the cross mark GZ1 (first image), Furthermore, the involvement of the star mark GZ2 (second image) in the production can contribute to making the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) complement each other, and also , Since the double (joint) production is developed by heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image), in addition to heart mark GZ3 (third image), there is also a star mark The involvement of GZ2 (second image) in the production can contribute to making heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) complement each other.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. , triangle mark, square mark, heart mark, and star mark (multiple characters), excluding the star mark (first character) and heart mark (second character), cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark (other characters) The star mark GZ2 (second image) is a star mark (first character), the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is a heart mark (second character), The plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group. According to this configuration, before the star mark (first character) which is the second image is displayed, one of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark and square mark (other characters) is displayed as the first image. When one of the characters is displayed, the expectation of winning is changed to high, but before the second image of the star mark (first character) is displayed, the third image is displayed. When a certain heart mark (second character) is displayed, the expectation of winning is changed to lower, and the first character, second character, and other characters belong to the same first group. However, before the second image of the star mark (the first character) is displayed, you can now change your expectation of winning depending on what character is displayed. There is. Furthermore, although the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group, they can contribute to the player discovering the relevance with the characters belonging to the first group.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the reliability change effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The reliability change performance A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change performance B in FIG. 142 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In reliability change performance A in Figure 141 and reliability change performance B in Figure 142, the characters belonging to the first group were a cross mark, a circle mark, a triangle mark, a square mark, a heart mark, and a star mark. Alternatively, it may be a character. For example, as characters belonging to the first group, ally character A replaces the cross mark, ally character B replaces the circle mark, ally character C replaces the triangle mark, ally character D replaces the square mark, and ally character D replaces the heart mark. The ally character E is marked as an ally character, and the ally character F is marked as a star mark. In this case, if the reliability of each character is the same as in FIGS. 140(A) and (B), after the ally character A (first image) replaced from the cross mark GZ1 is displayed, the ally character replaced from the star mark GZ2 When character F (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is high (reliability is 18% (10% increase from when alone)), and when character F (second image) is displayed, ally character E (third image), who replaced heart mark GZ3, When the image) is displayed and then the ally character F (second image), which was replaced from the star mark GZ2, is displayed, the expectation of winning becomes lower (reliability is 47% (3% lower than when alone)) . In this way, you can increase the variety of performances.

Further, although a balloon is used as a character that does not belong to the first group, a different character that belongs to the first group may be used instead. In this case, there may be multiple characters. For example, assume that enemy character A, enemy character B, enemy character C, enemy character D, and enemy character E are characters that do not belong to the first group. Then, a performance is performed in which ally character A is associated with enemy character A, a performance is performed in which ally character B is associated with enemy character B, a performance is performed in which ally character C is associated with enemy character C, A performance is performed in which an ally character D and an enemy character D are associated with each other, and a performance is performed in which an ally character E is associated with an enemy character E. If the reliability levels in this case are the same as those in FIGS. 140(A) and (B), ally character F will appear as a double (joint) with ally characters A to E and repel the enemy character. As a result, ally character A (first image), which has been replaced from cross mark GZ1, is displayed, and after that, an effect that associates ally character A (first image) with enemy character A (fourth image) is performed. When ally character F (second image), which I replaced from star mark GZ2, is displayed, the expectation of winning becomes higher (reliability is 18% (10% up from when alone)), and from heart mark GZ3 After the replaced ally character E (third image) is displayed, an effect is performed that associates the ally character E (third image) with the enemy character E (fourth image), and from the star mark GZ2 When the substituted ally character F (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning becomes lower (reliability is 47% (down 3% from when alone). In this way, you can increase the variety of performances.

[Modification 3]
In reliability change effect A in FIG. 141(C) and reliability change effect B in FIG. 142(C), a double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is displayed as a suggestion for displaying the star mark GZ2 (second image). Was. However, the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is not displayed, and the left decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L is The right decorative part of the right side movable accessory 14R may form one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape. This can be determined by a unique lottery by the sub-control board 90. This allows for increased variations in performance.

[Modification 4]
In the reliability change performance A shown in FIG. 141(D) and the reliability change performance B shown in FIG. Two decorative members (combined ornaments) were formed. However, the decorative member (combined accessory) may not be formed. This can be determined by a unique lottery by the sub-control board 90. This allows for increased variations in performance.

[Modification 5]
In reliability change performance B in FIG. 142(B), the variation icon 9C has changed from a white spherical icon to a red smiling spherical icon. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be made larger by a predetermined time (for example, about 5 to 8 times) as compared to the size of the white spherical icon. In this way, the change in the fluctuation icon 9C can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

[Modification 6]
In reliability change performance A in FIG. 141 and reliability change performance B in FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the ball was displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish among the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively. In addition, since the display screen 7a is placed at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed at the rear of the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not obstructed by other images. Ta. In the present embodiment, when the reliability change effect is started, a reliability image KDG showing the reliability in five levels at which the winning result displayed on the card after blowing up the balloon is a win is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. displayed on the side. As a result, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a as the reliability indicated in the five levels. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, any one of the sub display screens 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) (for example, The right sub-display screen 64R) may display a number representing the number of reserved balls as described above. By doing this, there is no risk that the number displayed as a numerical value representing the number of held balls will be misunderstood by the player as a level of reliability, and furthermore, the number displayed as a numerical value representing the number of held balls will It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the screen 7a, and to make it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 7]
In reliability change effect A in FIG. 141(H) and reliability change effect B in FIG. 142(H), the fluctuation icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed and reappeared on the display screen 7a. In this case, the star mark GZ2, which is the character, fires lightning bolts towards the plurality of balloons GZ4 and starts destroying them, and furthermore, in the reliability change effect A of Fig. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 also shoots lightning bolts towards the plurality of balloons GZ4. In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning bolts toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 and starts destroying them, so the display mode of the variable icon 9C is as follows. For example, a moving image may be displayed in which the ball shrinks and expands vertically as if bouncing up and down, or a moving image may be displayed in which the ball rotates round and round. In this way, it is possible to contribute to improving the presentation effect of the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In reliability change effect A in FIG. 141(H) and reliability change effect B in FIG. 142(H), the fluctuation icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed and reappeared on the display screen 7a. In this case, the star mark GZ2, which is the character, fires lightning bolts towards the plurality of balloons GZ4 and starts destroying them, and furthermore, in the reliability change effect A of Fig. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 also shoots lightning bolts towards the plurality of balloons GZ4. In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning bolts toward multiple balloons GZ4 and begins to destroy them, so the variable icon 9C is the same as multiple balloons GZ4. It may also be configured to collide with and explode toward the balloon, thereby contributing to the destruction of multiple balloons GZ4. In this way, in addition to the two characters, the variable icon 9C can be used to destroy a plurality of balloons GZ4, thereby providing the player with an even more impressive performance of destroying a plurality of balloons GZ4. In addition, by contributing to the destruction of the plurality of balloons GZ4 by the variable icon 9C, it is possible to give the player the impression that the level of trust has further increased, contributing to an improvement in the production effect. Can be done.

[Modification 9]
The reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142 may not include some of the effects described, or may include other effects.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed, the expectation of winning is high, and when the third image is displayed and then the second image is displayed, the expectation of winning is high. It is possible to execute the first performance in which the expectation level of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-1,
In the first effect, when displaying the first image or the third image, the variable icon is displayed at the variable display position, and then the first image or the third image is hidden. and further, hiding the said variable display position among the said variable icon and the said variable display position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-1 or aspect D7-2,
In the first effect, a specific image can be displayed as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine with this feature.

◇[Aspect D7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-3,
It has a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
In the first performance, the movable body can be operated as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-4,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect that displays a fourth image in addition to the second image, and further displays an image of the expectation of winning based on the second image. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-5,
In the second effect, in addition to the fourth image, the first image and the second image are displayed, or the third image and the second image are displayed. may be done,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-6,
The first image is a character other than the first character and the second character among the plurality of characters belonging to the first group,
the second image is the first character,
the third image is the second character,
the fourth image is a character that does not belong to the first group;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The item superimposition effect will be explained below using FIGS. 143 to 145. This item superimposition effect may be executed during the special symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, moves the third movable accessory 13, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. This is a performance made possible by this.

[Item superimposition effect A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining item superimposition effect A. In this item superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern presentation, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, face image XG1 is displayed. This face image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a predetermined item. The glasses image XG11 is displayed with the portion corresponding to each lens being transmitted through.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), a moving effect of the item accessory is performed. In this item accessory movable production, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position, and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image 3. Form the movable accessory 13. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be one size larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item accessory movable performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion of the third movable accessory 13 that corresponds to the lens is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed, but the glasses image XG11 is erased from the face image XG1, and the eye image that is hidden behind the glasses image XG11 is displayed.

[Item superimposition effect B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining item superimposition effect B. In this item superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 144(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern presentation, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, face image XG1 is displayed. This face image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a predetermined item. The glasses image XG11 is displayed with the portion corresponding to the lens being transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), a moving effect of the item accessory is performed. In this item accessory movable production, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position, and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image 3. Form the movable accessory 13. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be one size larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item accessory movable performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion of the third movable accessory 13 that corresponds to the lens is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, character XG2 is displayed at the position where face image XG1 was displayed.

[Item superimposition effect C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining item superimposition effect C. In this item superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 145(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern presentation, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. Further, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, face image XG1 is displayed. This face image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a predetermined item. The glasses image XG11 is displayed with the portion corresponding to each lens being transmitted through.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), a moving effect of the item accessory is performed. In this item accessory movable production, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R move from the retracted position to the deployed position, and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image 3. Form the movable accessory 13. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be one size larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item accessory movable performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The portion of the third movable accessory 13 that corresponds to the lens is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), item accessory transparent effect 1 is performed. In this item transparency effect 1, on the main display screen 7a, the eye is displayed on the part corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13, and the lens part of the third movable accessory 13 is made transparent so that the player can see the eye. 3. The eyes of the face image XG1 are made visible through the movable accessory 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), item accessory transparent presentation 2 is performed. In this item transparency effect 2, on the main display screen 7a, the characters "geki" and "heat" are displayed on the part corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13, and the lens part of the third movable accessory 13 is made transparent. The characters are made visible to the player through the third movable accessory 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, character XG2 is displayed at the position where face image XG1 was displayed.

[Modified example]
In the item superimposition effect described above, glasses are used as the item, and the third movable accessory 13 representing the glasses is moved to the position of the glasses image XG11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other items may also be used. You can. For example, a mask may be used as the item, and the third movable accessory 13 representing the mask may be moved to the position of the mask image to perform a similar effect to the item superimposition effect.
In the item superimposition effect, the item image display effect displays the part of the glasses image characters such as ) may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the item superimposition effect, a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as an item is displayed, and then the third movable accessory 13 representing glasses is moved to the deployed position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11, and then a predetermined position is displayed. A performance (super reach performance) will be performed. According to this configuration, a three-dimensional eyeglass image can be delivered to the player by the eyeglass image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13, and a dynamic display effect can be realized. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the above item superimposition effect, the glasses image XG11 is displayed, and then the third movable accessory 13 representing glasses is moved to the deployed position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11, and then the third movable accessory 13 After returning to the retreat position (home position), a character XG2 that performs a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is displayed at the position where the glasses image XG11 was displayed. According to this configuration, a three-dimensional glasses image can be delivered to the player by the glasses image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13, it is possible to realize a dynamic display performance, and the third movable accessory After 13 returns to the retreat position, the character XG2 that performs the super reach effect is displayed instead of the glasses image XG11, so it is possible to provide a fast-paced effect and give the player a sense of exhilaration. . As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the item superimposition performance, the third movable accessory 13 includes the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory 13R, and in the item accessory movable performance, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory It moves to the expanded position with the object 13R and is combined with the object 13R on the glasses image XG11. According to this configuration, a more three-dimensional glasses image can be delivered to the player by the glasses image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13, and a dynamic display effect can be realized. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing multiple performances,
A first performance may be performed as one of the plurality of performances,
A second performance may be performed as one of the multiple performances,
A third performance may be performed as one of the multiple performances,
The first performance is a performance that displays a first image representing a predetermined item on a display means,
The second performance is a performance that moves a movable accessory representing the predetermined item to a developed position on the first image,
The third performance is a performance in which a predetermined display performance is performed on the display means,
performing a combination performance including the first performance, the second performance, and the third performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
In the combination performance, the first performance is performed, then the second performance is performed, and then the third performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
A fourth performance may be performed as one of the multiple performances,
The fourth performance is a performance that moves the movable accessory from the deployed position to the basic position,
The combination performance may include the fourth performance,
In the combination effect, the fourth effect is performed after the second effect, the third effect is performed after the fourth effect, and in the third effect, the display means a second image in the predetermined performance is displayed in place of the first image displayed at a position corresponding to the deployed position of the movable accessory;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
The movable accessory includes a first accessory and a second accessory,
The movable accessory represents one accessory by combining the first accessory and the second accessory,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination performance, in the second display performance, the first character object and the second character object of the movable character object are moved to the developed position on the first image, and the first combining the accessory and the second accessory at the expanded position;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The movable accessory decoration light emitting effect will be explained below using FIGS. 146 to 148. In FIGS. 146 to 148, for example, the second movable accessory 15 and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

This movable accessory decorative light emitting performance can be executed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a movable accessory decoration light emitting effect is included, the ROM 103 executes a corresponding command. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic board will be explained, and the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect by the first movable accessory 14 will be explained in order.

[Game board 2 formed from a transparent acrylic board]
First, the game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate will be explained with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate. FIG. 147 is a continuation of the explanation of the game board 2 formed from the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIG. 146.

As shown in FIG. 146(A), the game board 2 is composed of a transparent acrylic plate 2z, and a plurality of game nails etc. are provided on the front surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z protruding into the game area 3. (planted), and the first movable accessory 14, image display device 7, etc. are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. A through hole is formed approximately in the center of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the image display device 7 is arranged at a position corresponding to this through hole. The first movable accessory 14 is arranged in a space between the transparent acrylic plate 2z and the image display device 7, and when it is in a standby state at the home position, the front side is covered with the transparent acrylic plate 2z. , when it is in a state of advancing toward the center of the display screen 7a, it appears in front (front) of the image display device 7, and is not covered by the transparent acrylic plate 2z due to the opening in the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Although the first movable accessory 14 is placed behind the transparent acrylic board 2z, since the transparent acrylic board 2z is transparent, even when the first movable accessory 14 is waiting at the home position, the center of the display screen 7a It is said that it is easy to see even when moving towards the front. Note that the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic board 2z has the same structure as the game board 2 described above except for having the transparent acrylic board 2z, and the explanation thereof will be omitted here.

Although not shown, the first movable accessory 14 includes a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted, an inner lens is arranged to cover the front of the decorative board, and the inner lens and the decorative board are accommodated by the decorative member. has been configured. An opening is formed in the decorative member, and the inner lens is exposed through this opening. The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from the plurality of full-color LEDs, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative substrate placed behind the inner lens. For this reason, even when all of the plurality of full-color LEDs are turned off, it is difficult to see the plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or semitransparent. The light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board passes through the inner lens and is irradiated forward (hereinafter referred to as "the first movable accessory 14 emits light").

A transparent acrylic plate 2z is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14, so when the first movable accessory 14 emits light, the light passes through the transparent acrylic plate 2z and goes to the front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z. It will be irradiated. As a result, the game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 that corresponds to the front of the first movable accessory 14, and the game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 that does not correspond to the front of the first movable accessory 14. In comparison, the game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14 is brightly illuminated and is easily visible.

In addition, a plurality of game nails etc. are protruded (planted) on the front surface of the transparent acrylic board 2z, and when the first movable accessory 14 emits light, the game nails are brightly illuminated by the light, so the game ball It is possible to clearly emphasize to the player the passage through which the water flows down.

Here, a state in which the first movable accessory 14 is on standby at the home position will be described. As described above, the first movable accessory 14 includes the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and have half of the ring-shaped decoration part (left side decoration part and right side decoration part) attached to the tip side. . In other words, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half an annular shape.

The first movable accessory 14 is in a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 146(B), the left side movable accessory 14L waiting at the home position has a left decorative part having an arc shape that is half an annular shape, and rotates with the center point of the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the arc on the arc. At the center point LKP, the rotational center point LKP on this arc is further divided into an upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, and the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU rotates counterclockwise. The lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD rotates clockwise, and the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD are in an open state of approximately 180 degrees.

When the left side movable accessory 14L starts moving toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU rotates clockwise at the rotation center point LKP on the arc, and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU rotates clockwise. The movable accessory 14LD rotates counterclockwise and becomes a left side decorative part having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape, and then advances toward the center of the display screen 7a.

As shown in the figure, the right side movable accessory 14R waiting at the home position has a right decorative part having an arc shape that is half an annular shape, and the center point of the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the arc is on the arc, and the rotation center point RKP At the rotation center point RKP on this arc, it is further divided into an upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and a lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, and the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU rotates clockwise. , the lower arc-shaped right side movable accessory 14RD rotates counterclockwise and becomes open approximately 180 degrees.

When the right movable accessory 14R starts advancing toward the center of the display screen 7a, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU first rotates counterclockwise at the rotation center point RKP on the arc, and the lower arc-shaped movable accessory 14RU rotates counterclockwise. The right side movable accessory 14RD rotates clockwise and becomes a right side decorative part having an arc shape that is half an annular shape, and then advances toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the left side movable accessory 14L waiting at the home position emits light, the light is emitted by the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD at approximately 180 degrees. While in the open state, the front corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD is brightly illuminated.

When the right side movable accessory 14R waiting at the home position emits light, the light is emitted from the upper arc-shaped right side movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right side movable accessory 14RD, which are separated by almost 180 degrees. In this state, the front corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD is brightly illuminated.

As mentioned above, the game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side, and the game ball is placed so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A. The hitting method in which the ball is fired is called "left-handed hitting," and the hitting method in which the game ball is fired so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting."

When the left side movable accessory 14L is on standby at the home position, as shown in FIGS. 147(D) and (E), when the left side movable accessory 14L emits light, the left side movable accessory 14L has an upper arc shape and a lower arc shape When the left side movable accessory 14LD emits light, the light is emitted from the front area (hereinafter referred to as "left-handed hitter") corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD in the left gaming area 3A. This will brightly illuminate the side light emitting area 3AF. As a result, in the left game area 3A, a game ball flowing down the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF and a game ball flowing down other areas in the left game area 3A excluding the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF are compared. The game ball flowing down the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF is brightly illuminated and can be easily recognized.

In addition, since a plurality of game nails (indicated by small circles in the diagram) are protruded (planted) in the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, the left-side movable accessory 14L emits light. In other words, when the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, the game nail in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF is brightly illuminated by the light, so that the passage along which the game ball flows down is brightly illuminated. can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner to players. In addition, when the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD emits light within the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, in addition to game nails, a so-called windmill is also placed in the area that is brightly illuminated by the light. Rotation can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. Windmills are as important to players as game nails because the rolling direction of the game ball toward the first starting port 20 changes depending on the rotation direction and rotation speed.

When the right side movable accessory 14R is on standby at the home position, as shown in the figure, when the right side movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD When the light is emitted, the light is emitted from the area in front of the right game area 3B corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD (hereinafter referred to as "right-handed side light emitting area 3BF"). ) will be brightly illuminated. As a result, when comparing the game balls flowing down the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF in the right side game area 3B and the game balls flowing down other areas in the right side game area 3B excluding the right side side light emitting area 3BF, The game ball flowing down the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF is brightly illuminated and can be easily recognized.

In addition, since a plurality of game nails (indicated by small circles in the diagram) are protruded (planted) in the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF, the right-side movable accessory 14R emits light. Then, the game nail in the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF is brightly illuminated by the light, so that the path along which the game ball flows can be clearly emphasized to the player. Specifically, when the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU emits light within the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, no game nails are projected (planted) in the area that is brightly illuminated by the light, and the center decoration is The path along which the game ball flows down along the right side of the body 10 can be clearly emphasized to the player. When the lower arc-shaped right side movable accessory 14RD emits light within the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, a plurality of game nails and the like are protruded (planted) in the area that is brightly illuminated by the light. The path through which the game ball flows down can be clearly highlighted to the player by being brightly illuminated.

In FIG. 147(E), at the home position, the left side movable accessory 14L can emit light, and the right side movable accessory 14R can emit light, so regardless of whether the player is hitting left-handed or right-handed, The side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated, as if an illuminated decorative member was placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an illuminated decorative member was placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z). (fixed), and it is now possible to realize an expression in which a light emitting effect is performed using an illuminated decorative member. In other words, it is possible to provide the same light emitting effect as the illumination decoration member without providing the illumination decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Of course, the light emission modes of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R include lighting, gradation lighting, blinking, and the like. In addition, there is an effect in which the left side movable accessory 14L emits light and the right side movable accessory 14R goes out, so that only the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF is brightly illuminated, and the left side movable accessory 14L goes out and the right side movable accessory 14R lights up. There is an effect in which the object 14R emits light and only the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF is brightly illuminated, and the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are turned off and the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF and the right side light-emitting area 3AF are lit. There is an effect in which the hitting side light emitting area 3BF is turned off.

[Movable accessory decoration light emitting production by the first movable accessory 14]
Next, the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect by the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory decorative light emitting effect (hereinafter referred to as a "movable accessory decorative light emitting effect") by the first movable accessory 14. The movable accessory decoration light emitting performance is performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In FIG. 148(A), in a state where the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern has started and the movable accessory decoration light emitting performance has started, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are waiting at their home positions. In this case, when playing a left-handed game or a right-handed game, for example, as shown in the figure, the left side movable accessory 14L emits light and the right side moves. In the state where the movable accessory 14R is off, when the left side movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, and the light is emitted from the left side movable accessory 14L. Of the area 3A, the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD, is brightly illuminated, excluding the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF. The left game area 3A is not brightly illuminated and is darker than the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF. On the other hand, since the right side movable accessory 14R is turned off, the entire right game area 3B is not brightly illuminated by the right side movable accessory 14R and becomes dark.

In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at their home positions, when a game is played by left-handed players, or when a game is played by right-handed players. For example, in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light. The light brightly illuminates the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD in the left gaming area 3A. Therefore, the left game area 3A excluding the left-handed player side light emitting area 3AF is not brightly illuminated and becomes darker compared to the left-handed player side light emitting area 3AF. When the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emit light, and the light is transmitted to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory in the right game area 3B. The right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF, which is the area in front of the accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, is brightly illuminated, and the right-hand game area 3B excluding the right-hander side light-emitting area 3BF is not brightly illuminated, It is darker than the striking side light emitting area 3BF.

In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at their home positions, when a game is played by left-handed players, or when a game is played by right-handed players. For example, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are turned off, the entire left gaming area 3A is not brightly illuminated by the left side movable accessory 14L and becomes dark. The entire right game area 3B is not brightly illuminated by the right movable accessory 14R and becomes dark.

In this way, when playing a game by left-handed players or playing a game by right-handed players, the left movable accessory 14L can emit light and the right movable accessory 14R can emit light at the home position. As a result, the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated, as if the illumination decorative member was placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the transparent acrylic plate An illumination decoration member is fixed to the rear of 2z), and it is possible to realize an expression in which a light emitting effect is performed by the illumination decoration member. In other words, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect equivalent to that of an illuminated decorative member without providing an illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Next, from the state where the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are waiting at their home positions, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are moved to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively. In a state in which the players advance (move) from the home position toward the center advancing position (in a direction approaching each other), when playing a game with left-handed players or when playing a game with right-handed players, as shown in FIG. 148 ( As shown in B), at the front (front) central position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the left side decoration is half of the annular decoration attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L. and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) in which the decorative part and the decorative part have an annular shape is formed.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area.

At this time, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have already advanced (moved) from their home positions toward the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other). It has become. Therefore, even if the left side movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, the light will be transmitted to the left side of the left gaming area 3A. The left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD, is not brightly illuminated, and is transparent at the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The light is irradiated forward without passing through the acrylic plate 2z. Furthermore, even if the right side movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emit light, the light will be emitted from the upper part of the right game area 3B. The transparent acrylic light is not brightly illuminated on the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF, which is the front area corresponding to the arc-shaped right side movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right side movable accessory 14RD, and the transparent acrylic is placed at the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The light is irradiated forward without passing through the plate 2z.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward the advancing position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other). Since the performance suggests the start of a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, the player should move the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R to the forward center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a. When you see them advance (move) from their home positions toward (in a direction closer to each other), your expectations for the performance that will take place will increase.

In this way, when playing a left-handed game or a right-handed game, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are moved from the state where they are waiting at their home positions. In a state in which the movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward the front (front) center center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in the direction of approaching each other), the movable accessory on the left side Even if the accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R emit light, they do not brightly illuminate the left-handed player side light emitting area 3AF and the right-handed player side light emitting area 3BF.

In addition, when the illumination decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, when the illumination decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), the illumination decoration member Even when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), Although it is possible to do so, in this case, there is a risk that the attention will be shifted to the light emitting effect by the illumination decorative member and it will not be possible to emphasize the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are respectively displayed from the state where the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are waiting at their home positions. In a state in which the screen 7a advances (moves) from the home position toward the forward position at the center of the front (front) (in a direction in which they approach each other), even if the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, the left Since the hitting side light emitting area 3AF and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF are not brightly illuminated, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move toward the advancing position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R can be emphasized by drawing the player's attention to the state in which they have advanced (moved) from the home position (in a direction closer to each other).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect using the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate and the first movable accessory 14 will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decoration light emitting performance shown in FIG. 148, the transparent acrylic board 2z (transparent The game board 2 has a transparent acrylic board 2z (transparent part) and has a plurality of game nails protruding from the front surface of the transparent acrylic board 2z (transparent part). A plurality of possible left side movable accessories 14L (movable bodies) are arranged (right side movable accessory 14R in addition to the left side movable accessory 14L), and the left side movable accessory 14L (movable body) is made of a transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). When the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light while the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is waiting at the home position, the game area corresponding to the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) The first effect (FIG. 147(E), FIG. 148(A)) that illuminates the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) of 3 can be executed. According to this configuration, since the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is brightly illuminated, it is as if the illumination decorative member is placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an electric decoration is placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z). (the decorative decorative member is fixed), and it is possible to realize an expression in which a light emitting effect is performed by the electric decorative member. In other words, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect equivalent to that of an illuminated decorative member without providing an illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect shown in FIG. 148, when the left side movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light, The game ball flowing down the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) flows down the left-handed game area 3A (area) excluding the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF that is not illuminated by the light emission of the left side movable accessory 14L (movable body). It is easier to see than a game ball. According to this configuration, the left-hand side movable accessory 14L (movable body) brightly illuminates the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area), so that the game ball flowing down the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) This can contribute to emphasizing the trend of change. Furthermore, when adjusting the firing strength of the game ball, when the player operates the handle 60, the player can easily see the rolling direction of the game ball depending on the strength of the firing strength, making it easier to adjust the firing strength. can contribute to this.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect shown in FIG. 148, when the left side movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light, A game nail protruding (planted) in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is illuminated. According to this configuration, it is possible to clearly emphasize the path along which the game ball flows down to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect shown in FIG. 148, the left side of the game area 3 is It has a left game area 3A (first downstream area) where the ball flows down, and a right game area 3B (second downstream area) where the game ball flows down the right side of the game area 3. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R (movable bodies) that are arranged include one that illuminates the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first downstream area), and one that illuminates the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first downstream area), There is one that illuminates the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the area 3B (second downstream area), and the other that illuminates the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area). According to this configuration, it is possible to brightly illuminate the game ball flowing down the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF of the left-handed game area 3A and make it easy to see, and of the right-handed game area 3B, the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF can be brightly illuminated. The falling game balls can be brightly illuminated to make them easily visible.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and in the first performance in the movable accessory decoration light emitting performance shown in FIG. When a movable body such as the left side movable accessory 14L or the right side movable accessory 14R emits light while playing a left-handed game (first game) that flows down to the left game area 3A (first The left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the downstream area) and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right gaming area 3B (second downstream area) may be illuminated. According to this configuration, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R emit light while playing left-handed (first game), the left side in the left game area 3A (first downstream area) The hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right gaming area 3B (second downstream area) can be illuminated and brightened. In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L emits light and the right side movable accessory 14R goes out while playing left-handed (first game), the left side movable accessory 14L lights up and the right side movable accessory 14R goes out. The left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) can be illuminated and become bright, and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downstream area) can be made dark without being illuminated. In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L goes out and the right side movable accessory 14R emits light while playing left-handed (first game), in the left game area 3A (first downstream area) The left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downstream area) is illuminated and becomes bright. In this way, when playing left-handed (first game), variation is given to the light emission mode of the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right playing area 3B (second downstream area). be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and in the first performance in the movable accessory decoration light emitting performance shown in FIG. When a movable body such as the left side movable accessory 14L or the right side movable accessory 14R emits light while playing a right-handed game (second game) that flows down to the left game area 3A (second downstream area) The left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the downstream area) and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right gaming area 3B (second downstream area) may be illuminated. According to this configuration, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R emit light during right-hand hitting (second game), the left side in the left game area 3A (first downstream area) The hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right gaming area 3B (second downstream area) can be illuminated and brightened. In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L emits light and the right side movable accessory 14R goes out while playing right hand (second game), in the left game area 3A (first downstream area) The left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) can be illuminated and become bright, and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downstream area) can be made dark without being illuminated. In addition, when the left side movable accessory 14L goes out and the right side movable accessory 14R emits light while playing right hand (second game), the left side movable accessory 14L lights up. The left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downstream area) is illuminated and becomes bright. In this way, when playing right-handed (second game), variation is given to the light emission mode of the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second downstream area). be able to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable accessory decorative light emitting performance of FIG. When you move to the advance position (direction position), you can execute the second performance (Fig. 148 (B)) in which the decorative members (combined accessory) (combined movable object) are combined into one. ing. According to this configuration, what was recognized by the player as an illuminated decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z suddenly becomes the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R, and is moved from the home position to the display screen 7a. When it moves to the front (front) center advance position (direction position), it combines into one decorative member (combined accessory) (combined movable object), so it is a game in which it changes from an illuminated decorative member to a movable object. Furthermore, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can provide a lighting effect that is unexpected and has an impact for the user. This can be done with a movable body such as

[Effect 8]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the movable accessory decorative light emitting performance shown in FIG. Even if the movable body) emits light, it does not illuminate the left-handed side light emitting area 3AF and the right-handed side light emitting area 3BF. According to this configuration, in a state in which the left movable accessory 14L and the right Even if a movable body such as the movable accessory 14R emits light, it does not brightly illuminate the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF, so the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable object draw the player's attention to the state in which they have advanced (moved) from the home position (in the direction of approaching each other) toward the advance position (direction position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a. A movable object such as the accessory 14R can be emphasized.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of a game board having a transparent acrylic plate and a movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decoration light emitting performance shown in FIG. 148 are performed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using decorative patterns. However, it may also be performed as part of a demonstration performance while waiting for customers. In this way, before playing the game, the player can experience the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect that can be experienced when actually playing the game. The main control board 80 (gaming control microcomputer 81) sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed, and executes the sub control. Output to the board 90. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the customer waiting command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the customer waiting command received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

[Modification 2]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect shown in FIG. However, plywood (so-called plywood) is used as an opaque board instead of the transparent acrylic board 2z, and furthermore, parts corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, and the upper arc-shaped A through hole is provided in the part corresponding to the right side movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right side movable accessory 14RD, and a transparent part is provided at the position of the cell image to be pasted on the front surface of the plywood (so-called plywood board) corresponding to the through hole. (It may be transparent or translucent). Further, the through hole may be closed with a transparent member (for example, a transparent acrylic member). This transparent member may be shaped.

[Modification 3]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect shown in FIG. It is divided into an arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, and the right side decoration part, which has an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R, is divided into an upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and a lower arc shape. It was divided into a movable accessory 14RD on the right side. However, the left side decorative part having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the left side movable accessory 14L may be in a standby state without being divided into upper and lower parts at the home position, or the left side decorative part having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the right side movable accessory 14R may be in a standby state without being divided into upper and lower parts. The right side decorative part having an arc shape may be in a standby state without being divided into upper and lower parts at the home position.

Even when the left side decorative part having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the left side movable accessory 14L is in a standby state at the home position, if it overlaps with a part of the left side decorative part in the front-rear direction with the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). This overlapping area is formed as the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, and when the left-side movable accessory 14L emits light, the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF can be brightly illuminated. In addition, even when the right side decorative part having an arc shape that is half of the ring shape of the right side movable accessory 14R is in a standby state at the home position, the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) and a part of the right side decorative part in the front-rear direction. Since it may overlap or overlap with the entire right side decorative part, this overlapping area is formed as the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF, and when the right side movable accessory 14R emits light, the right side light emitting area 3BF can be brightly illuminated. .

[Modification 4]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic board shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, movable bodies such as the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are arranged behind the transparent acrylic board 2z (transparent part), and the transparent acrylic board 2z No decorative member was placed in the space between the back surface of the (transparent part) and the front surface of the movable body. However, by placing a decorative member having a transparent part in the space between the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) and the front of the movable body, the positional relationship between the decorative member and the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) changes. The decorative member may be fixed to prevent the damage from occurring. The decorative member having a transparent part is one in which no light emitting part such as a full-color LED is mounted, and is placed on the back side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z via another member. Note that the decorative member having a transparent portion may or may not be attached to the back side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

By arranging a decorative member having a transparent part in front of the left movable accessory 14L at a position corresponding to the home position of the left movable accessory 14L, the presence of the left movable accessory 14L is hidden, and the left movable accessory 14L emits light. Then, the light is irradiated forward through the transparent part of the decorative member. The transparent part of the decorative member may be, for example, a transparent acrylic member, which may be shaped, or may be an inner lens. The inner lens diffusely refracts light incident from the rear, and if the left movable accessory 14L is placed behind the inner lens, the presence of the left movable accessory 14L can be made difficult to recognize. The left movable accessory 14L can be made difficult to see due to the inner lens in the decorative member. The inner lens may be transparent or semitransparent. As a result, it is as if the illuminating decorative member is placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the illuminating decorative member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), and the illuminating decorative member produces a luminous effect. You can realize the expression you want. In other words, it is possible to perform the same light emitting effect as the illumination decoration member without providing the illumination decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. In addition, in a state where the left movable accessory 14L is advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advanced position (direction position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), even if the left movable accessory 14L emits light, Since the light does not pass through the transparent part of the decorative member, the light emitted from the decorative member having the transparent part disappears, and the left movable accessory 14L is moved to the forward position (direction position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a. The left side movable accessory 14L can be emphasized by drawing the player's attention to the state in which it advances (moves) from the home position toward (in the direction of approaching each other). In other words, the presence of the left movable accessory 14L that is waiting at the home position is hidden by the decorative member, so when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, the left movable accessory 14L is placed in front of the left movable accessory 14L. While the presence of a decorative member having a transparent part can be emphasized, when the left movable accessory 14L that is advanced (moved) from the home position emits light, the left movable accessory 14L has a transparent part. There is no need to emphasize the presence of decorative members and hide their own existence, and now it is possible to emphasize their own existence.

In addition, by arranging a decorative member having a transparent part in front of the right movable accessory 14R at a position corresponding to the home position of the right movable accessory 14R, the presence of the right movable accessory 14R is hidden (in other words, the right movable accessory 14R is hidden). When the accessory 14R becomes difficult to see due to the decorative member) and the right movable accessory 14R emits light, the light is irradiated forward through the transparent part of the decorative member. The transparent part of the decorative member may be, for example, a transparent acrylic member, which may be shaped, or may be an inner lens. The inner lens diffusely refracts the light incident from behind, and if the right movable accessory 14R is placed behind the inner lens, the presence of the right movable accessory 14R can be made difficult to recognize. The right movable accessory 14R can be made difficult to see due to the inner lens in the decorative member. The inner lens may be transparent or semitransparent. As a result, it is as if the illuminating decorative member is placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the illuminating decorative member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), and the illuminating decorative member produces a luminous effect. It is possible to realize the desired expression. In other words, it is possible to perform the same light emitting effect as the illumination decoration member without providing the illumination decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. In addition, in a state in which the right movable accessory 14R is advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advanced position (direction position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), even if the right movable accessory 14R emits light, Since the light does not pass through the transparent part of the decorative member, the light emitted from the decorative member having the transparent part disappears, and the right movable accessory 14R is moved to the front (direction) center position (direction position) of the display screen 7a. The right side movable accessory 14R can be emphasized by drawing the player's attention to the state in which it advances (moves) from the home position toward (in the direction of approaching each other). In other words, the presence of the right side movable accessory 14R, which is waiting at the home position, is hidden by the decorative member, so when the right side movable accessory 14R emits light, it is placed in front of the right side movable accessory 14R. While the presence of a decorative member having a transparent part can be emphasized, when the right movable accessory 14R in a state of advancing (moving) from the home position emits light, the right movable accessory 14R has a transparent part. There is no need to emphasize the presence of decorative members and hide their own existence, and now it is possible to emphasize their own existence.

[Modification 5]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect shown in FIG. An inner lens was disposed to cover the front of the decorative substrate, and the inner lens and the decorative substrate were housed in the decorative member. An opening was formed in this decorative member, and the inner lens was exposed through this opening. The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative board placed behind the inner lens. Even when all the lights are off, the multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. In other words, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting display shown in FIG. The full-color LEDs were said to be difficult to see. However, an inner lens may be formed so that the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate accommodated in the first movable accessory 14 can be easily recognized, or instead of the inner lens, the design It may also be a transparent member coated with. This transparent member may be transparent or translucent.

[Modification 6]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect shown in FIG. In some cases, when a game is played by left-handed players or a game by right-handed players, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R emit light. However, when changing from a left-handed game to a right-handed game, the left side movable accessory 14L may turn off and the right side movable accessory 14R may emit light, or from a right-handed game to a left-handed game. When changing, the left movable accessory 14L may emit light and the right movable accessory 14R may turn off. In this way, when switching between a left-handed game and a right-handed game, the player can tell which way to play the game based on the light emitting manner of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Modification 7]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate shown in FIG. 147(E) and the movable accessory decoration light-emitting effect shown in FIG. No game nails were projected (planted) in the brightly illuminated area. However, the game nail may be protruded (planted). In this way, since the game nails are brightly illuminated, it is possible to clearly emphasize the path along which the game ball flows down to the player.

[Modification 8]
The movable accessory decoration light emitting effect shown in FIG. 148 may not include some of the effects described above, or may include other effects.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E2-1]
A game machine comprising a game board having a transparent part in which a game area is formed, and a plurality of game nails protruding from the front surface of the transparent part,
A plurality of movable bodies capable of emitting light are arranged behind the transparent part on the game board,
The movable body is visible through the transparent part,
When the movable body emits light while the movable body is waiting at a home position, it is possible to execute a first effect that illuminates a specific area of the gaming area corresponding to the movable body;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
When the movable body emits light, the game ball flowing down the specific area is easier to see than the game ball flowing down the area not illuminated by the light emission of the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2,
When the movable body emits light, the game nail protruding from the specific area is illuminated;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The gaming area has a first downstream area where the gaming ball flows down the left side of the gaming area, and a second downstream area where the gaming ball flows down the right side of the gaming area,
The plurality of movable bodies arranged on the game board include one that illuminates the specific area in the first downstream area and one that illuminates the specific area in the second downstream area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-4,
In the first effect, when the movable body emits light while playing a first game in which a game ball flows down to the first downstream area, the specific area in the first downstream area and the first 2 may illuminate the specific area in the downstream area;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-4 or aspect E2-5,
In the first performance, when the movable body emits light while playing a second game in which the game ball flows down to the second downstream area, the specific area in the first downstream area and the second 2 may illuminate the specific area in the downstream area;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-6,
When the movable body moves from the home position to the performance position, it is possible to perform a second performance by combining to form a combined movable body;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E2-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-7,
In the second performance, even if the combined movable body emits light, it does not illuminate the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The W mode display performance will be explained below using FIGS. 149 to 151. This W mode display performance can be executed during the special symbol variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the effect. Note that in the W mode display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are actually displayed, but are omitted in the figure. Further, the left sub-display screen 64L has a smaller display screen area than the main display screen 7a.

[W mode display effect A]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining W mode display effect A. In this W mode display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern variation production, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effects, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, type of character, appearance frequency of chance up, jackpot expectation level of chance up, etc. are set respectively. Modes A to C also have different settings. In the first mode image XH1, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, a mode A image XH21, a mode B image XH22, and a mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, or whether it is a reach effect. In the example of FIG. 149(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed darkly (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, Mode A image XH21 is placed at the top, indicating that mode A is selected. Moreover, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are passing over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), a decorative pattern low-speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern low-speed variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary at low speed and pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in front of the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13, the portions thereof are hidden by the decorative patterns and become invisible. Further, the player who saw the button image XH3 changes the mode from mode A to mode B by operating the select button 68. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop production, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, in the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, the portions where the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in front are hidden by the decorative patterns and cannot be seen. In this FIG. 149(C), the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, that is, mode B remains.
After this decorative pattern stop performance, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern arrangement is displayed.

[W mode display effect B]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining W mode display effect B. In this W mode display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern variation production, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effects, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, type of character, appearance frequency of chance up, jackpot expectation level of chance up, etc. are set respectively. Modes A to C also have different settings. In the first mode image XH1, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, a mode A image XH21, a mode B image XH22, and a mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, or whether it is a reach effect. In the example of FIG. 150(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed darkly (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, Mode A image XH21 is placed at the top, indicating that mode A is selected. Moreover, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are passing over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), character appearance effect 1 is performed. In this character appearance effect 1, a character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and this character image XH4 moves on the main display screen 7a and moves on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13. pass. In this case, when the character image XH4 is in the foreground, the portions of the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the character image XH4 and become invisible. Further, the player who saw the button image XH3 changes the mode from mode A to mode B by operating the select button 68. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), character appearance effect 2 is performed. In this character appearance effect 2, the character image XH4 moves to the left sub-display screen 64L and moves to the position of the second mode image XH2. In this case, the character image XH4 moves behind the second mode image XH2, and the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are always visible. In this FIG. 150(C), the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, that is, mode B remains.
After this character appearance performance 2, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern arrangement is displayed.

[W mode display effect C]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display effect C. In this W mode display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative pattern variation production, a variable display of decorative patterns is executed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effects, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, type of character, appearance frequency of chance up, jackpot expectation level of chance up, etc. are set respectively. Modes A to C also have different settings. In the first mode image XH1, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, a mode A image XH21, a mode B image XH22, and a mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, or whether it is a reach effect. In the example of FIG. 151(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed darkly (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, Mode A image XH21 is placed at the top, indicating that mode A is selected. Moreover, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are passing over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 at high speed, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the player who sees the button image XH3 changes the mode from mode A to mode B by operating the select button 68. Therefore, in this mode change effect, the mode B image XH12 is displayed darkly in the first mode image XH1 (indicated by hatching in the figure), and the mode B image XH22 is displayed at the top in the second mode image XH2. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), a reach effect is performed. In this ready-to-win performance, a ready-to-win state is formed by displaying the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in a stopped state as a "7" symbol, and displaying the decorative symbol 8C in a variable manner. In addition, in this reach effect, a character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and this character image XH4 moves on the main display screen 7a and moves on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13. pass. In this case, when the character image XH4 is in the foreground, the portions of the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the character image XH4 and become invisible. Note that in this reach effect, mode B is continuously selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), a button press effect is performed. In this button press effect, button image XH5 is displayed together with character image XH4. This button image XH5 represents the performance button 63, and is an image for prompting the player to press the performance button 63. Note that in this button press effect, mode B is continuously selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), a chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, when the player who sees the button image XH5 presses the effect button 63, a character image XH6 is displayed. This character image XH6 is written as "super hot" and is a chance up that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high. Note that in this chance-up performance, mode B is continuously selected.
After this chance-up effect, a jackpot pattern arrangement is displayed in the case of a jackpot, and a loss pattern arrangement is displayed in the case of a loss, using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modified example]
In the W mode display effect described above, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are arranged so as to overlap in the second mode image XH2 of the left sub display screen 64L, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the 1-mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 may be arranged so as to overlap. Furthermore, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 may be arranged in parallel so that they do not overlap.
In the above W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 are each composed of a mode A image, a mode B image, and a mode C image, but they are not limited to this. . For example, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 may each be composed of different mode images. For example, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed as the first mode image XH1, and a mode D image representing a mode D different from modes A to C is displayed as the second mode image XH2. A mode E image different from modes A to D, and a mode F image different from modes A to E may be displayed. Also, as the first mode image XH1, mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13 are displayed, and as second mode image XH2, mode A image XH21, mode B image XH22, and modes A to C are displayed. Different mode D images may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 is displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. According to this configuration, since the mode is displayed on each of the two display devices, the player can easily recognize which mode the player is currently in, and can enjoy the mode performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 displayed on the main display screen 7a and the second mode image XH2 displayed on the left sub display screen 64L suggest the same mode. According to this configuration, since the same mode is displayed on each of the two display devices, the player can easily recognize one mode and enjoy the mode effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the above W mode display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the main display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed. In this case, the first mode image XH1 may overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and in that case, the first mode image , 8R at least partially hidden. According to this configuration, on the main display screen 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is prioritized over the mode display, and on the left sub-display screen 64L, the mode display is prioritized over the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Since the display is given priority, the player can easily grasp the mode while enjoying the game presentation, and can also enjoy the mode presentation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the character image XH4 is displayed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed, and the character image XH4 and the first mode image In some cases, the first mode image XH1 is placed behind the character image XH4, and is at least partially hidden by the character image XH4. According to this configuration, on the main display screen 7a, the variable display of the character image XH4 is given priority over the mode display, and on the left sub-display screen 64L, the mode display is given priority over the variable display of the character image XH4. The player can easily understand the mode and enjoy the mode presentation while enjoying the game presentation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a first mode suggestion display suggesting a mode on the first display means,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a second mode suggestion display suggesting a mode on the second display means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-1,
the mode represented by the first mode suggestion display and the mode represented by the second mode suggestion display are the same;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance that causes a decorative pattern to be displayed in a variable manner on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-3,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, the first mode suggestion display and the decorative pattern are displayed in the first display means. If they overlap, the first mode suggestion display is placed behind the decorative pattern and is hidden by the decorative pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that displays a predetermined image different from a decorative pattern on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and when the first mode suggestion display and the predetermined image overlap, the fourth display effect is performed. 1, the mode suggestion display is placed behind the predetermined image and is hidden by the predetermined image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
The following embodiments may also be used.
The first mode suggestion display (first mode image XH1) and the second mode suggestion display (second mode image XH2) are displayed simultaneously.
The first mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and these plurality of mode displays are displayed so as not to overlap each other.
The second mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and these plurality of mode displays are displayed so as to overlap each other.
The first display means (main display screen 7a) has a larger display screen area than the second display means (left sub display screen 64L).
A predetermined image (character image XH4, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) may be displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and the predetermined image overlaps with the second mode suggestion display. If the second mode suggestion display is located in front of the predetermined image and is visible, and if the predetermined image is in a position overlapping with the first mode suggestion display, the second mode suggestion display The display is located behind the predetermined image, and the overlapping portion is not visible.
In the second display means, the second mode suggestion display corresponds to a first operation part image (for example, button image XH3) representing a first operation part (for example, select button 68) for changing the mode. A second operation part image (for example, button image XH5) representing the second operation part (for example, production button 63) is displayed on the first display means, and the second operation part is By the operator's operation, a predetermined effect different from changing the mode (for example, displaying the character image XH6) is performed (see W mode display effect C).

The movable part operation warning effect will be explained below using FIGS. 152 to 154. 152 to 154, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. It has since been omitted.

This movable part operation warning effect can be executed after power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and can also be executed during a variable effect using decorative symbols (during a variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a movable part operation warning effect is included, the command is processed from the ROM 103. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sub display screen 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U).

Here, a method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61 will be explained, and movable part operation warning performance A and movable part operation warning performance B will be explained in order.

[How to lock the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61]
First, a method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining a method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward in its entirety by the player. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, at the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operation section, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword button is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button at the tip.

The sword part and handle part of the sword member 65 are decorative members that can emit light, and can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner as the performance progresses. In other words, the sword member 65 has a decorative member, and can emit light in various light-emitting modes by the light emission of the decorative member.

To lock the sword member 65 to the upper plate 61, first insert the sword member 65 into an insertion opening (not shown) provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 61 and push it downward, as shown in FIG. while rotating it counterclockwise HTY. Then, as shown in FIG. 152(B), the sword member 65 and the upper plate 61 are completely locked by continuing to rotate until a "click" is heard.

When this lock is completed, the sword member 65 is slightly rotated about the vertical axis of the sword member 65 relative to the player seated at the front of the gaming machine 1. , the player is in a position where it is easy to grasp the handle of the sword member 65 with both hands and push the sword member 65 downward.

A lock completion sensor (not shown) is provided inside the upper plate 61 to detect the completion of locking of the sword member 65, and a detection signal from the lock completion sensor is input to the sub-control board 90. The detection signal from the lock completion sensor becomes a lock completion logic when the sword member 65 is locked to the upper plate 61 (hereinafter referred to as "lock completion"), and the detection signal is the lock completion logic when the sword member 65 is locked to the upper plate 61. The electric circuit is constructed so that when the lock is not in the state (hereinafter referred to as "lock incomplete"), the lock incomplete logic is the inverse of the lock complete logic.

Furthermore, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the lock completion sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come loose, the detection signal from the lock completion sensor will be interrupted. The electric circuit is pre-assembled so that the logic is an incomplete lock logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 warns of this trouble. It is possible to notify by images and warning sounds (specific sounds).

In addition to the sword member 65 that can be operated by the player, the upper plate 61 is also provided with an effect button 63 and a select button 68 that can be operated by the player. The performance button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. Therefore, the production button 63 is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. In addition, the select button 68 may be operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses, or operated (pressed) by the player when changing a predetermined setting of the gaming machine 1. do. Therefore, the select button 68 is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. In this way, the upper plate 61 is provided with the sword member 65, the sword button of the sword member 65, the performance button 63, and the select button 68 as a plurality of movable parts that can be operated (pressed) by the player. Furthermore, since all the movable parts are arranged on the upper tray 61 that is easily visible, all the movable parts are arranged at positions that are easily visible to the player.

Further, in the production button 63, a pressing member operated (pressed) by the player is formed of a transparent member, and a decorative member that can emit light is provided inside the pressing member. When this decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member and the effect button 63 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner.

In the select button 68, a pressing member operated (pressed) by the player is formed of a transparent member, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member. When this decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, allowing the select button 68 to emit light in a predetermined manner. Note that the pressing member of the select button 68 may be formed of an opaque member (for example, a member having a black color). In this case, no decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member of the select button 68, and the select button 68 does not emit light.

[Movable part operation warning performance A]
Next, movable part operation warning effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining movable part operation warning effect A. The movable part operation warning performance A can be executed after power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and can also be executed during a variable display using decorative symbols (during a variable display). Here, a movable part operation warning performance A executed during a fluctuating performance (during a fluctuating display) using decorative symbols will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the black spherical fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first to third reservation display positions 9Ad, and the fourth No pending icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only three pending icons remain in stock without being consumed. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a with the numbers spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily understood intuitively because they are difficult to distinguish among various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with high expectations for a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 153(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153(B), the effect button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a. An arrow image YBG that is enlarged and moves in the vertical direction is displayed above the performance button image BG, and a message MG1 urging the user to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed near the top of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the player does not operate (press) the production button 63 and rotates the sword member 65 in a direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. 152(A), that is, in a clockwise direction, as shown in FIG. 153(C). As shown in FIG. 153(B), the image shown in FIG. Alternatively, a warning image is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, the warning is issued when the player operates the sword member 65 (rotating it clockwise). Here, when the player manipulates the sword member 65 (rotates in the statistical direction), the player does not gain any advantage, does not feel a sense of accomplishment at all, and a warning is issued.

This warning image is a warning image that conveys that the locking of the sword member 65 is not completed, and is also an image that conveys a method of canceling the warning. In other words, the warning image is an image that notifies that the locking of the sword member 65 has not been completed, and further serves as an image that informs how to complete the locking of the sword member 65.

In the center of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, there is an image of an incompletely locked sword that imitates the sword member 65 and has the same attitude as the sword member 65 when it is not yet locked. KG is displayed. A message MG2 "Warning" is displayed below the incompletely locked sword image KG, and a message "Please complete the lock by turning the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks" is displayed below the message MG2. MG3 is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the rotation direction is displayed around the center of the incompletely locked sword image KG.

In addition, while the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the message MG3's voice says, "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock." is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning. In other words, in this embodiment, a dedicated sound for notifying the warning is not provided, and the sound of the message MG3 that tells how to cancel the warning is also used as the sound for notifying the warning. In other words, the warning sound has both the functions of a sound for notifying the warning and the sound of the message MG3 that tells how to cancel the warning.

Next, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the player's operation (presses) causes the ally character CRA to appear in the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 153(D). This performance condition is achieved. At this time, the warning image shown in FIG. 153(C) continues to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screens 64.

In the present embodiment, when the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, it suggests the start of a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, so the player When you see the ally character CRA displayed in a large size in the center, your anticipation for the progressing performance increases.

Here, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the ally character CRA appears, which gives the player a sense of accomplishment. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the ally character CRA may not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), it is a jackpot. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started, but when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (for example, number "7") and are not stopped and displayed, It will be out of place. When a jackpot or a loss is determined, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation.

Note that after FIG. 153(D), if the player accidentally rotates the sword member 65 counterclockwise to return it from the clockwise rotated state to its original state, The warning image disappears from the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screens 64, and a message MG3 appears saying "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock." The sound no longer flows from the speaker 67.

[Movable part operation warning performance B]
Next, movable part operation warning effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining movable part operation warning effect B. The movable part operation warning performance B can be executed after power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and can also be executed during a variable display using decorative symbols (during a variable display). Here, a description will be given of movable part operation warning performance B that is executed during a variable display using decorative symbols (during a variable display).

First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A variable presentation (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Here, the yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, and the white spherical reservation icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the third suspension display position 9Ad, respectively. The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, only three pending icons remain in stock without being consumed. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable production (variable display) of decorative symbols. In addition to the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is shown in blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is shown in red. The numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. Note that these numbers are arranged at the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. It looks like this.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 154(A), the sword member 65 is imitated as shown in FIG. 154(B), and the locking of the sword member 65 is completed. A locked sword image PG, which is in the same posture as when A message MG1 prompting the user to operate the sword member 65 (push downward) is displayed near the top of 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the player rotates the sword member 65 in a direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. 152(A), that is, in a clockwise direction, without operating the sword member 65 (pushing it downward). As shown in FIG. 154C, the image shown in FIG. A warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, the warning is issued when the player operates the sword member 65 (rotating it clockwise). Here, when the player manipulates the sword member 65 (rotates in the statistical direction), the player does not gain any advantage, does not feel a sense of accomplishment at all, and a warning is issued.

This warning image is a warning image that conveys that the locking of the sword member 65 is not completed, and is also an image that conveys a method of canceling the warning. In other words, the warning image is an image that notifies that the locking of the sword member 65 has not been completed, and is also an image that informs how to complete the locking of the sword member 65.

In the center of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, there is an image of an incompletely locked sword that imitates the sword member 65 and has the same attitude as the sword member 65 when it is not yet locked. KG is displayed. A message MG2 "Warning" is displayed below the incompletely locked sword image KG, and a message "Please complete the lock by turning the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks" is displayed below the message MG2. MG3 is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the rotation direction is displayed around the center of the incompletely locked sword image KG.

In addition, while the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the message MG3's voice says, "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock." is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning. In other words, in this embodiment, a dedicated sound for notifying the warning is not provided, and the sound of the message MG3 that tells how to cancel the warning is also used as the sound for notifying the warning. In other words, the warning sound has both the functions of a sound for notifying the warning and the sound of the message MG3 that tells how to cancel the warning.

Next, when the player operates (presses downward) the sword member 65, as shown in FIG. The performance condition that appears is achieved. At this time, the warning image shown in FIG. 154(C) continues to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screens 64.

In the present embodiment, when the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, it suggests the start of a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, so the player When you see the ally character CRA displayed in a large size in the center, your anticipation for the progressing performance increases.

Here, when the player operates the sword member 65 (pushing it downward), the ally character CRA appears, which gives the player a sense of accomplishment. Note that even if the player operates the sword member 65 (pushing it downward), the ally character CRA may not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), it is a jackpot. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started, but when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (for example, number "7") and are not stopped and displayed, It will be out of place. When a jackpot or a loss is determined, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation.

Note that after FIG. 154(D), if the player accidentally rotates the sword member 65 counterclockwise to return the sword member 65 from the clockwise rotated state to its original state, The warning image disappears from the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screens 64, and a message MG3 appears saying "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock." The sound no longer flows from the speaker 67.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the moving part operation warning effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. (having multiple movable parts), and the performance using the movable part includes the first performance in which the performance condition can be achieved by the player's operation (in the case of movable part operation warning performance A, the movable part is 154(D) in part operation warning performance B), and a second performance in which a warning is issued due to the player's operation (FIGS. 153(C) and (D) in movable part operation warning performance A). In the warning performance B, it is possible to perform the actions shown in FIGS. 154(C) and 154(D). According to this configuration, there are cases in which the performance conditions are achieved due to the player's operation and a sense of accomplishment can be obtained, and cases in which the player is unable to obtain a sense of accomplishment and a warning is issued due to the player's operation. , and the effect obtained can be varied depending on the movable parts that the player operates, so when there are multiple movable parts that the player can operate, it is possible to feel a sense of accomplishment. It is possible to clearly emphasize which moving parts can be moved. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the moving part operation warning performance A shown in FIG. 153 and the moving part operation warning performance B shown in FIG. 154, while the first performance is in progress, the second performance is simultaneously performed. It is now possible to execute. According to this configuration, even if the performance conditions are achieved due to the player's operation and the player is able to feel a sense of accomplishment, the warning cannot be issued to the player by always maintaining the situation where the warning can be issued. This can contribute to preventing such operations.

[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a sub-display screen 64 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, for example, in the movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. However, in the second effect, a warning image (specific image) is displayed that tells the user how to cancel the warning. According to this configuration, a warning image (specific image) that tells how to cancel a warning is displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (display means), so that by knowing the procedure for canceling a warning, it is possible to respond quickly. In addition, the player can easily notice that there is a problem with his or her own operation of the movable part, and this can contribute to preventing the player from operating the movable part for which a warning is issued.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154, a notification sound (specific sound) that notifies a warning is output. Now you can do that. According to this configuration, the notification sound (specific sound) first makes the player aware that a warning is being issued, and the action performed by the player immediately before the notification sound (specific sound) is not good. You can convey the point that it is an act.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the performance button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154 emit light. It is now possible to do so. According to this configuration, the movable parts that can be operated by the player are further decorated and emphasized by emitting light, thereby encouraging the player to operate the movable parts. can contribute to this.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. 154 are decorative members. It is designed to have According to this configuration, the movable part that can be operated by the player can be decorated and emphasized with a decorative member, and can contribute to making the presence of the movable part easily noticeable to the player.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the performance button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154 are easily visible. It seems that it is placed in a certain position. According to this configuration, the arrangement of the movable parts can be easily understood by the player.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the movable part operation warning performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the movable part operation warning performance A of FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning performance B of FIG. 154(C), a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning can be output. However, the notification sound (specific sound) may not be output. That is, the warning image may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. Further, as the output of the notification sound (specific sound), the volume of the notification sound (specific sound) may be made smaller than the volume of the effect sound for the effect being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the performance sound that is being performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will not interfere with the performance, and the results of winning and losing that are of most interest to the player can be derived by proceeding with the performance on the display screen 7a for the time being. can be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the moving part operation warning performance A shown in FIG. 153(C) and the moving part operation warning performance B shown in FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 21 was displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish among the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively. , is placed on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and other images are placed and displayed behind the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images. Ta. In this embodiment, when the movable part operation warning effect is started, the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screens 64, so the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. When displaying on the display screen 64R, a number representing the number of reserved balls may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, or a warning image may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In this case, a number representing the number of reserved balls may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. In this way, the number displayed as a numerical value for the number of held balls can be displayed on another sub-display screen that is different from the warning image, and furthermore, the number displayed as a numerical value for the number of held balls can be displayed on another sub-display screen that is different from the warning image. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the screen 7a, and to make it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 4]
The movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154(C) were executed during the fluctuating performance (during the fluctuating display) using decorative symbols. However, the movable part operation warning effect can be executed after power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, and when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed (during a variable display), for example, when waiting for a customer, It can also be executed in a demonstration performance for In other words, when the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines that the sword member 65 is not yet locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it is notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). be able to. In this way, regardless of the progress of the performance or the state of the game, if the sword member 65 is not completely locked, a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound) can be used to notify the player.

[Modification 5]
In the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 makes a determination, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, a special lever that can be operated by the player is provided near the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152(A) and 152(B)) on the front frame 53, and in a position where it is easily visible. You can. When the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, and the special lever is operated (pushed downward), the front frame 53 is released from the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached. It has become. When this special lever is operated (pressed downward), it is detected by a special lever detection sensor, and a detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is input to the sub control board 90. The detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is an open operation logic when the special lever is operated (pushed downward), and an open operation logic when the special lever is not operated (pushed downward). The electrical circuit is set up so that it has closed logic, which is an inverted version of the logic.

Additionally, when a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, this operation is detected by the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is used to control dispensing. It is input to the board 110. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes an open logic when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction. The electric circuit is constructed so that when the device is not operated, the logic is closed, which is the inverse of the open logic. When the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the key is rotated in a predetermined direction, the dispensing control board 110 transmits a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80 that has received the command sends a command to that effect. The command is sent to the sub control board 90. Thereby, the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can grasp that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction.

In a state where the sub CPU 92 does not know that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, the special lever is operated based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor. (Pressed downward), a warning image may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, or a warning sound (specific sound) may be played from the speaker 67. can. Note that the warning image is an image imitating a special lever, instead of the incompletely locked sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), Message MG3 "Please raise it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks" will be displayed. Also, instead of the counterclockwise arrow image YG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), an upward arrow image YG will be displayed. .

At the very least, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come off the connector on the board, the signal from the special lever detection sensor will be transmitted. The electric circuit is pre-assembled so that the logic of the detection signal is an open operation logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can troubleshoot the problem. Notification can be made using a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). In addition, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come off the connector on the board, the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor will be detected. The electric circuit may be pre-assembled so that the signal logic is open logic.

By the way, the open state or closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached is detected by a front frame closure detection sensor. The detection signal is input to the payout control board 110. The detection signal from the front frame closure detection sensor becomes a closed logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in a closed state, and the detection signal is a closed logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached The electric circuit is constructed so that when the frame and are in an open state, the open logic is the inverse of the closed logic.

If the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come loose, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor will change. , the electrical circuit is pre-assembled to provide open logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the payout control board 110 that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 uses this trouble as a command to send to the main control board 80. The main control board 80, which has received this command, sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 90. Thereby, the sub-control board 90 can notify by a door opening image or a door opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in an open state.

Although the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached can be opened by staff or workers, there is a risk that the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached may be opened by unauthorized acts. The state (open state, closed state) of the inner frame and the state (open state, closed state) are monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to use an image with a higher level of information that can be communicated to the surroundings of the game machine 1 compared to a warning image. Furthermore, it is necessary to make the sound more informative than the warning sound (specific sound), which can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1.

In other words, when the sub CPU 92 does not know that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, the sub CPU 92 detects the special lever based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor. When it is determined that the lever is operated (pressed downward), a warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and a warning sound (specific sound) is played from the speaker 67. On the other hand, in a state where the sub CPU 92 knows that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, the sub CPU 92 further detects the key based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor. , when it is determined that the special lever has been operated (pressed downward), the right sub-display screen 64R displays a door opening image with a higher level of information that can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 compared to the warning image. Alternatively, the door opening sound can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 instead of the left sub-display screen 64L, and the door opening sound can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 with a higher alertness than the warning sound (specific sound). It is played from the speaker 67.

[Modification 6]
In the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 makes a determination, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, the specific decorative part (which can also be used for lighting effects) attached to the front frame 53 is used for fixing other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2. A movable part having the following functions may be provided. This movable part is arranged at a position that is visible to the player and can be touched and operated. This movable part is basically operated by an attendant or worker when installing the gaming machine 1 at a gaming parlor. By continuing to rotate the movable part counterclockwise, for example, until it feels like it clicks, other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2 can be fixed, The lock is completed.

Inside the front frame 53 to which the specific decorative part is attached, a specific decorative part lock completion sensor is provided to detect the completion of locking of the movable part, and a detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor is sent to the sub-control board 90. It has been entered. The detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor indicates a state in which other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2 are fixed and locked (hereinafter referred to as "specific decorative part lock completion"). ), the specific decorative part is locked, and if the movable part is not rotated, for example counterclockwise, until it clicks, or is fixed, the movable part is rotated, for example, by a clock. When the other members arranged on the front frame 53 or the other members arranged on the game board 2 are not fixed (hereinafter referred to as "specific decorative part lock incomplete"), the The electric circuit is constructed so that the specific decoration part lock incomplete logic is an inversion of the decoration part lock completion logic. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines that the specific decorative part lock is not completed based on the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor, the sub CPU 92 displays a warning image on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. or a warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67. Note that the warning image is an image imitating the specific decoration part, instead of the incompletely locked sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D) Message MG3 "Turn the decorative part in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" will be displayed.

In addition, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come loose, the specific decorative part lock will be completed. The logic of the detection signal from the sensor is such that the electric circuit is pre-assembled so that locking of the specific decorative part is not completed. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 Troubles can be reported using warning images and warning sounds (specific sounds).

[Modification 7]
In the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 makes a determination, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, the insertion of an unauthorized instrument into the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152(A) and 152(B)) may be detected and notified by a warning image or warning sound (specific sound). In the cylinder lock CYK, when an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the key insertion slot, the internal cylinder (movable part) may rotate slightly (it may rotate halfway). In other words, the internal cylinder (movable part) may be operated by the player.

If an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) rotates a little, the cylinder lock detection sensor will detect that the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is input to the dispensing control board 110. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes an unauthorized opening logic when an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated. The electric circuit is constructed so that when the internal cylinder (movable part) is not inserted and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not rotated, the normal closing logic is the reverse of the unauthorized opening logic. When an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated, the dispensing control board 110 transmits a command to the main control board 80 and receives this command. The main control board 80 sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 90. Thereby, the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can grasp that an unauthorized instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated. Note that the warning image includes an image imitating a cylinder lock instead of the incompletely locked sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), Message MG3 "Please turn the lock in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to lock the door" will be displayed.

When the sub CPU 92 determines that an unauthorized instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated, the sub CPU 92 displays a warning image on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen. 64L, or a warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67. Note that the warning image is an image imitating a cylinder lock CYK instead of the incompletely locked sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D).

Furthermore, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come loose, the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor will not be detected. The electric circuit is pre-assembled so that the signal logic is an unauthorized opening logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can troubleshoot the problem. Notification can be made using a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

By the way, the open state or closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached is detected by a front frame closure detection sensor. The detection signal is input to the payout control board 110. The detection signal from the front frame closure detection sensor becomes a closed logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in a closed state, and the detection signal is a closed logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached The electric circuit is constructed so that when the frame and are in an open state, the open logic is the inverse of the closed logic.

If the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come loose, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor will change. , the electrical circuit is pre-assembled to provide open logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the payout control board 110 that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 uses this trouble as a command to send to the main control board 80. The main control board 80, which has received this command, sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 90. Thereby, the sub-control board 90 can notify by a door opening image or a door opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in an open state.

Although the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached can be opened by staff or workers, there is a risk that the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached may be opened by unauthorized acts. The state (open state, closed state) of the inner frame and the state (open state, closed state) are monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to use an image with a higher level of information that can be communicated to the surroundings of the game machine 1 compared to a warning image. Furthermore, it is necessary to make the sound more informative than the warning sound (specific sound), which can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1.

In other words, when the sub CPU 92 determines that an unauthorized instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated, the sub CPU 92 displays the warning image on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64R. It is displayed on the sub-display screen 64L, and a warning sound (specific sound) is played from the speaker 67. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 92 determines that an unauthorized instrument has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) has been completely rotated, the sub CPU 92 compares the warning image with the gaming machine 1. A door opening image with a high alertness that can be transmitted to the surrounding area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 instead of on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and furthermore, compared with the warning sound (specific sound). A door opening sound with a high alertness that can be transmitted to the surroundings of the game machine 1 is played from a speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
In the movable part operation warning performance A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning performance B of FIG. 154, a warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. However, the message MG2 "Warning" is displayed as a warning image, and below the message MG2 there is a message MG3 "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" and a message MG3 counterclockwise. Instead of displaying the arrow image YG, an error code (for example, "Warning: Error code E4") may be displayed. The sudden display of an error code can give the player a sense of anxiety and convey the point that the action the player performed just before the error code is displayed is a bad action.

[Modification 9]
The movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154 may not include some of the effects described, or may include other effects.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of movable parts that can be operated by a player,
The performance by the movable part can include a first performance in which a performance condition can be achieved by the player's operation, and a second performance in which a warning is issued by the player's operation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E4-1,
While the first performance is in progress, the second performance can be executed simultaneously;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E4-1 or aspect E4-2,
It has a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
In the second effect, a specific image is displayed that tells how to cancel the warning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-3,
In the second performance, a specific sound for notifying the warning can be output.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-4,
The movable part is capable of emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-5,
The movable part may include a decorative member.
A gaming machine characterized by

◇[Aspect E4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-65,
The movable part is arranged at a position that is easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other variations]
Among the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as the operation parts to be operated by the player, but is not limited to these, and the operation parts to be operated by the player include a lever, , a trigger, etc. may also be used. Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, out of the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, although the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub display screen 64, The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 5...Board lamp 7...Image display device 9A, 9B...Pending icon (pending image)
9C...The relevant fluctuation icon (pending image)
13...Third movable accessory 14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 17...Big winning opening opening starting port 20...First starting port (first ball entrance)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64...Sub display screen 66...Frame lamp 81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for production control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon from a group of icons consisting of the change icon representing the change or the hold icon representing hold is displayed in a first form,
The second display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the first form changes and is displayed in a second form,
The third display effect is such that the predetermined icon displayed in the second form moves to a first display position that is not the display position of the variable icon or the display position of the pending icon, and is enlarged and displayed. It is a production that
The fourth display performance is a performance in which a success/failure performance is performed to determine success or failure using the predetermined icon enlarged and displayed in the third display performance,
The fifth display performance is a performance in which the shape of the predetermined icon used in the success/failure performance is changed and displayed in a third form,
The sixth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the third form moves to a display position of the variable icon or a display position of the pending icon,
A case where a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, and the sixth display effect is performed. There is,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, then the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed. , then the fifth display effect is performed, and then the sixth display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images